Preface, Contents
Product Overview 1
Configuration Options 2
Installation 3
Wiring 4
Commissioning and Diagnostics 5
General Technical Specifications 6
Technical Specifications 7
Appendices
Order Numbers A
Device Master Files B
Dimensioned Drawings and
Pinouts C
Glossary, Index
Edition 02/2003
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
Manual
SIMATIC
This manual is part of the documentation
package with the order number
6ES7198-8FA10-8BA0
!Danger
indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage will result if proper precautions
are not taken.
!Warning
indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage can result if proper
precautions are not taken.
!Caution
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Notice
draws your attention to particularly important information on the product, handling the product, or to a
particular part of the documentation.
Qualified Personnel
Only qualified personnel should be allowed to install and work on this equipment. Qualified persons are
defined as persons who are authorized to commission, to ground and to tag circuits, equipment, and
systems in accordance with established safety practices and standards.
Correct Usage
Note the following:
!Warning
This device and its components may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the
technical description, and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which
have been approved or recommended by Siemens.
This product can only function correctly and safely if it is transported, stored, set up, and installed
correctly, and operated and maintained as recommended.
Trademarks SIMATIC, SIMATIC HMI and SIMATIC NET are registered trademarks of SIEMENS AG.
Third parties using for their own purposes any other names in this document which refer to trademarks
might infringe upon the rights of the trademark owners.
Safety Guidelines
This manual contains notices intended to ensure personal safety, as well as to protect the products and
connected equipment against damage. These notices are highlighted by the symbols shown below and
graded according to severity by the following texts:
We have checked the contents of this manual for agreement
with the hardware and software described. Since deviations
cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full
agreement. However, the data in this manual are reviewed
regularly and any necessary corrections included in
subsequent editions. Suggestions for improvement are
welcomed.
Disclaim of LiabilityCopyright W Siemens AG 1999 – 2003 All rights reserved
The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its
contents is not permitted without express written authority.
Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights
created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or
design, are reserved.
Siemens AG
Bereich Automation and Drives
Geschaeftsgebiet Industrial Automation Systems
Postfach 4848, D- 90327 Nuernberg Siemens AG 2003
Technical data subject to change.
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft EWA-4NEB 780601602-06
iii
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Preface
Purpose of the manual
The information contained in this manual will enable you to operate the ET 200X
distributed I/O device as a DP slave on PROFIBUS-DP.
Required basic knowledge
General knowledge of automation engineering is required to understand the
manual.
Scope of validity of the manual
This manual is valid for the ET 200X distributed I/O system components specified
in Appendix A.
This manual contains a description of the components that were valid at the time
the manual was published. We reserve the right to enclose a Product Information
bulletin containing up-to-date information about new components and new versions
of components.
Changes since the previous version
Compared to the previous version, the manual contains the following changes and
additions:
DPV1 support of DPV1 of all basic modules with DDB file SI0380**.GS*
Note: You can recognize the previous version of this ET 200X manual by the
number EWA-4NEB 78060160x-04 in the footer.
The current number is EWA-4NEB 78060160x-05.
Certification
See Section 6.1 Standards, certificates, and approvals.
CE certification
See Section 6.1 Standards, certificates, and approvals.
Identification code for Australia (C-tick mark)
See Section 6.1 Standards, certificates, and approvals.
Preface
iv ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Standards
See Section 6.1 Standards, certificates, and approvals.
Position in the information landscape
This delivery package (order number 6ES7 198-8FA01-8AA0) consists of
4 manuals with the following contents:
BM 147/CPU basic
module
Installation and
wiring
Commissioning and
diagnostics
Technical
specifications of
digital and analog
modules
Order numbers for
digital and analog
modules
Distributed I/O Device
ET 200X EM300 Motor Starter
Wiring
Commissioning
and diagnostics
Technical data
Order numbers
Addressing
ET 200X with BM
147/CPU with
PROFIBUS-DP
Commissioning
and diagnostics
Technical data
Order numbers
STEP 7 list of
operations
Wiring
Commissioning
and diagnostics
Functions and
technical data
Order numbers
Frequency converter
EM 148-FC
Guide You can quickly access specific information in the manual by using the following
aids:
At the beginning of the manual you will find a comprehensive table of contents
and lists of the figures and tables in the entire manual.
In the left margin on each page in every chapter you will find information that
provides you with an overview of the contents of each section .
Following the appendices, you will find a glossary in which important technical
terms used in the manual are defined.
At the end of the manual you will find a comprehensive index enabling rapid
access to the information you are looking for.
Preface
v
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Points to note
In addition to this manual, you will also need the manual for the DP master (see
Appendix A).
Note
You will find a detailed list of the contents of the ET 200X manuals in Section 1.8
of this manual. We recommend that you begin by reading this section so as to find
out which parts of which manuals are most relevant to you in helping you to do
what you want to do.
Recycling and disposal
The ET 200X is suitable for recycling on account of its low-emission components.
To ensure that your old devices are recycled and disposed of in an environmentally
sound way, contact an authorized company for electronic waste.
Additional support
If you have any questions that are not answered here on the use on any of the
products described in this manual, please contact your Siemens office or agency.
http://www.ad.siemens.com/automation/partner
Training center
We offer the relevant courses to get you started more easily with xxx and the
SIMATIC S7 programmable controller. Please contact either your regional training
center or the central training center in
D-90327 Nuremberg.
Telephone: +49 (911) 895-3200.
Internet: http://www.sitrain.com
Preface
vi ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
A&D Technical Support
Available at any time of the day:
Johnson City
Nuremberg
Beijing
Technical Support
Worldwide (Nuremberg)
Technical support
Loc. time: 0:00 to 24:00/365 days
Teleph.: +49 ( 0 ) 1 8 0 5 0 5 0 - 2 2 2
Fax: +49 ( 0 ) 1 8 0 5 0 5 0 - 2 2 3
E-Mail: adsupport@
siemens.com
GMT: +1:00
Europe/Africa (Nuremberg)
Authorization
Loc. time: Mon-Fri 8:00 to 17:00
Teleph.: +49 ( 0 ) 1 8 0 5 0 5 0 - 2 2 2
Fax: +49 ( 0 ) 1 8 0 5 0 5 0 - 2 2 3
E-Mail: adautorisierung@
siemens.com
GMT: +1:00
United States (Johnson City)
Technical Support and
Authorization
Loc. time: Mon-Fri 8:00 to 17:00
Teleph.: +1 (0) 423 262 2522
Fax: +1 (0) 423 262 2289
E-Mail: simatic.hotline@
sea.siemens.com
GMT: -5:00
Asia/Australia (Beijing)
Technical Support and
Authorization
Loc. time: Mon-Fri 8:00 to 17:00
Teleph.: +86 10 64 75 75 75
Fax: +86 10 64 74 74 74
E-Mail: adsupport.asia@
siemens.com
GMT: +8:00
Technical support and authorization staff usually speak German and English.
Preface
vii
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Service & Support on the Internet
In addition to our documentation, you can also find comprehensive information on
the Internet.
http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support
There you can find:
Our newsletter with the latest product information.
Any documents you may require via our search in Service & Support.
A forum in which users and specialists worldwide exchange their experiences.
Your contact person in Automation & Drives via the contact database.
Information on local service, repairs, spare parts. You will also find lots more
under ”Services”.
Preface
viii ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
ix
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Contents
1 Product Overview
1.1 What are distributed I/O devices? 1-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 What is the ET 200X distributed I/O device? 1-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3 ET 200X-DESINA/ET 200X-ECOFAST 1-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4 ET 200X with pneumatic functionality 1-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5 ET 200X with PM 148 DO 4 DC 24V/2A power module 1-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.6 ET 200X with SITOP power 1-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.7 ET 200X with CP 142-2 communication processor 1-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.8 Guide to the ET 200X manuals 1-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 Configuration Options
2.1 Brief overview of the different basic modules 2-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2 Feeding and looping through the supply voltage for the electronic
components/sensors and PROFIBUS-DP 2-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3 Disconnecting ET 200X from the bus and looping through the supply
voltage/PROFIBUS-DP (not ET 200X-DESINA/ET 200X-ECOFAST) 2-6. . .
2.4 Connecting the load supply voltage to motor starters/frequency
converters and looping it through 2-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5 Connecting and looping through the load voltage 2-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6 Use of the SITOP power power supply unit 2-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7 Connecting and looping through load voltages and PROFIBUS-DP to
ET 200X-DESINA / ET 200X-ECOFAST 2-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.8 Restrictions on the number of modules 2-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.9 Maximum configuration and configuration options with power modules 2-16. .
3 Installation
3.1 Installing/deinstalling the ET 200X 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2 Installing/disassembling pneumatic components 3-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3 Setting/modifying the PROFIBUS address 3-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4 Terminating PROFIBUS with a terminating resistor 3-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 Wiring
4.1 General rules and regulations for operating an ET 200X 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2 Operating the ET 200X on a grounded supply 4-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3 Electrical design of the ET 200X 4-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4 Wiring the ET 200X 4-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents
xET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
4.4.1 Installing/removing connectors 4-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.2 Wiring connectors 4-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.3 Pinout of the ET 200X-DESINA / ET 200X-ECOFAST 4-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.4 Wiring the connectors for inputs and outputs 4-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.5 Connecting the protective ground to the basic module 4-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.6 Connecting a protective ground to expansion modules with analog
inputs and outputs 4-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.7 Plugging the connectors into the ET 200X 4-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.8 Wiring the SITOP power power supply and adapting It to
deployment conditions 4-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 Commissioning and Diagnostics
5.1 Configuring ET 200X-DESINA 5-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2 Commissioning and starting up the DP slave 5-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3 Diagnostics using LEDs 5-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.1 LEDs on BM 141 and BM 142 basic modules 5-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.2 LEDs on basic modules 5-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.3 LEDs on expansion modules (except DESINA) 5-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.4 LEDs on EM 143-DESINA expansion modules 5-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.5 LED on SITOP power 5-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4 Parameterizable diagnostic messages 5-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5 Evaluating ET 200X interrupts 5-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.1 Module interrupts (STEP 7) 5-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.2 Module interrupts (COM PROFIBUS) 5-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6 ET 200X diagnostics with STEP 7 and STEP 5 5-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.1 Reading out the diagnosis 5-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.2 Structure of the slave diagnosis, ET 200X 5-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.3 Station statuses 1 to 3 5-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.4 Master PROFIBUS address 5-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.5 Manufacturer identification 5-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.6 ID-specific diagnosis 5-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.7 Module status 5-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.8 Channel-specific diagnosis 5-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.9 Interrupts 5-43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.10 Analyzing interrupts from station diagnosis 5-53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 General Technical Specifications
6.1 Standards, certificates and approvals 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2 Electromagnetic compatibility 6-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3 Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions 6-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4 Details of insulation testing, safety class, degree of protection and ’
rated voltage of the ET 200X 6-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7 Technical Specifications
7.1 BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V basic module
(6ES7 141-1BF12-0XB0) 7-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2 BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST basic module
(6ES7 141-1BF01-0AB0) 7-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3 BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG basic module
(6ES7 141-1BF40-0AB0) 7-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents
xi
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
7.4 BM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A basic module
(6ES7 142-1BD22-0XB0) 7-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.5 BM 143-DESINA FO basic module
(6ES7 143-1BF00-0XB0) 7-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.6 BM 143-DESINA RS485 basic module (6ES7 143-1BF00-0AB0) 7-28. . . . . . .
7.7 EM 141 DI 4 DC 24V expansion module (6ES7 141-1BD31-0XA0) 7-34. . . .
7.8 EM 141 DI 8 DC 24V expansion module
(6ES7 141-1BF31-0XA0) 7-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.9 EM 141 DI 8 DC 24V DIAG expansion module (6ES7 141-1BF30-0XB0) 7-39
7.10 EM 141 DI 8 DC 24V expansion module
(6ES7 141-1BF41-0XA0) 7-44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.11 EM 141 DI 8 DC 24V DIAG expansion module (6ES7 141-1BF40-0XB0) 7-47
7.12 EM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/0.5A expansion module
(6ES7 142-1BD30-0XA0) 7-51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.13 EM 142 DO 4 DC 24V/2A expansion module (6ES7 142-1BD40-0XA0) 7-54
7.14 EM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A expansion module
(6ES7 142-1BD40-0XB0) 7-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.15 EM 142 DO 8 x DC 24V/1.2A expansion module
(6ES7 142-1BF30-0XA0) 7-62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.16 EM 143-DESINA expansion module
(6ES7 143-1BF30-0XB0) 7-65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.17 EM 148-P DI 4 DC 24V/DO 2 P expansion module (pneumatic module)
(6ES7 148-1DA00-0XA0) 7-70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.18 EM 148-P DO 16 P/CPV10 expansion module
(pneumatic interface module for CPV10) (6ES7 148-1EH00-0XA0) 7-74. . . . .
7.19 EM 148-P DO 16 P/CPV14 expansion module
(pneumatic interface module for CPV14) (6ES7 148-1EH10-0XA0) 7-76. . . . .
7.20 PM 148 DO 4 DC 24V/2A power module
(6ES7 148-1CA00-0XB0) 7-78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.21 Expansion modules with analog inputs and outputs 7-83. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.21.1 Parameters of the analog inputs and outputs 7-85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.21.2 Analog value representation for measuring ranges with SIMATIC S7 7-87. . .
7.21.3 Analog value representation for the measuring ranges of the analog
inputs and outputs (SIMATIC S7 Format) 7-88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.21.4 Analog value representation for measuring ranges with SIMATIC S5 7-94. . .
7.21.5 Analog value representation for the measuring ranges of the analog
inputs and outputs (SIMATIC S5 format) 7-95. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.21.6 Behavior of the analog inputs and outputs during operation and
in the event of faults 7-103. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.21.7 Connecting measuring sensors to the analog inputs 7-106. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.21.8 Connecting loads to the analog outputs 7-109. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.21.9 EM 144 AI 2 x U expansion module
(6ES7 144-1FB31-0XB0) 7-111. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.21.10 EM 144 AI 2 x I expansion module (+/–20 mA)
(6ES7 144-1GB31-0XB0) 7-114. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.21.11 EM 144 AI 2 x I expansion module (4 to 20 mA)
(6ES7 144-1GB41-0XB0) 7-117. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents
xii ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
7.21.12 EM 144 AI 2 RTD expansion module
(6ES7 144-1JB31-0XB0) 7-120. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.21.13 EM 145 AO 2 U expansion module
(6ES7 145-1FB31-0XB0) 7-123. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.21.14 EM 145 AO 2 I expansion module
(6ES7 145-1GB31-0XB0) 7-126. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.22 SITOP power power supply 24V/10A
(6EP1 334-2CA00) 7-129. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A Order Numbers
B Device Master Files
C Dimesioned Drawings and Pinouts
C.1 Dimensioned drawings – basic modules C-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.2 Dimensioned drawings – expansion modules C-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.3 Dimensioned drawing – pneumatic module
EM 148-P DI 4 y DC 24 V/DO 2 y P C-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.4 Dimensioned drawing – pneumatic interface module EM 148-P DO 16 y
P/CPV10 and ...14 C-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.5 Dimensioned drawing – power module C-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.6 Dimensioned drawing – SITOP power supply unit C-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.7 Dimensioned drawings – DIN rails C-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.8 Pinout of the ET 200X C-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.9 Pinout of the 8-channel expansion modules C-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.10 Pinout of the ET 200X-DESINA C-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.11 Pinout of the ET 200X-ECOFAST C-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.12 Pinout of analog inputs/outputs C-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glossary
Index
Contents
xiii
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Figures
1-1 Typical PROFIBUS-DP network installation 1-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2 Configuration of the ET 200X distributed I/O device (example) 1-4. . . . . . . . .
1-3 Configuration of the ET 200X-DESINA/ET 200X-ECOFAST distributed I/O
device (example) 1-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4 Configuration of the ET 200X-DESINA/ET 200X-ECOFAST distributed I/O
device with various expansion modules 1-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5 Configuration of the ET 200X with pneumatic modules (example) 1-11. . . . . .
1-6 Configuration of the ET 200X with pneumatic interface module (example) 1-12
1-7 Assigning addresses to the pneumatic interface module 1-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-8 Configuration of ET 200X with power module (example) 1-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-9 Configuration of ET 200X with SITOP power (Example) 1-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-10 Configuration of ET 200X with CP 142-2 (Example) 1-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-11 Components and the manuals required for them 1-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1 Feeding and looping through the supply voltage and PROFIBUS-DP via a
common cable 2-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2 Feeding the supply voltage and PROFIBUS-DP via separate cables
and looping them through via a common cable 2-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3 Feeding the supply voltage and PROFIBUS-DP and looping them through
via separate cables 2-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4 Feeding the supply voltage separately to each ET 200X and looping
PROFIBUS-DP through via a separate cable 2-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5 Disconnecting the ET 200X from the bus and looping through the supply
voltage/PROFIBUS-DP 2-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-6 Connecting and looping through the load supply voltage 2-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-7 Connecting and looping through the load voltage 2-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-8 ET 200X with SITOP power 24V/10A 2-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-9 Supply voltage and PROFIBUS-DP supplied and looped through with a
DESINA hybrid cable 2-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-10 Configuration examples with power modules 2-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1 DIN rail for installing the ET 200X modules 3-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2 Dimensioned drawings of the narrow DIN rails 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3 Dimensioned drawings of the wide DIN rails 3-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4 Installing expansion modules 3-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5 Fixing screws for basic and expansion modules 3-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6 Fixing screws for motor starters and frequency converters 3-10. . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7 Supply and service lines on pneumatic module
EM 148-P DI 4 x DC 24V/DO 2 x P 3-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-8 Central supply of compressed air to pneumatic modules 3-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-9 Installing a valve island with an interface module 3-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-10 Dimensions of installation holes on the pneumatic interface module 3-15. . . .
3-11 Setting the PROFIBUS address 3-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-12 Position of the configuration connector on the
ET 200X-DESINA/ET 200X-ECOFAST 3-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-13 Setting the PROFIBUS address at the configuration connector 3-19. . . . . . . .
3-14 Connecting the terminating resistor 3-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-15 Attaching the terminating resistor 3-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1 Operating the ET 200X with reference potential 4-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2 Potentials present in an ET 200X configuration with motor starter 4-6. . . . . .
4-3 Potentials present in an ET 200X configuration with frequency converter 4-7
4-4 Potentials present in an ET 200X-DESINA configuration 4-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5 Potentials present in an ET 200X-ECOFAST configuration 4-9. . . . . . . . . . . .
4-6 Connector: protective shell with an M16 cable gland 4-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-7 Snapping the connector into place in the shell 4-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-8 Removing the connector from the shell 4-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents
xiv ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
4-9 Bared length of a 5-core cable 4-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-10 Pinout of the connector for wiring PROFIBUS-DP and the supply
voltage for the electronics/sensors 4-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-11 Pinout of the load voltage connector 4-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-12 Power module with connector and 2 M16 cable glands 4-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-13 Pinout of the connector for the BM 143-DESINA FO 4-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-14 Pinout of the connector for the BM 141-ECOFAST and
BM 143-DESINA RS485 basic modules 4-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-15 Y connector 4-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-16 Connecting the protective ground to the BM 141, 142 and
147/CPU basic modules 4-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-17 Connecting the basic modules BM 143-DESINA FO,
BM 143-DESINA RS485, and BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST
to protective ground 4-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-18 Connecting the protective ground to the analog module 4-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-19 Plugging connectors into the ET 200X-DESINA/ET 200X-ECOFAST 4-34. . .
4-20 Wired ET 200X 4-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-21 Removing the terminal cover 4-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-22 Connecting the mains power supply cable 4-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-23 Potentiometer R306 for setting the output voltage 4-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-24 Removing the top section 4-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-25 Positions of adapter plate A1 4-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-26 Position of the R230 potentiometer 4-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-27 Positions of the adapter plate A2 4-43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1 Correlation of DIs/DOs on BM 143-DESINA/EM 143-DESINA with bits of
inputs/outputs in the PI 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2 Assignment of the inputs in the process image (PI) 5-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3 Assignment of the outputs in the process image (PI) 5-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4 Start-up of the ET 200X 5-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5 Start-up of the ET 200X-DESINA 5-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6 Start information of OB 40: modules with analog inputs 5-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-7 Start information of OB 40: BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG
and EM 141 DI 8 DC 24V DIAG 5-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-8 Structure of the slave diagnosis, ET 200X 5-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9 Structure of ID-specific diagnosis for ET 200X 5-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-10 Configuration of the module status for ET 200X 5-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-11 Configuration of channel-specific diagnosis, ET 200X 5-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-12 Structure of the ET 200X alarm unit 5-44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-13 Structure as of byte x+4 for diagnostic interrupt (digital input) 5-45. . . . . . . . . .
5-14 Structure as of byte x+4 for diagnostic interrupt (digital outputs) 5-46. . . . . . .
5-15 Structure from Byte x+4 for diagnosis alarm of EM 143-DESINA modules 5-47
5-16 Structure as of byte x+4 for diagnostic interrupt (analog inputs) 5-48. . . . . . . .
5-17 Configuration as of byte x+4 for diagnostic interrupt (analog outputs) 5-49. . .
5-18 Structure as of byte x+4 for hardware interrupt (analog inputs) 5-50. . . . . . . . .
5-19 Structure as of byte x+4 for hardware interrupt (digital inputs) 5-50. . . . . . . . .
7-1 Basic circuit diagram of the BM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V basic module 7-4. . . . . .
7-2 Basic circuit diagram for the BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST
basic module (6ES7 141-1BF01-0AB0) 7-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3 Basic circuit diagram for the BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG
basic module (6ES7 141-1BF40-0AB0) 7-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4 Basic circuit diagram of the BM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A basic module 7-19. .
7-5 Basic circuit diagram of the BM 143-DESINA FO basic module 7-23. . . . . . . .
7-6 Basic circuit diagram of the BM 143-DESINA RS485 basic module 7-29. . . . .
7-7 Basic circuit diagram of expansion module EM 141 DO 4 x DC 24V 7-35. . . .
Contents
xv
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
7-8 Basic circuit diagram for expansion module EM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V
(6ES7 141-1BF31-0XA0) 7-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-9 Basic circuit diagram for expansion module EM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V DIAG
(6ES7 141-1BF30-0XB0) 7-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-10 Basic circuit diagram of expansion module EM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V
(6ES7 141-1BF41-0XA0) 7-45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-11 Basic circuit diagram of expansion module EM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V DIAG
(6ES7 141-1BF40-0XB0) 7-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-12 Basic circuit diagram of expansion module EM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/0.5A 7-52
7-13 Basic circuit diagram of expansion module EM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A 7-55.
7-14 Basic circuit diagram of expansion module EM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A 7-58.
7-15 Basic circuit diagram for expansion module EM 142 DO 8 x DC 24V/1.2A 7-63
7-16 Basic circuit diagram of expansion module EM 143-DESINA 7-66. . . . . . . . . .
7-17 Basic circuit diagram for EM 148-P DI 4 x DC 24V/DO 2 x P
expansion module 7-71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-18 Pneumatic connection diagram of a 4/2-way valve 7-71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-19 Basic circuit diagram of the EM 148-P DO 16 x P/CPV10
expansion module 7-74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-20 Assigning addresses to the pneumatic interface module 7-75. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-21 Basic circuit diagram for EM 148-P DO 16 x P/CPV14
expansion module 7-76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-22 Assigning addresses to the pneumatic interface module 7-77. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-23 Basic circuit diagram of power module PM 148 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A
(6ES7 148-1CA00-0XB0) 7-79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-24 Connection of voltage sensors to analog inputs (EM with order number
6ES7 144-1FB31-0XB0) 7-106. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-25 Connection of current sensors (two-wire measuring transducers) to
analog inputs (EM with order number 6ES7 144-1GB41-0XB0) 7-107. . . . . . . .
7-26 Connection of current sensors (four-wire measuring transducers) to
analog inputs (EM with order number 6ES7 144-1GB31-0XB0) 7-108. . . . . . . .
7-27 Connection of current sensors (four-wire measuring transducers) to
analog inputs (EM with order number 6ES7 144-1GB41-0XB0) 7-108. . . . . . . .
7-28 Connection of resistance thermometers to EM 144 AI 2 x RTD
(EM with order number 6ES7 144-1JB31-0XB0) 7-109. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-29 Connection of loads to a voltage or current output (analog output; EM
with order number 6ES7 145-1FB31-0XB0; 6ES7 145-1GB31-0XB0) 7-110. . .
7-30 Basic circuit diagram of expansion module EM 144 AI 2 x U 7-112. . . . . . . . . . .
7-31 Basic circuit diagram of expansion module EM 144 AI 2 x I 7-115. . . . . . . . . . . .
7-32 Basic circuit diagram of Expansion module EM 144 AI 2 x I (4 to 20 mA) 7-118
7-33 Basic circuit diagram of expansion module EM 144 AI 2 x RTD 7-121. . . . . . . .
7-34 Basic circuit diagram of expansion module EM 145 AO 2 x U 7-124. . . . . . . . . .
7-35 Basic circuit diagram of expansion module EM 145 AO 2 x I 7-127. . . . . . . . . . .
7-36 Basic circuit diagram for SITOP power supply 7-129. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-1 Dimensioned drawing of BM 141, BM 142, BM 147/CPU basic module C-2.
C-2 Dimensioned drawing of the BM 141-ECOFAST, BM 143-DESINA basic
modules C-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-3 Dimensioned drawing of EM 141, EM 142, EM 144, EM 145
expansion modules C-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-4 Dimensioned drawing of EM 141 (high design),
EM 142 DO 8 x DC 24V/1.2A and EM 143-DESINA expansion modules C-5
C-5 Dimensioned drawing of the pneumatic module C-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-6 Dimensioned drawing of the pneumatic interface module C-6. . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-7 Dimensioned drawing – power module C-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-8 Dimensioned drawing of SITOP power C-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-9 Dimensioned drawings of the Narrow DIN rails C-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents
xvi ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
C-10 Dimensioned drawings of the wide DIN rails C-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-11 Pinout of the ET 200X (BM 141, BM 142, BM 147/CPU) C-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-12 Pinout of the 8-channel DI/DO expansion module C-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-13 Pinout of the ET 200X-DESINA C-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-14 Pinout of the BM 141-ECOFAST 8DI basic module C-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-15 Pinout of expansion module with analog inputs/outputs C-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents
xvii
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Tables
1-1 Features of the ET200X-DESINA and ET200X-ECOFAST 1-8. . . . . . . . . . .
1-2 Topics of the manuals in the ET 200X manual package 1-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3 Separate manuals for ET 200X components 1-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1 Brief overview of the different basic modules 2-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2 Restrictions imposed on the maximum configuration by the power input 2-14
3-1 DIN rails for installing an ET 200X 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2 Outer diameters of pneumatic tubing 3-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1 Order of steps for wiring the ET 200X 4-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2 Cable types 4-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3 Technical specifications of the 5-core cable 4-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4 Wiring rules for connectors 4-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5 Pinout of the coupler plug for digital inputs 4-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-6 Pinout of the coupler plug for digital inputs (DESINA) 4-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-7 Pinout of the coupler plug for digital inputs (standard) 4-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-8 Pinout of the coupler plug for digital outputs 4-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-9 Pinout of the coupler plug for digital outputs (DESINA) 4-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-10 Pinout of the coupler plug for digital outputs (standard) 4-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-11 Pinout of the coupler plugs for digital inputs when a Y connector is used 4-28
4-12 Pinout of the coupler plugs for digital outputs when a Y connector is used 4-29
4-13 Switching the output voltage to the bus segment of the ET 200X 4-41. . . . . . .
4-14 Switching over the short circuit response 4-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-15 Switching over current limiting 4-43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1 Display and analysis of the parameters for the DESINA functional input 5-2.
5-2 Software requirements for commissioning an ET 200X (except DESINA) 5-8
5-3 Software requirements for commissioning an ET 200X-DESINA 5-9. . . . . . .
5-4 Integrating the DDB file in the configuration software 5-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5 Requirements for commissioning the DP slave 5-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6 Order of steps for commissioning the DP slave 5-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-7 Status and error display by means of LEDs on the BM 141 and
BM 142 basic modules 5-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-8 Status and fault displays using LEDs on the basic modules 5-16. . . . . . . . . . .
5-9 Status and error displays by means of LEDs on SITOP power 5-20. . . . . . . .
5-10 Diagnostics messages of the EM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A and
PM 148 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A 5-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-11 Diagnostic messages for modules with AI 5-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-12 Diagnostic messages for modules with AO 5-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-13 Diagnostic messages – causes and remedial action 5-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-14 Events that can trigger diagnostic interrupt 5-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-15 Reading out the diagnosis of ET 200X with STEP 7 and STEP 5 5-31. . . . . .
5-16 Structure of station status 1 (Byte 0) ET 200X 5-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-17 Structure of station status 2 (Byte 1) ET 200X 5-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-18 Structure of Station Status 3 (Byte 2) ET 200X 5-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-19 Structure of the manufacturer ID (Byte 4, 5) ET 200X 5-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-20 Channel-specific error messages to PROFIBUS standard 5-44. . . . . . . . . . . .
5-21 Channel-specific error messages – manufacturer-specific 5-45. . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-22 Bytes x+4 to x+10 in the diagnosis of ET 200X 5-55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-23 Bytes x+4 to x+7 in the diagnosis of ET 200X 5-56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1 Pinout of the sockets for 8-channel digital inputs 7-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2 Parameters of the BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V 7-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3 Pinout of sockets X1 to X8 for digital inputs 7-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4 Parameters of the BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST 7-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5 Pinout of sockets X1 to X8 for digital inputs 7-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6 Parameters of the BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG 7-15. . . . . . . . . . . .
7-7 Parameters of the BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG
Contents
xviii ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
for digital inputs 7-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-8 Pinout of the sockets for 4-channel digital outputs 7-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-9 Parameters of the BM 142 DO 4 DC 24V/2A 7-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-10 Pinout of sockets X1, X3, X5 and X7 for digital inputs or outputs 7-22. . . . . . .
7-11 Pinout of sockets X2, X4, X6 and X8 for digital inputs or outputs 7-23. . . . . . .
7-12 Parameters of the BM 143-DESINA FO 7-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-13 Parameters of the BM 143-DESINA FO for digital inputs and outputs 7-26. . .
7-14 Pinout of sockets X1, X3, X5 and X7 for digital inputs or outputs 7-29. . . . . . .
7-15 Pinout of sockets X2, X4, X6 and X8 for digital inputs or outputs 7-30. . . . . . .
7-16 Parameters of the BM 143-DESINA RS485 7-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-17 Parameters of the BM 143-DESINA RS485 for digital inputs and outputs 7-33
7-18 Pinout of the sockets for 4-channel digital inputs 7-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-19 Pin assignment of sockets for 8-channel digital inputs 7-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-20 Pinout of socket X1 to X4 for digital inputs 7-43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-21 Parameters of the EM 141 DI 8 DC 24V DIAG 7-44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-22 Pinout of socket X1 to X8 for digital inputs 7-46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-23 Pinout of sockets X1 to X8 for digital inputs 7-50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-24 Parameters of the EM 141 DI 8 DC 24V DIAG 7-51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-25 Pinout of the sockets for 4-channel digital outputs 7-53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-26 Pinout of the sockets for 4-channel digital outputs 7-56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-27 Pinout of the sockets for 4-channel digital outputs 7-60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-28 Parameters of the EM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A 7-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-29 Dependencies of digital output values on the operating status of the
PLC (CPU of DP master) and L + supply voltage 7-62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-30 Pin assignment of sockets for 8-channel digital outputs 7-64. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-31 Pinout of sockets X1, X3, X5 and X7 for digital inputs or outputs 7-67. . . . . . .
7-32 Pinout of sockets X2, X4, X6 and X8 for digital inputs or outputs 7-68. . . . . . .
7-33 Parameters of the EM 143-DESINA for digital inputs and outputs 7-69. . . . . .
7-34 Pinout of the sockets for 2-channel digital inputs (pneumatic module) 7-72. .
7-35 Suitable types of oil for compressed air 7-76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-36 Pin assignment of sockets for 4-channel digital outputs 7-84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-37 Parameters of the PM 148 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A 7-85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-38 Dependencies of digital output values on the operating status of the
PLC (CPU of DP master) and L + supply voltage 7-86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-39 Representation of measuring ranges for analog inputs 7-90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-40 Representation of measuring ranges for analog outputs 7-90. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-41 Parameters of analog inputs 7-91. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-42 Parameters of analog outputs 7-92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-43 Analog value representation (SIMATIC S7 format) 7-93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-44 Measured-value resolution of the analog values (SIMATIC S7 format) 7-94. .
7-45 SIMATIC S7 format: representation of the digitized measured
value +/–10 V; +/–20 mA (expansion modules with analog inputs) 7-95. . . . . .
7-46 SIMATIC S7 format: representation of the digitized measured
value 4 to 20 mA (expansion module with analog inputs) 7-96. . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-47 SIMATIC S7 format: representation of the digitized measured
value for the standard temperature range, Pt 100
(expansion module with analog inputs) 7-97. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-48 SIMATIC S7 format: representation of the analog output
range +/–10 V; +/–20 mA 7-98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-49 SIMATIC S7 format: representation of the analog current
output range 4 to 20 mA 7-99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-50 Analog value representation of the analog inputs (SIMATIC S5 format) 7-100.
7-51 Analog value representation of the analog outputs (SIMATIC S5 format) 7-101
7-52 SIMATIC S5 format: representation of the digitized measured
value +/–10 V (expansion module with analog inputs) 7-102. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents
xix
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
7-53 SIMATIC S5 format: representation of the digitized measured
value +/–20 mA (expansion module with analog inputs) 7-103. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-54 SIMATIC S5 format: representation of the digitized measured
value 4 to 20 mA (expansion module with analog inputs) 7-104. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-55 SIMATIC S5 format: representation of the digitized measured value
for the standard temperature range, Pt 100
(expansion module with analog inputs) 7-105. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-56 SIMATIC S5 format: representation of the analog voltage
output range +/–10 V 7-106. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-57 SIMATIC S5 format: representation of the analog current output
range +/–20 mA 7-107. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-58 SIMATIC S5 format: representation of the analog current output
range 4 to 20 mA 7-108. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-59 How the analog input/output values depend on the operating mode
of the PLC (CPU of the DP master) and the supply voltage L + 7-109. . . . . . . .
7-60 Behavior of the analog modules as a function of the position of the
analog output value 7-110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-61 Behavior of the analog modules depending on the position of the
analog output value in the value range 7-111. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-62 Pinout of the sockets for 2-channel analog inputs (voltage) 7-117. . . . . . . . . . .
7-63 Pinout of the sockets for 2-channel analog inputs (EM 144 AI 2 x I) 7-120. . . .
7-64 Pinout of the sockets for 2-channel analog inputs
(EM 144 AI 2 x I, 4 to 20 mA) 7-123. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-65 Pinout of the sockets for 2-channel analog inputs (Pt 100) 7-126. . . . . . . . . . . .
7-66 Pinout of the sockets for 2-channel analog outputs (voltage) 7-129. . . . . . . . . .
7-67 Pinout of the sockets for 2-channel analog outputs (current) 7-132. . . . . . . . . . .
A-1 Basic modules – order numbers A-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-2 Expansion modules – order numbers A-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-3 Accessories for ET200X – order numbers A-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-4 Accessories for ET 200X-DESINA / ET 200X-ECOFAST –
order numbers A-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-5 Connectors manufactured by Binder – order numbers A-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-6 Spare parts for ET 200X – order numbers A-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-7 Network components for the ET 200 distributed I/O system A-7. . . . . . . . . . .
A-8 MOBY modules A-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-9 Manuals for STEP 7 and SIMATIC S7 A-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-10 Manual for ET 200 in SIMATIC S5 A-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-11 Technical Guide to PROFIBUS-DP and SIMATIC S7 A-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-1 Other features of the modules of the ET 200X B-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents
xx ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
1-1
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Product Overview
In this Chapter
The product overview tells you
how to incorporate the ET 200X distributed I/O device into the Siemens
programmable controller landscape.
The components which make up the ET 200X distributed I/O device
Which manuals in the ET 200X manual package contain what information
Contents of Chapter
Section Subject Page
1.1 What are distributed I/O devices? 1-2
1.2 What is the ET 200X distributed I/O device? 1-3
1.3 ET 200X-DESINA/ET 200X-ECOFAST 1-7
1.4 ET 200X with pneumatic functionality 1-11
1.5 ET 200X with PM 148 DO 4 DC 24V/2A power module 1-14
1.6 ET 200X with SITOP power supply 1-15
1.7 ET 200X with CP 142-2 communication processor 1-16
1.8 Guide to the ET 200X manuals 1-17
1
Product Overview
1-2 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
1.1 What are distributed I/O devices?
Distributed I/O devices – usage
When a system is set up, the inputs and outputs to and from the process are often
located centrally in the programmable controller.
If there are inputs and outputs at considerable distances from the programmable
logic controller, there may be long runs of cabling which are not immediately
comprehensible, and electromagnetic interference may impair reliability.
The use of distributed I/O devices is suitable for such systems:
The controller CPU is located centrally.
The I/O devices (inputs and outputs) are operating locally on a distributed
basis.
The high-performance PROFIBUS-DP ensures with its high baud rates that the
controller CPU and I/O devices communicate smoothly.
What is PROFIBUS-DP?
PROFIBUS-DP is an open bus system complying with IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP
3/1 with the ”DP” transmission log (DP stands for Distributed Peripheral).
Physically, PROFIBUS-DP is either an electrical network based on a shielded
two-wire line or an optical network based on a fiber-optic cable.
The ”DP” transmission log allows a rapid, cyclic exchange of data between the
controller CPU and the distributed I/O devices.
What are DP masters and DP slaves?
The link between the controller CPU and distributed I/O devices is the DP master.
The DP master exchanges data by means of PROFIBUS-DP with the distributed
I/O devices and monitors PROFIBUS-DP.
The distributed I/O devices (= DP slaves) prepare the data of the sensors and
actuators so that it can be transferred via PROFIBUS-DP to the controller CPU.
What devices can be connected to PROFIBUS-DP?
Different devices can be connected on PROFIBUS-DP as DP masters or DP
slaves provided they behave in accordance with the IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1
standard. You can use devices from the following product families amongst others:
SIMATIC S5
SIMATIC S7/M7/C7
SIMATIC programmer/PC
SIMATIC HMI (operator interface OP, OS, TD)
Devices from other manufacturers
Product Overview
1-3
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Configuring a PROFIBUS-DP network
In the figure below you can see a typical installation of a PROFIBUS-DP network.
The DP masters are integrated in the relevant device – for example, the S7-400
has a PROFIBUS-DP interface, and the IM 308-C master interface module is
inserted in the S5-115U. The DP slaves are the distributed I/O devices connected
to the DP masters via PROFIBUS-DP.
DP master
DP slaves
PROFIBUS-DP
S7-400 PG/PC
ET 200S ET 200M ET 200eco
S5-95U-DP
Other field devices
with IM 308-C
S5-115U
ET 200X OP/OS
S7-200
Drive DP/AS-I LINK
Figure 1-1 Typical PROFIBUS-DP network installation
1.2 What is the ET 200X distributed I/O device?
Definition
The ET 200X distributed I/O device is a modular DP slave in the IP 65 to IP 67
degrees of protection.
Usage
Owing to its robust design and the IP 65 to IP 67 degrees of protection, the
ET 200X distributed I/O device is particularly suitable for usage in harsh industrial
environments.
Rapid and optimum adaptation of the ET 200X to the technological functional units
of your machine is ensured thanks to the option of integrating motor starters
(switching and protecting any three-phase loads up to 5.5 kW), frequency
converters (actuating asynchronous motors up to 0.75 kW rated power) and I/O
modules.
Product Overview
1-4 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Basic and expansion modules
An ET 200X distributed I/O device consists of a basic module in which some digital
inputs and outputs have already been integrated. Up to 7 expansion modules can
be added to the basic module.
An ET 200X distributed I/O device is connected to PROFIBUS-DP by means of
cable connectors for PROFIBUS-DP on the basic module. Every ET 200X
distributed I/O device is a DP slave on PROFIBUS-DP.
ET 200X with BM 147/CPU can also be configured for standalone operation (i.e.
not connected to a bus).
Configuration of ET 200X (example)
Basic module
Expansion modules
Connectors for
PROFIBUS-DP and
supply voltage for elec-
tronic components and
sensors
Connector for
load voltage
X1 X2
X3 X4
X1 X2
X3 X4
X1 X2
X3
24 VDC
BF
ON
SF
Figure 1-2 Configuration of the ET 200X distributed I/O device (example)
Product Overview
1-5
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Components
The components of the ET 200X include the following basic modules:
BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V basic module
BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST basic module
BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG basic module
BM 142 DO 4 DC 24V/2A basic module
BM 143-DESINA FO basic module
BM 143-DESINA RS485 basic module
BM 147/CPU basic module
The following expansion modules can be added to each of the basic modules:
EM 141 DI 4 DC 24V expansion module
EM 141 DI 8 DC 24V expansion module
EM 141 DI 8 DC 24V expansion module (short and long types)
EM 142 DO 4 DC 24V/0.5A expansion module
EM 142 DO 8 DC 24V/1.2A expansion module
EM 142 DO 4 DC 24V/2A expansion module
EM 143-DESINA expansion module (only with BM 143-DESINA)
EM 144 AI 2 U (10 V) expansion module
EM 144 AI 2 I (20 mA or 4 to 20 mA) expansion module
EM 144 AI 2 I (4 to 20 mA) expansion module
EM 144 AI 2 RTD (Pt 100) expansion module
EM 145 AO 2 U (10 V) expansion module
EM 145 AO 2 I (20 mA or 4 to 20 mA) expansion module
EM 300... expansion module (motor starter)
EM 148-FC frequency converter
EM 148-P DI 4 DC 24V/DO 2 P expansion module (pneumatic module)
EM 148-P DO 16 P/CPV10 expansion module
(pneumatic interface module for FESTO valve island CPV10)
EM 148-P DO 16 P/CPV14 expansion module
(pneumatic interface module for FESTO valve island CPV14)
PM 148 DO 4 DC 24V/2A power module
SITOP power 24V/10A power supply unit
CP 142-2 communication processor as AS-i master
Product Overview
1-6 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Features of the ET 200X
The supply voltage for the electronic components and sensors, the load voltage
and PROFIBUS-DP are connected to the basic module by means of
connectors.
The BM 141... and BM 142... basic modules contain a number of inputs and
outputs. Basic modules can be expanded on a modular basis.
Motor starters (direct-on-line and reversing starters) can be used as expansion
modules for switching and protecting any three-phase loads up to 5.5 kW, at
400 VAC (refer to the manual EM 300 Motor Starters).
Frequency converters can be used as expansion modules for actuating
asynchronous motors up to 0.75 kW rated power at 400 VAC (refer to the
manual EM 148-FC Frequency Converters).
Pneumatic modules having two 4/2-way valves and pneumatic interface
modules for connecting two regular FESTO valve islands to the ET 200X can
be used as expansion modules (refer to Section 1.4).
When expansion modules are installed, the supply voltage for the electronic
components and the sensors and the load voltage are automatically fed to
these modules from the basic module.
The voltage and the bus signals can be looped through to the next ET 200X via
connectors.
The supply voltage for the electronic components and the sensors and
PROFIBUS-DP can be fed to the first ET 200X via separate cables and then
looped through to the next ET 200X via a common cable.
The PROFIBUS address of the ET 200X can be set between 1 and 125 by
means of switches in the basic module.
There are 4 LEDs on the front of the basic module that indicate faults in the
hardware of an ET 200X (SF), bus faults (BF), and the supply voltage for the
electronic components and sensors (ON) and load voltage (24 VDC).
Transmission rates of 9.6 kbps to 12 Mbps are permitted for the ET 200X.
CP 142-2 as AS-i master
DP Master for ET 200X
The ET 200X can communicate with all DP masters that behave in compliance
with IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1. However, some DP masters can process only
limited frame lengths.
Check whether the DP master you are using can receive frames from the ET 200X
in their entirety. To ascertain this, you will find a list of maximum frame lengths in
the configuration and parameter assignment frames for ET 200X at
http://www.ad.siemens.de/simatic-cs.
Product Overview
1-7
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
1.3 ET 200X-DESINA/ET 200X-ECOFAST
ET 200X-DESINA
DESINA is the acronym for Distributed and Standardized INstAllation technique for
machine tools.
DESINA is a uniform installation system and specifies all components in terms of
function and connection system.
The followings modules fulfill the requirements of the DESINA specification:
BM 143-DESINA FO (fiber-optic PROFIBUS-DP)
(FO = Fibre Optic)
BM 143-DESINA RS485 (copper wire PROFIBUS-DP based on
RS 485)
EM 143-DESINA
ET 200X-ECOFAST
ECOFAST is the trade name for Energy and COmmunication Field InstAllation
SysTem.
The following ECOFAST module has a terminal system compliant with the DESINA
specification:
BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST (copper wire PROFIBUS-DP
based on RS 485)
Product Overview
1-8 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Comparison of features
Table 1-1 Features of the ET200X-DESINA and ET200X-ECOFAST
ET200X-DESINA ET200X-ECOFAST
PROFIBUS-DP is connected via DESINA connectors by means of:
Copper conductors to RS 485
Fiber-optic cables for use in environments with high interference
Each DESINA basic module and expansion
module has 8 digital channels, and each channel
can be configured as an input or output.
With a maximum of seven EM 143-DESINA
expansion modules, an ET 200X-DESINA has a
total of 64 DESINA-compliant inputs/outputs.
The BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST basic
module has 8 digital inputs.
There is an additional diagnostic input for each
channel.
The connected DESINA-compatible sensors and
actuators can be directly monitored by means of
the diagnostic input.
Alternatively, the diagnostic input can be configured
as an input with NC functionality.
–
The field bus (PROFIBUS-DP) and the switched and non-switched load voltages are carried to the basic
module by a single cable set.
The cable connects to the basic module by means of DESINA connectors.
When expansion modules are installed, the non-switched and switched load voltages are fed from the
basic module to the expansion modules.
The voltages and bus signals can be looped through to the next ET 200X-DESINA by means of a second
DESINA connector.
The PROFIBUS address is set by means of DIL switches in a removable configuration connector. This
means that the basic module can be replaced without resetting the address.
The BM 143-DESINA and BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST basic modules can be combined with all
the other expansion modules of the ET 200X.
Four LEDs are provided on the front of the basic modules for indicating:
Errors on the ET-DESINA (SF)
Data transfer to the BM 143-DESINA (RUN)
Non-switched load voltage (DC 24 V-NS))
Switched load voltage (DC 24 V-S)
Transmission rates of 9.6 kbps to 12 Mbps are permitted.
Note
The EM 143-DESINA expansion module can only be used with the
BM 143-DESINA and BM 141-ECOFAST basic modules. It is not compatible with
the BM 141, BM 142 and BM 147/CPU basic modules.
Product Overview
1-9
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
DP master for ET 200X-DESINA/ET 200X-ECOFAST
The ET-DESINA and ET 200X-ECOFAST can communicate with all DP masters
that behave in compliance with EN 50170, Volume 2, PROFIBUS. However, some
DP masters can process only limited frame lengths.
Check whether the DP master you are using can receive frames from the
ET 200X-DESINA and ET 200X-ECOFAST in their entirety. To ascertain this, you
will find a list of maximum frame lengths in the configuration and parameter
assignment frames for ET 200X at http://www.ad.siemens.de/simatic-cs.
Configuration of ET 200X-DESINA/ECOFAST (examples)
DESINA
connector
Basic
module Expansion modules
SF
RUN
DC 24 V-NS
DC 24 V-S
X01 X02
X1 X1 X1 X1
X2 X2 X2 X2
X5 X5 X5 X5
X6 X6 X6 X6
X3 X3 X3 X3
X4 X4 X4 X4
X7 X7 X7 X7
X8 X8 X8 X8
Figure 1-3 Configuration of the ET 200X-DESINA/ET 200X-ECOFAST distributed I/O device (example)
Product Overview
1-10 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
SF
RUN
DC 24 V-NS
DC 24 V-S
X01 X02
X1 X2
X5 X6
X3 X4
X7 X8
X1 X2
X5 X6
X3 X4
X7 X8
X2X1
X3
X2X1
X3
SF
24 VDC
X2X1
X3 X4
X2X1
X4
Figure 1-4 Configuration of the ET 200X-DESINA/ET 200X-ECOFAST distributed I/O device with
various expansion modules
Product Overview
1-11
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
1.4 ET 200X with pneumatic functionality
40 per cent of all actuators are pneumatic cylinders. Three expansion modules for
the pneumatic connection to the ET 200X are available for optimum adaptation of
the ET 200X to the overall process:
EM 148-P DI 4 DC 24V/DO 2 P expansion module (pneumatic module)
EM 148-P DO 16 P/CPV10 expansion module
(pneumatic interface module for FESTO valve island CPV10)
EM 148-P DO 16 P/CPV14 expansion module
(pneumatic interface module for FESTO valve island CPV14)
Pneumatic module
The pneumatic module is an expansion module with four digital inputs and
two separate 4/2-way valves. The pneumatic module is used to control:
a maximum of two double-acting pneumatic cylinders having a piston diameter
of up to 50 mm
a single-acting pneumatic cylinder with a piston diameter up to 50 mm when a
plug is used for the second connection to the valve
other pneumatic drives such as rotary actuators or
a nozzle.
Pneumatic cylinders having a piston diameter greater than 50 mm can similarly be
controlled with constraints at the piston speed.
The digital inputs can be used to acquire the limits of travel of the pneumatic
cylinders.
You can integrate up to seven pneumatic modules into an ET 200X.
Configuration of the ET 200X with pneumatic modules (example)
X2
X3 X4
X1 X2
X3 X4
24 VDC
BF
ON
SF
X1 X2
X3 X4
Pneumatic modules
X2X1 X1 X2
X1
Figure 1-5 Configuration of the ET 200X with pneumatic modules (example)
Product Overview
1-12 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Pneumatic interface module for the CPV10 and CPV14
The pneumatic interface modules are expansion modules for connecting two
Regular CPV10 or CPV14 FESTO valve islands.
Each of the two FESTO valve islands can be equipped with as many as 16 valves
(standard components of the FESTO company). The valve islands differ in respect
of their rated air flows (CPV10: 400 l/min; CPV14: 800 l/min).
You can integrate up to six pneumatic interface modules into an ET 200X.
Configuration of the ET 200X with pneumatic interface module and FESTO valve
island (example)
X1 X2
X3 X4
X1 X2
X3 X4
X1 X2
X3
24 VDC
BF
ON
SF
Pneumatic interface module for CPV10
FESTO valve island CPV10
Figure 1-6 Configuration of the ET 200X with pneumatic interface module (example)
Product Overview
1-13
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Address assignment, pneumatic interface module for CPV10 and CPV14
The figure below shows the pneumatic interface module with FESTO CPV10 valve
island and addresses.
0.0
0.2
0.4
0.6
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
0.1
0.3
0.5
0.7
1.1
1.3
1.5
1.7
0.0
0.2
0.4
0.6
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
0.1
0.3
0.5
0.7
1.3
1.5
1.7 LEDs
1.1
Figure 1-7 Assigning addresses to the pneumatic interface module
Product Overview
1-14 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
1.5 ET 200X with PM 148 DO 4 DC 24V/2A power module
Function
The power module is an expansion module for ET-voltage feed. You can use
power modules to loop through or feed load voltage separately from multiple
supply points to the digital-output modules of the ET 200X.
You can integrate a maximum of 7 power modules into an ET 200X.
Switching load voltage ON/Off selectively
A separate load-voltage supply means that you can switch load voltage on and off
selectively for individual modules. The ”DC 24V” LED on the power module
indicates whether or not load voltage is applied.
Configuration of ET 200X with power module (example)
X2
X3 X4
X1 X2
X3 X4
24 VDC
BF
ON
SF
X1 X2
X3 X4
Power module
X1 X1 X2
X3 X4
X1 X2
X3 X4
24 VDC
SF
Figure 1-8 Configuration of ET 200X with power module (example)
Product Overview
1-15
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
1.6 ET 200X with SITOP power
Function
SITOP-mode power supply unit for ET 200X.
It integrates into the ET 200X without additional wiring and supply the power for
electronics/sensors and/or the load voltage. Response to faults is parameterizable
(restart or shutdown following a short circuit on the output side).
Note
SITOP power 24V/10A must always be installed in the rightmost slot of the
ET 200X.
If a SITOP power module is installed on a BM 143-DESINA or
BM 141-ECOFAST, do not use the DESINA hybrid cable to supply power
(power is supplied by the SITOP power). In this case the DESINA hybrid cable
is used only for connection to PROFIBUS-DP.
Do not loop through the power supply from a BM 143-DESINA or
BM 141-ECOFAST with SITOP power.
Configuration of ET 200X with SITOP power 24V/10A (example)
SITOP power
X1 X2
X3 X4
24 VDC
BF
ON
SF
X1 X2
X3 X4
X1 X2
X3
24 VDC
LOAD 2L+
TEMP >
ELECTRONIC/SENSOR 1L+
Figure 1-9 Configuration of ET 200X with SITOP power (Example)
Product Overview
1-16 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
1.7 ET 200X with CP 142-2 communication processor
Function
You can connect an AS interface to the ET 200X with the aid of the CP 142-2 (as
AS-i master). A configuration of this nature can include a maximum of 31 AS-i
slaves. LEDs on the front panel of the CP 142-2 indicate the operating statuses of
the slaves.
The CP 142-2 is parameterized with STEP 7. Separate configuration for AS-i is not
necessary.
You can connect a maximum of 6 CP 142-2 communication processors to each
basic module (except the BM 147/CPU).
You can connect a maximum of 7 CP 142-2 communication processors to the
BM 147/CPU basic module.
Configuration of ET 200X with CP 142-2 (example)
X2
X3 X4
X1 X2
X3 X4
24 VDC
BF
ON
SF
X1 X2
X3 X4
CP 142-2
X1 X1 X2
X3 X4
SF
APF
CER
AUP
CM
Figure 1-10 Configuration of ET 200X with CP 142-2 (Example)
Product Overview
1-17
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
1.8 Guide to the ET 200X manuals
Components and the manuals required for them
The components of the ET 200X are described in various manuals in the ET 200X
package. The figure below shows possible ET 200X configurations and the
manuals required for them.
EM EM
DI DO
The ET 200X consists of the fol-
lowing components: You require information from the
following manuals:
BM
DI/DO EM EM
AI AO
EM EM
DI DO
BM
147 EM EM
AI AO BM 147/CPU Basic Module
EM 300 Motor Starter
Distributed I/O Device
ET 200X
Distributed I/O Device
ET 200X
Distributed I/O Device
ET 200X
+
+
Distributed I/O Device
ET200X-DESINA/ECOFAST
EM
143
DI/DO
EM
143
DI/DO
EM
143
DI/DO
EM
143
DI/DO
EM EM
DI DO
BM
DI/DO EM EM
AI AO
MS MS
Frequency Converter
Distributed I/O Device
ET 200X
+
EM
DI
BM
DI/DO EM EM
AI AO
MS MS
+
EM-FC
BM 147/CPU Basic Mo-
dule
Distributed I/O Device
ET 200X
EM 300 Motor Star-
ter
+
+
EM EM
DI DO
BM
147 EM
AI MS MS
EM
AO
EM 300 Motor Starter
Figure 1-11 Components and the manuals required for them
Where do you find what information?
The table below will help you get your bearings and find the information you need
quickly. It tells you which manual you need to refer to and which chapter deals with
the topic you are interested in.
Product Overview
1-18 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Table 1-2 Topics of the manuals in the ET 200X manual package
Manual
Subject Distributed
I/O device
ET 200X
BM 147/C
PU basic
module
EM 300
motor
starter
EM 148-FC
frequency
converter Chap-
ter/
Appen-
dix
ET 200X configuration options x 2
Installation of ET 200X, motor starters
and frequency converters;
setting the PROFIBUS address
connecting the terminating resistor
x 3
Installation of
ET 200X-DESINA/ECOFAST; setting the
PROFIBUS address
x 3
BM 147/CPU addressing x 2
Electrical configuration and wiring of the
ET 200X x 4
Electrical configuration and wiring of the
ET 200X-DESINA/ECOFAST x 4
Wiring of motor starters x 2
Wiring of frequency converters x 2
ET 200X with BM 147/CPU with
PROFIBUS-DP x 3
Commissioning and diagnostics of the
ET 200X x 5
Commissioning and diagnostics of the
ET 200X-DESINA/ECOFAST x 5
Commissioning and diagnostics of the
ET 200X with the BM 147/CPU x 4
Commissioning and diagnostics of the
ET 200X with motor starters x 3
Commissioning and diagnostics of the
ET 200X with frequency converters x 3
General technical specifications of the
ET 200X (standards, certificates and
approvals, EMC, environmental
conditions, etc.)
x 6
Technical specifications of the basic and
expansion modules with DI, DO, AI and
AO
x 7
Technical specifications of the
BM 147/CPU x 5
Technical specifications of the motor
starters x 5
Functions and technical specifications of
the frequency converters x 4
BM 147/CPU cycle and response times x 6
Order numbers of the components x A
Product Overview
1-19
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Table 1-2 Topics of the manuals in the ET 200X manual package, continued
Manual
Subject Chap-
ter/
Appen-
dix
EM 148-FC
frequency
converter
EM 300
motor
starter
BM 147/C
PU basic
module
Distributed
I/O device
ET 200X
Order numbers of the motor starters x A
Order numbers of the frequency
converters x A
Dimensioned drawings of the basic
modules and digital and analog
expansion modules
x C
Dimensioned drawings of the motor
starters x B
Dimensioned drawings of the frequency
converters x B
Configuration and parameter assignment
frames for the BM 147/CPU x A
Configuration assignment frame for the
motor starter x C
STEP 7 list of operations x B
Execution times of SFCs x C
Glossary x x Glossar
y
Table 1-3 Separate manuals for ET 200X components
Subject Manual
Using a CP 142-2 CP 142-2
Manual
Order No.: 6GK7 142-2AH00-8AA0
Product Overview
1-20 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
2-1
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Configuration Options
Configuration options
There are several different ways in which ET 200X distributed I/O devices can be
connected to PROFIBUS-DP. This chapter provides an overview of the various
configuration options. The restrictions regarding the maximum number of modules
allowed in each configuration are described in a separate section.
Contents of Chapter
Section Subject Page
2.1 Brief overview of the different basic modules 2-2
2.2 Feeding and looping through the supply voltage for the electronic
components/sensors and PROFIBUS-DP 2-3
2.3 Disconnecting the ET 200X from the bus and looping through the
supply voltage/PROFIBUS-DP (not ET 200X-DESINA/
ET 200X-ECOFAST)
2-6
2.4 Connecting the load supply voltage to the motor starters, frequency
converters and looping it through 2-8
2.5 Connecting and looping through the load voltage 2-10
2.6 Use of the SIT OP power power supply unit 2-11
2.7 Connecting and looping through load voltages and PROFIBUS-DP to
ET 200X-DESINA / ET 200X-ECOFAST 2-12
2.8 Restrictions on the number of modules 2-13
2.9 Maximum configuration and configuration options with power modules 2-16
Modules for the ET 200X
This chapter does not contain any further information about the types of module
that can be used for the ET 200X. Please refer to Chapter 7 for the technical
specifications, pinouts, basic circuit diagrams, etc.
Terminating resistor
There must be a terminating resistor on the first and last node of a PROFIBUS-DP
network with copper conductors (see Section 3.4).
The ET 200X-DESINA FO has a fiber-optic waveguide to transmit bus signals.
This waveguide does not require a terminating resistor.
2
Configuration Options
2-2 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Configuring a PROFIBUS-DP network
The principles and rules for configuring a PROFIBUS-DP network are described in
the manual for the DP master.
2.1 Brief overview of the different basic modules
Table 2-1 Brief overview of the different basic modules
Common features Operation as a DPV0 slave
Operation as a DPV1 slave
Operation as a S7 slave
Diagnostic interrupt
Hardware interrupt
Direct communication
IP 67
BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V
(6ES7 141-1BF12-0XB0)
8 digital inputs
Connectors for the supply and PROFIBUS-DP (copper conductors)
DDB file for DPV1: SI03803D.GSG (as of version 1 of the basic
module)
BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V
ECOFAST
(6ES7 141-1BF01-0AB0)
8 digital inputs
ECOFAST connectors for the supply and PROFIBUS-DP (copper
conductors)
DDB file for DPV1: SI0380D2.GSG (as of version 1 of the basic
module)
BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V
ECOFAST DIAG
(6ES7 141-1BF40-0AB0)
8 digital inputs
ECOFAST connectors for the supply and PROFIBUS-DP (copper
conductors)
Diagnostic interrupt for short circuit and wire break for each channel
Hardware interrupt at rising and falling edge for each channel
DDB file for DPV1: SI0380D3.GSG (as of version 2 of the basic
module)
BM 142 DO 4 DC 24V/2A
(6ES7 142-1BD22-0XB0)
4 digital outputs (2A per output)
Connectors for the supply and PROFIBUS-DP (copper conductors)
DDB file for DPV1: SI03803C.GSG (as of version 3 of the basic
module)
BM 143-DESINA FO
(6ES7 143-1BF00-0XB0)
8 digital inputs or outputs (separately parameterizable as an input or
output), diagnostic input for each channel
ECOFAST connectors for the supply and PROFIBUS-DP (fiber-optic
cables)
DDB file for DPV1: SI03809A.GSG as of version 5 of the basic
module
BM 143-DESINA RS485
(6ES7 143-1BF00-0AB0)
8 digital inputs or outputs (separately parameterizable as an input or
output), diagnostic input for each channel
ECOFAST connectors for the supply and PROFIBUS-DP (fiber-optic
cables)
DDB file for DPV1: SI03809A.GSG (as of version 2 of the basic
module)
Configuration Options
2-3
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
2.2 Feeding and looping through the supply voltage for the
electronic components/sensors and PROFIBUS-DP
Configuration options
Each ET 200X consists of a basic module (BM) and up to 7 expansion modules
(EM). There are various ways of connecting ET 200X distributed I/O devices to
PROFIBUS-DP:
feeding and looping through the supply voltage for the electronics/sensors and
PROFIBUS-DP via a common cable
feeding and looping through the supply voltage for the electronics/sensors and
PROFIBUS-DP via separate cables
feeding and looping through the supply voltage for the electronics/sensors and
PROFIBUS-DP via separate cables
feeding the supply voltage for the electronics/sensors to every ET 200X and
looping through PROFIBUS-DP via separate cables
Each of the above configuration options is described below using an example.
Connection
You can hook up the supply voltage and PROFIBUS-DP by means of a connector
on the basic module of the ET 200X. Use a second connector for looping through.
Configuration Options
2-4 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Feeding via a common cable
The supply voltage for the electronic components and the sensors is fed to the first
ET 200X and looped through to the downstream ET 200Xs via the same cable as
PROFIBUS-DP.
BM EM EMEMEM
BM
Supply voltage +
PROFIBUS-DP
...
ET 200X (DP slave 1)
ET 200X (DP slave 2)
ET 200X (DP slave 3)
BM EM EM
5-core, shielded cable
Figure 2-1 Feeding and looping through the supply voltage and PROFIBUS-DP via a
common cable
Looping through via a common cable
The supply voltage for the electronic components/sensors and PROFIBUS-DP are
fed to the first ET 200X via two separate cables. They are looped through to the
downstream ET 200Xs via a common cable.
Supply voltage
PROFIBUS-DP
...
ET 200X (DP slave 1)
ET 200X (DP slave 2)
ET 200X (DP slave 3)
BM EM EMEMEM
BM
BM EM EM
3-core cable
2-core, shielded cable
5-core, shielded cable
Figure 2-2 Feeding the supply voltage and PROFIBUS-DP via separate cables and
looping them through via a common cable
Configuration Options
2-5
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Feeding/looping through via separate cables
The supply voltage for the electronic components/sensors and PROFIBUS-DP are
fed to the first ET 200X and looped through to the downstream ET 200Xs via two
separate cables.
BM
Supply voltage
PROFIBUS-DP
EM EMEMEM
...
ET 200X (DP slave 1)
ET 200X (DP slave 2)
ET 200X (DP slave 3)
BM
BM EM EM
...
3-core cable
2-core, shielded cable
Figure 2-3 Feeding the supply voltage and PROFIBUS-DP and looping them through via
separate cables
Feeding/looping through of PROFIBUS-DP via 1 cable
The supply voltage for the electronic components/sensors is fed to each ET 200X
separately. PROFIBUS-DP is fed and looped through to the downstream ET 200Xs
via a common cable.
BM EM EM
BM
Supply voltage
PROFIBUS-DP
...
ET 200X (DP slave 1)
ET 200X (DP slave 2)
ET 200X (DP slave 3)
BM EM EMEMEM
Supply voltage
Supply voltage
3-core cable
2-core, shielded cable
Figure 2-4 Feeding the supply voltage separately to each ET 200X and looping
PROFIBUS-DP through via a separate cable
Configuration Options
2-6 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Cables
Please refer to Section 4.4 and Appendix A for a list of suitable cable types.
Load supply voltage
If you use motor starters (EM 300...) and/or frequency converters, you must supply
them with 400 VAC (see Chapter 2.4).
Load power supply
If you use basic/expansion modules that have outputs, you must connect the
relevant ET 200X to a load power supply (see Section 2.5).
Exception: ET 200X-DESINA (see Figure 4-4).
2.3 Disconnecting ET 200X from the bus and looping through the
supply voltage/PROFIBUS-DP
(not ET 200X-DESINA/ET 200X-ECOFAST)
Looping through PROFIBUS-DP
The two connectors for feeding and looping through the supply voltage and
PROFIBUS-DP are plugged into a connector plate in the basic module. Remove
the two connectors from the BM 141/BM 142/BM 147 basic module of the ET 200X
together with the connector plate beneath them.
Advantage
The relevant ET 200X distributed I/O device is disconnected from PROFIBUS-DP,
but the supply voltage and PROFIBUS-DP are still looped through to the next ET
200X.
Configuration Options
2-7
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Example
This principle is demonstrated by the example shown in the diagram below.
Remove the connector
and connector plate
...
ET 200X (DP slave 1) discon-
nected from PROFIBUS-DP
ET 200X (DP slave 2)
ET 200X (DP slave 3)
Connector plate
Supply voltage + PROFI-
BUS-DP looped through
BM EM EMEMEM
BM
BM EM EM
Figure 2-5 Disconnecting the ET 200X from the bus and looping through the supply
voltage/PROFIBUS-DP
!Caution
There are freely accessible live contacts on the underside of the connector plate.
Take steps to ensure that no short-circuits can occur between these contacts, or
the fuse on the connector plate may be tripped and damage caused to other
connected devices.
Configuration Options
2-8 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
2.4 Connecting the load supply voltage to motor starters/frequency
converters and looping it through
Necessity
If you use motor starters (EM 300...) and/or frequency converters (EM148-FC),
you must supply them with a 400 VAC load voltage. You must also supply the
basic module of the relevant ET 200X with DC 24V load voltage (exception:
ET 200X-DESINA and ET 200X-ECOFAST, see Figure 4-4 and Figure 4-5).
Connection
Hook up the load supply voltage and the load to the power socket and power
connector on the motor starter/frequency converter.
Looping through
The load supply voltage can be looped through from one motor starter/frequency
converter to the next by connecting an additional power connector to the motor
starter/frequency converter. The load supply voltage can be looped through both
within the same ET 200X and from one ET 200X to the next.
Configuration Options
2-9
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Configuration example
The diagram below shows you three possible configurations with connections for
the 400 VAC load supply voltage, the load and looping through. The possible
configurations for motor starters and frequency converters are the same. You must
take into account that the frequency converters have to be positioned to the right of
the motor starters.
Load voltage
supply
BM EM
Switch cabinet for power
distribution
MS
EM-
FC
M
3 M
3
BM EM
MS MS
M
3
M
3
BM
MS
M
3
BM EM
MS
M
3 M
3
BM EM
MS
M
3 M
3
Fed separately to
each motor starter/
frequency converter
Fed separately
to each ET 200X
Fed to the
1st motor starter M
3
Supply voltage + PROFIBUS-DP looped
through
EM
EM-
FC
EM-
FC
MS
Figure 2-6 Connecting and looping through the load supply voltage
Cables
Please refer to Section 4.4 for a list of suitable cable types.
Configuration Options
2-10 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
2.5 Connecting and looping through the load voltage
Necessity
A load voltage is only necessary if you wish to use a basic module/expansion
module(s) with outputs (e. g. DO) and/or motor starters/frequency converters.
In the case of the ET 200X-DESINA and ET 200X-ECOFAST, the load voltage is
carried by the DESINA hybrid cable.
Connection
You can hook up the load voltage by means of a connector on the basic module of
the ET 200X. Power can also be supplied from a power module or a SITOP power.
Configuration example
The diagrams below show you a configuration with basic/expansion modules that
have digital outputs (DO). Please refer to Section 7.1 for a list of the modules that
can be used.
Supply voltage +
PROFIBUS-DP
Load voltage
Load voltage
BM EM EMEM
BM
BM EM EM
DI DI DI
DI DI
DO
DO DO
3-core cable
...
BM
DO
...
MS MS
Feeding of the
load supply vol-
tage
EM
DO EM
DI PM
DO EM
DO EM
DI
Figure 2-7 Connecting and looping through the load voltage
Looping through
The load voltage can be looped through from one ET 200X to the next by wiring
the load voltage connector accordingly (see Section 4.4.2).
Configuration Options
2-11
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Cables
Please refer to Section 4.4 for a list of suitable cable types.
2.6 Use of the SITOP power power supply unit
The SITOP power 24V/10A power supply unit can provide the ET 200X with the
supply voltage for electronics/sensors and/or the load voltage.
Configuration example
The diagrams below show you some configuration examples.
PROFIBUS-DP BM EM EM
DI DI DO
MS MS
EM
DO SITOP
power
230 V
Feeding the load supply voltage
Feeds the supply voltage for the
electronics/sensors and the load vol-
tage directly into the bus
Figure 2-8 ET 200X with SITOP power 24V/10A
Configuration Options
2-12 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
2.7 Connecting and looping through load voltages and
PROFIBUS-DP to ET 200X-DESINA / ET 200X-ECOFAST
Non-switched and switched load voltage and PROFIBUS-DP are fed to the first
ET 200X-DESINA/ET 200X-ECOFAST in a shared DESINA hybrid cable and
looped through to the downstream ET 200X-DESINA/ ET 200X-ECOFAST.
Non-switched and switched
load voltages +
PROFIBUS-DP (FO and RS485)
...
ET 200X-DESINA /
ET 200X-ECOFAST
(DP slave 1)
DESINA hybrid cable
BM EMEM EM
BM
BM EMEM
ET 200X-DESINA /
ET 200X-ECOFAST
(DP slave 3)
ET 200X-DESINA /
ET 200X-ECOFAST
(DP slave 2)
Figure 2-9 Supply voltage and PROFIBUS-DP supplied and looped through with a
DESINA hybrid cable
For the connection with controller or power supply on the DESINA hybrid cable, we
recommend the MCP12P media converter manufactured by Harting. See ordering
data in Appendix A.
Configuration Options
2-13
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
2.8 Restrictions on the number of modules
Maximum configuration
Every ET 200X consists of a basic module and up to seven expansion modules.
Motor starter, frequency converter: A maximum of 6 motor starters or frequency
converters can be connected for each basic module (EM 300..., EM 148-FC). They
can be inserted anywhere in the ET 200X but frequency converters must always
be to the right of the motor starters.
Pneumatic interface modules: A maximum of 6 pneumatic interface modules
(EM 148-P DO 16 P/CPV...) can be connected in the ET 200X configuration.
CP 142-2 communication processor: A maximum of 6 CP 142-2 communication
processors can be connected to each basic module (except BM 147/CPU). Up to
seven CP 142-2 processors can be connected to the BM 147/CPU.
Restrictions imposed by power input
The maximum configuration is dependent on the power input of the individual
modules. The table below shows you all the possible configurations (described in
the previous sections) and specifies the restrictions imposed on them. It also
indicates ways of overcoming these restrictions.
Note
The PM 148 DO 4DC 24V/2A power module interrupts the supply of load
voltage to the downline expansion modules of an ET 200X. It has a separate
load-voltage feed, which it uses to supply the downline expansion modules (see
Section 2.9).
Configuration Options
2-14 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Table 2-2 Restrictions imposed on the maximum configuration by the power input
Configuration
options Restrictions Calculation/overcoming the
restrictions
Supply voltage and
PROFIBUS-DP fed
and looped
through via a
common cable
Supply voltage and
PROFIBUS-DP fed
via separate
cables and looped
through via a
common cable
Power input of the whole configuration:
Up to 40 C 6 A
Up to 55 C 4 A
Maximum cable length:
25 m if the power input of the whole
configuration is as follows:
Up to 40 C 6 A
Up to 55 C 4 A
120 m if the power input of the whole
configuration is as follows:
Up to 40 C 1 A
Up to 55 C 0.8 A
1. Calculate the power input of each
module (see the technical
specifications as of Section 7.1).
2. Add up the power input of all the
modules in the whole configuration.
3. If the current input > 6 A (4 A), then
feed the supply voltage to a few
ET 200Xs from the power system
again (permissible power input
per ET 200X 1 A or 0.8 A as a
function of temperature).
Supply voltage and
PROFIBUS-DP fed
and looped
through via
separate cables
Power input of one ET 200X:
Up to 40 C 1 A
Up to 55 C 0.8 A
1. Calculate the power input of each
module (see the technical
specifications as of Section 7.1).
2. Add up the power input of the
modules of each ET 200X.
3. If the power input > 1 A (0.8 A),
reduce the number of expansion
modules per ET 200X.
The maximum cable length for the supply
voltage is dependent on the cable core
cross-section and on the power input of the
whole configuration:
Cable core cross-section 0.75 mm2 and
power input 1 A (0.8 A): cable length 120 m
Cable core cross-section 0.75 mm2 and
power input 6 A (4 A): cable length 12 m
Cable core cross-section 1.5 mm2 and
power input 1 A (0.8 A): cable length 240 m
Cable core cross-section 1.5 mm2 and
power input 6 A (4 A): cable length 24 m
The length of the bus cable is dependent on the
transmission rate of the PROFIBUS-DP
network (see the manual for the DP master)
To calculate the cable length:
1. Add up the power input of all the
modules in the whole configuration.
2. Increase the cable length, if
necessary, by feeding the supply
voltage for a few ET 200Xs from
the power system again.
Configuration Options
2-15
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Table 2-2 Restrictions imposed on the maximum configuration by the power input, continued
Configuration
options Calculation/overcoming the
restrictions
Restrictions
Supply voltage fed
to each ET 200X
from the power
system and
PROFIBUS–DP
looped through via
a separate cable
Power input of one ET 200X:
Up to 40 C 1 A
Up to 55 C 0.8 A
The length of the bus cable is dependent on the
transmission rate of the PROFIBUS-DP
network (see the manual for the DP master)
1. Calculate the power input of each
module (see the technical
specifications as of Section 7.1).
2. Add up the power input of the
modules of each ET 200X.
3. If the power input > 1 A (0.8 A),
reduce the number of expansion
modules per ET 200X.
Load voltage
connected and
looped through to
the basic module
(see Figure 2-7)
Power input from the load of one ET 200X:
Up to 40 C 10 A
Up to 55 C 8 A
Power input from the load of the whole
configuration if the load voltage is looped
through:
Up to 40 C 16 A
Up to 55 C 12 A
1. Calculate the power input from the
load of each module (see the
technical specifications as of
Section 7.1).
2. Add up the power inputs of all the
modules of an ET 200X or of the
whole configuration.
3. If the power input from the load of
an ET 200X > 10 A (8 A), you have
two options:
– Reduce the number of
expansion module(s) with DOs
and/or motor starters/frequency
converters on the ET 200X
–Feed in the load voltage using a
power module (see Figure 2-10)
If the power input from the load of
the whole configuration > 16 A (12
A), feed the load voltage to a few
ET 200Xs from the power system
again.
!Caution
If you ignore the restrictions on the maximum system configuration specified in
Table 2-2, the cable insulation and the contacts may be overheated and the device
damaged as a result.
Currents of motor starters
You will find the power input and aggregate current of motor starters in the manual
EM 300 motor starters.
Currents of frequency converters
You will find the power input and aggregate current of frequency converters in the
manual EM 148-FC frequency converters.
Configuration Options
2-16 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
2.9 Maximum configuration and configuration options with power
modules
Maximum configuration
Every ET 200X consists of a basic module and up to seven expansion modules, of
which a maximum of seven expansion modules can be
PM 148 DO 4 DC 24V/2A power modules.
Restrictions imposed by power input
The maximum system configuration is limited amongst other things by the power
input of the load of the digital output modules in the configuration (see Section 2.7).
Limits for current consumption by load without use of power modules:
Limits for one ET 200X Limits for ET 200X overall configuration
(load voltage looped through)
Up to 40 C: 10 A Up to 40 C: 16 A
Up to 55 C: 8 A Up to 55 C: 12 A
Raising the limit
If the power input from the load exceeds the above limits, use power modules that
correspond to the load power consumption of your configuration. A power module
provides 10 A of load current for the downline digital-output modules.
Configuration Options
2-17
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Configuration examples
The illustration below shows a number of ET 200X configurations with power
modules. The load voltage can be:
fed separately to each basic module and each power module
looped through from basic module to power module
looped through from power module to power module
BM EM
DI DI
BM EM EM
DO DO DO
Supply voltage +
PROFIBUS-DP
Load voltage
Load voltage
BM EM EM
BM EM
DO DO
DO DO DO
3-core cable
...
Load voltage
EM
DO
Load voltage
Load voltage
PM
DO
PM
DO
PM
DO
PM
DO
Figure 2-10 Configuration examples with power modules
Note
Load voltage cannot be supplied to power modules from the basic module via the
ET 200X backplane bus. The load voltage must always be supplied via the power
module’s connector plug.
Configuration Options
2-18 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
3-1
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Installation
Structure of the ET 200X
The ET 200X distributed I/O device is a modular DP slave. An ET 200X consists of
a basic module and up to 7 expansion modules.
Installation procedure
You have to install the ET 200X distributed I/O device in several stages. See
Chapter 3.1 and 3.2.
Required settings
You can set the PROFIBUS address between with the 7 DIL switches in the basic
module or by means of the configuration connector (BM 143-DESINA and
BM 141-ECOFAST).
If the ET 200X distributed I/O device is the first or last DP slave in a
PROFIBUS-DP network with copper conductors (RS 485), you must terminate the
bus on the basic module with a terminating resistor (not required with
BM 143-DESINA FO).
Contents of Chapter
Section Subject Page
3.1 Installing/deinstalling the ET 200X 3-2
3.2 Installing/disassembling pneumatic components 3-11
3.3 Setting/modifying the PROFIBUS address 3-16
3.4 Terminating PROFIBUS with a terminating resistor 3-20
3
Installation
3-2 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
3.1 Installing/deinstalling the ET 200X
Installation Position
The ET 200X with no motor starters or frequency converters can be installed in
any position.
An ET 200X with motor starters or frequency converters can be installed on a
vertical wall in the following positions:
ET 200X tilted up to 22.5 to the front or the rear, and/or
ET 200X rotated up to 90 to the right or the left.
DIN rail
As a preference, the ET 200X modules must be installed on a DIN rail. Five types
are available (see Table 3-1 and Figures 3-1 and 3-2).
Table 3-1 DIN rails for installing an ET 200X
Description Order No.
DIN rail, narrow, length 400 mm
for ET 200X electronic module 6ES7 194-1GA00-0XA0
DIN rail, narrow, length 640 mm
for ET 200X electronic module 6ES7 194-1GA10-0XA0
DIN rail, narrow, length 2000 mm
for ET 200X electronic module 6ES7 194-1GA20-0XA0
DIN rail, wide, length 520 mm
for ET 200X electronic module and motor
starter/frequency converter/pneumatic interface
module
6ES7 194-1GB00-0XA0
DIN rail, wide, length 1000 mm
for ET 200X electronic module and motor
starter/frequency converter/pneumatic interface
module
6ES7 194-1GB10-0XA0
Screws with washer assemblies (100 screws M5 x
20, crossed recessed head with washer) for fitting
ET 200X modules onto DIN rail
6ES7 194-1KC00-0XA0
Installation
3-3
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
DIN rail, narrow
DIN rail, wide
Position of fixing
point, 2 x M8
Screw thread undercuts
for BM, EM, DESINA,
ECOFAST Screw thread undercuts
for valve island
Screw thread
undercuts for
MS/FC
Screw thread undercuts for
BM, EM, DESINA, ECOFAST
Position of fixing
screw
4 x M8
Figure 3-1 DIN rail for installing the ET 200X modules
Cross recessed head screws M5 x 20 8.8 Z4-1 as per DIN 7985 and a lock ring
and washer should be used to fasten the module to the DIN rail. The screw length
of 20 mm is absolutely essential.
Figure 3-2 shows dimensioned drawings for the narrow DIN rails.
Figure 3-3 shows dimensioned drawings for the wide DIN rails.
Installation
3-4 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
6ES7 194-1GA00-0XA0
6ES7 194-1GA10-0XA0
6ES7 194-1GA20-0XA0
(without mounting holes)
Max. 200
Figure 3-2 Dimensioned drawings of the narrow DIN rails
Note
You must cut the narrow DIN rail (with a length of 2000) to suit your requirements
and drill the mounting holes for M8 screws.
To ensure that all the ET 200X modules have the specified vibration resistance,
the mounting holes should be spaced at even intervals of a maximum 200 mm
after initial spacing of 12 mm.
Installation
3-5
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
6ES7 194-1GB00-0XA0
6ES7 194-1GB10-0XA0
Figure 3-3 Dimensioned drawings of the wide DIN rails
Installation
3-6 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Installing the ET 200X
1. Use M8 screws to secure the DIN rail to the substrate at all the fixing points
provided.
2. Remove the cover panel from the expansion port of the basic module.
3. Screw the basic module to the DIN rail at the 4 fixing points using cross-recess
M5 x 20 screws
Tightening torque: 2 Nm (max. 3 Nm)
4. Plug the expansion module into the expansion interface of the basic module
and fasten the modules using two M3.5 x 25 screws.
Installation
3-7
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Note
If both frequency converters and motor starters are to be fitted in
an ET 200X, you must always fit the frequency converters to
the right of the motor starters (because the connector pin
assignment of the motor starters is different from the assignment
on the DESINA).
SITOP power 24V/10A must always be fitted in the extreme right
position in the ET 200X and the lid fitted to seal the expansion
interface.
5. Use M5 x 20 cross-recess screws to screw the expansion module to the DIN
rail at the two or three fixing points.
Tightening torque: 2 Nm (max. 3 Nm)
6. Plug the next expansion module into the interface of the previous expansion
module and fasten the module using two or three M3.5 x 25 screws.
7. Use M5 x 20 cross-recess screws to screw the expansion module to the DIN
rail at the two or three fixing points.
Tightening torque: 2 Nm (max. 3 Nm)
8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until the ET 200X is completely installed on the DIN rail.
9. Fix the cover panel for the expansion port onto the last expansion module of the
ET200X.
2
4
9
Figure 3-4 Installing expansion modules
Installation
3-8 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Deinstalling the ET 200X
Note the following before deinstalling the ET 200X:
!Caution
Before you deinstall expansion modules, you must switch off all the supply
voltages for the ET 200X (i.e. the ET 200X must be deenergized).
If you do not do this, when you remove the expansion modules their electronic
components can get damaged.
Note
If servicing is required, it is possible to eliminate a module fault by replacing the
upper section (the ET 200X must be in a deenergized state). In this case,
disassemble the replacement module and use the upper section.
This renders complete disassembly of the ET 200X unnecessary.
Installation
3-9
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Dimensioned drawing for fixing holes
The diagrams below show you the positions of the fixing screw holes for one basic
module, one expansion module and one motor starter or frequency converter. Use
the specified screws.
Note
The ET 200X must be installed on the rail, and screws must be affixed at all the
fixing points.
M5 20M5 20M5 20 M5 20
Rail
M3.5 20 M3.5 20
Figure 3-5 Fixing screws for basic and expansion modules
Installation
3-10 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
M5 20
M5 20
M5 20
M3.5 25
M3.5 25
M3.5 25
Rail
Figure 3-6 Fixing screws for motor starters and frequency converters
Installation
3-11
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
3.2 Installing/disassembling pneumatic components
Supply and service line connections to the pneumatic module
Silencer or waste air line connection
Supply line (compressed air)
Valve 2 service connections
Valve 1 service connections
Figure 3-7 Supply and service lines on pneumatic module EM 148-P DI 4 x DC 24V/DO 2 x P
Diameters of tubing for pneumatic connection
Table 3-2 Outer diameters of pneumatic tubing
Tubing Outside diameter
Supply and waste air connections 8 mm each
Service connections per valve 6 mm each
Installation
3-12 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Supply, waste air and service line connection to pneumatic module
Prerequisite: You have installed the ET 200X (see Section 3.1).
1. Use tubing exhibiting outside tolerance from FESTO for example, type PUN ...
or type PAN .... Push the tubing having an outer diameter complying with
Table 3-2 as far as the stop over the appropriate connection on the module
(refer to Figure 3-7).
2. Close unused service connections with plugs. (2 plugs are included with the
pneumatic module.)
Note
Bundle laid tubing with hose band clips for the sake of tidiness on your system.
Directing waste air into the environment
If you want to direct the waste air from the module into the environment, you can
leave the waste air connection on the module open (refer to Figure 3-7). We
recommend you to place a silencer on the waste air connection to reduce noise.
You will find the order number for the silencer in Appendix A.
Containing waste air
If you place tubing on the waste air connection of the module, you can then guide
the waste air away or collect it. Collection is practical, for instance, the pneumatic
system is enriched with oil and you would like to dissipate the oily air.
In the case of contained air, the tubing has to be run by the shortest possible route
to a large-volume waste air line or outdoors. Please note that the operating
pressure must not rise with hose length. Waste air must not be impeded at the
waste air connection of the module.
Note
When the waste air from several modules is funneled, the resulting back pressure
in the common waste air line my be too high – for example, with a long waste air
tube length or a small tube diameter. In this case we recommend you to install a
non-return valve between the waste air line of the pneumatic module and the
common waste air line – for example, type H-QS-8 from FESTO.
Installation
3-13
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Central supply of compressed air to pneumatic modules
There is no pneumatic connection between several pneumatic modules of the
ET 200X. This means that you must supply compressed air to each pneumatic
module separately.
In order to feed the pneumatic modules centrally with air all the same, there is a
simple solution. You interconnect the compressed air lines by means of T plug
connections – for example, type QST-10-8 from FESTO, as basically shown in the
figure below.
BM EM EM
PM PM
Central supply of
compressed air T plug connection
BM EM EM
PM PM
ET 200X ET 200X EM
PM
...
Supply line
Figure 3-8 Central supply of compressed air to pneumatic modules
Note
The rate of air flow is lower when T plug connections are used.
Note on starting up and operating pneumatic components
Note
Please note that the permissible operating pressure is reached before the valve is
switched electrically.
FESTO valve island for ET 200X
The pneumatic interface modules are expansion modules for connecting two
Regular FESTO valve islands:
EM 148-P DO 16 P/CPV10 for FESTO valve island CPV10
EM 148-P DO 16 P/CPV14 for FESTO valve island CPV14
You can obtain valve islands from FESTO. The valve islands are described in
separate documents.
Installation
3-14 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Installing a FESTO valve island and pneumatic interface module
Prerequisite: You have installed the ET 200X (see Chapter 3.1).
If you want to install a pneumatic interface module or a PM 148 DO 4DC 24V/2A
power module directly next to a motor starter, the motor starter must be version
02.
A maximum of six pneumatic interface modules can be plugged into an ET 200X.
To install, perform the followings steps:
1. Slide the pneumatic interface module into the expansion interface of the
preceding module.
2. Tighten the securing screws of the extension interface.
3. Plug the valve island in the interface module.
4. Screw the valve island and the interface module tightly to the rail (see Section
3.1).
6
5
4
Figure 3-9 Installing a valve island with an interface module
Installation
3-15
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Dimensioned drawing for installation holes on the pneumatic interface module
The diagram below contains the dimensions and positions of the mounting screw
holes for one basic module and a pneumatic interface module.
120
n = number of expansion modules (without pneumatic interface module)
n + 120
126.8
53.5
48.25
132
109.5
Figure 3-10 Dimensions of installation holes on the pneumatic interface module
Disassembling modules featuring pneumatic functionality
Please take the following important note into account before disassembling
pneumatic and pneumatic interface modules:
!Caution
Before disassembling expansion modules featuring pneumatics, you must:
disconnect all supply voltages for the ET 200X
disconnect the supply of compressed air
If you fail to comply with these rules, the following effects are possible:
damage to module electronics
uncontrollable motions of detached tubing
unwanted motions of the actuators connected
Installation
3-16 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
3.3 Setting/modifying the PROFIBUS address
The PROFIBUS address defines the address of the ET 200X distributed I/O device
on PROFIBUS-DP which is used by the DP master.
Set the PROFIBUS address using the DIP switches on the basic module.
Valid PROFIBUS addresses
The PROFIBUS address can be anything from 1 to 125. The PROFIBUS address
0, which is set when the ET 200 distributed I/O system leaves the factory, is
reserved for a programming device/PC.
Location of the DIP switches on the BM 141, BM 142 and BM 147/CPU
The DIP switches for setting the PROFIBUS address are inside the basic module
underneath the connector plate for the connectors for PROFIBUS-DP and the
supply voltage.
Location of the DIP Switches on the BM 143-DESINA and BM 141-ECOFAST
The DIL switches for setting the PROFIBUS address are in a removable
configuration connector.
The configuration connector is secured to the basic module by an 8-pin M12 round
plug.
This means that if the basic module has to be replaced it is not necessary to reset
the PROFIBUS address.
Installation
3-17
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Procedure for BM 141, BM 142 and BM 147/CPU
1. Remove the connector plate from the basic module before you set the
PROFIBUS address. The DIL switches are concealed by the connector plate.
2. Set the PROFIBUS address using the DIL switches.
The diagram below shows the location of the DIL switches in the basic module as
well as an example of the switch settings.
Example: PROFIBUS address 78
7654321
ON
* Switch 8 must be OFF!
8*
21 +22 + 23 + 26 = 2 + 4 + 8 + 64 = 78
Figure 3-11 Setting the PROFIBUS address
Note: The PROFIBUS address in the basic module must always correspond to the
PROFIBUS address specified in the configuration software for this ET 200X.
Installation
3-18 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Procedure for BM 143-DESINA and BM 141-ECOFAST
1. Unscrew the configuration connector from the basic module and disconnect the
plug (see Figure 3-12).
Configuration connector
Figure 3-12 Position of the configuration connector on the
ET 200X-DESINA/ET 200X-ECOFAST
2. On the configuration connector, slacken the screw securing the cover and
remove the cover.
3. Set the PROFIBUS address using the DIL switches.
The diagram below shows the configuration connector with the cover removed, as
well as an example of the switch settings.
Installation
3-19
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Example: PROFIBUS address 92
22 + 23 + 24 + 26 = 4 + 8 + 16 + 64 = 92
ON ON
1723456
Figure 3-13 Setting the PROFIBUS address at the configuration connector
Note: The PROFIBUS address in the basic module must always correspond to the
PROFIBUS address specified in the configuration software for this
ET 200X-DESINA/ET 200X-ECOFAST.
4. Reinstall the cover and plug the configuration connector back into the basic
module. Secure the configuration connector to the basic module.
Modifying the PROFIBUS address
You can modify the PROFIBUS address in exactly the same way as you set it. Any
change made to the PROFIBUS address takes effect when the supply voltage is
turned on the ET 200X.
Installation
3-20 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
3.4 Terminating PROFIBUS with a terminating resistor
Purpose of the terminating resistor
A bus cable must be connected at both ends (i.e. at the first and last node in the
network) with its characteristic impedance.
Note
The terminating resistor is only necessary with copper conductors with an RS-optic
cables (FO).
Because the BM 143–DESINA FO bas ic module is connect ed to the PRO F I BUS –DP
by means of fiber-opt ic cables ther e is no terminating resis t or ther e.
How to proceed with the ET 200X
In the case of the ET 200X you swit ch the ter minat ing resist or using two DIP
switc hes. The two DIP swit c hes are inside the basic module of the ET 200X, under
the connect or plat e for the connect or for PROF I B US -DP and the supply volt age for
electr onic com ponent s/ sens ors .
1. Remove the connector plate from the basic module before you connect the
terminating resistor. The DIL switches are concealed by the connector plate.
2. Connect the terminating resistor using the DIL switches.
The diagram below shows the location of the DIL switches in the basic module as
well as an example of the switch settings.
Note
The terminating resistor will not function correctly unless both DIP switches of the
terminating resistor are set to ”on” or ”off”.
Example: terminating resistor
connected
off
on
Figure 3-14 Connecting the terminating resistor
Installation
3-21
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
How to proceed with the ET 200X-DESINA and ET 200X-ECOFAST with RS 485
Interface
Connect these bus nodes using DESINA hybrid cables with copper conductors
(RS 485).
Attach the terminating resistor for the first and last bus node on the right-hand
DESINA connector of the relevant BM 141-ECOFAST or BM 143-DESINA RS485
basic module.
You can find the order numbers for the terminating resistor in Appendix A.
Terminating resistor
PROFIBUS-DP with
RS 485 interface
Figure 3-15 Attaching the terminating resistor
Note
The terminating resistor is supplied by the non-switched DC 24 V-NS load voltage.
The terminating resistor can only be guaranteed to function without problems if the
non-switched DC 24 V-NS load voltage has a tolerance range of ±10%.
Installation
3-22 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
4-1
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Wiring
In this Chapter
This chapter provides an overview of the rules and regulations for operating the
ET 200X distributed I/O device.
It also shows you how you have to wire the ET 200X distributed I/O device.
Contents of Chapter
Section Subject Page
4.1 General rules and regulations for operating an ET 200X 4-2
4.2 Operating an ET 200X on a grounded supply 4-4
4.3 Electrical design of the ET 200X 4-6
4.4 Wiring the ET 200X 4-11
Grounding
You can set up a grounded or ungrounded configuration for the ET 200X
distributed I/O device.
For reasons of electromagnetic compatibility, the ET 200X and
ET 200X-DESINA/ET 200X-ECOFAST distributed I/O devices must always be
non-isolated (connect PE terminal to protective ground!).
4
Wiring
4-2 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
4.1 General rules and regulations for operating an ET 200X
As a component part of a plant or system, the ET 200X distributed I/O device
necessitates observance of special rules and regulations, depending on where it is
to be used.
This chapter provides an overview of the most important rules which you have to
observe for integrating the ET 200X distributed I/O device in a plant or system.
Specific application
Observe the safety and accident prevention regulations that apply to specific
applications, e.g. the directive on machinery 89/392/EEC.
EMERGENCY STOP devices
EMERGENCY STOP devices conforming with IEC 204 (corresponds to
DIN VDE 113) must remain effective in all the operating modes of the plant or
system.
Plant Start-up after certain events
The following table shows the points you have to take into account upon start-up of
a plant following certain events.
If ... Then ...
Start-up follows a voltage drop or
failure
Start-up of the ET 200X follows
an interruption of bus
communications
No dangerous operating states may occur. If
they do, an emergency stop must be
triggered.
Start-up follows unlocking of the
EMERGENCY STOP device There must not be an uncontrolled or
undefined start-up.
Wiring
4-3
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
24 VDC supply
The following table shows you the items you have to take into account in respect of
the 24 VDC supply.
With ... Pay attention to ...
Buildings Outdoor lightning
protection Take lightning protection
precautions
24 VDC supply lines,
signal lines Indoor lightning
protection – for example, lightning
conductors
24 VDC supply Safe (electrical) isolation of extra-low voltage
Protection against external electrical phenomena
The following table shows you the items you have to take into account in respect of
protection against electrical phenomena or faults.
With ... Make sure that ...
Any plant or system in
which the ET 200X is
installed
The plant or system is connected to a protective
ground for diverting electromagnetic interference.
Supply, signal and bus
lines The wiring arrangement and installation are correct.
Signal and bus lines Any break of a line or conductor does not result in
undefined states of the plant or system.
Wiring
4-4 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
4.2 Operating the ET 200X on a grounded supply
In this section, you will find information on the overall configuration of an ET 200X
distributed I/O device on a grounded supply (TN-S system). The specific subjects
discussed are:
Circuit-breaking devices, short-circuit and overload protection in accordance
with DIN VDE 0100 and DIN VDE 0113
Load power supplies and load circuits
Definition: Grounded supply
With grounded supplies, the neutral conductor of the system is grounded. A simple
ground fault between a live conductor and ground or a grounded section of the
plant causes the protective devices to trip.
Components and protective measures
Different components and protective measures are specified for erecting a
complete plant. The types of component and the degree to which the protective
measures are binding depend on the DIN VDE regulation that applies to the
configuration of your plant. The following table refers to Figure 4-1.
Compare .. . Ref. to
Fig. 4-1 DIN VDE 0100 DIN VDE 0113
Circuit-breaking device
for PLC, sensors and si-
gnal control elements
... Part 460:
Main switch ... Part 1:
Disconnector
Short-circuit and overload
protection:
Grouped for sensors and
signal control elements
... Part 725:
Single-pole pro-
tection of circuits
... Part 1:
In the case of a grounded
secondary circuit: provide
single-pole protection
Otherwise: Provide
all-pole protection
Safe electrical isolation
Safe electrical isolation must be provided for:
Modules that must be supplied with voltages 60 VDC or 25 VAC
24 VDC load circuits
Configuring the ET 200X with grounded reference potential
When the ET 200X is configured with grounded reference potential, any
interference currents are diverted to the protective ground. The connections must
be connected externally or in the connector (see Figure 4-1).
Wiring
4-5
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Configuring the ET 200X with ungrounded reference potential
When the ET 200X is configured with ungrounded reference potential, any
interference currents that occur are diverted to the protective ground via an RC
network in the basic module.
Insulation monitor
You must set up an insulation monitor in the following cases:
Ungrounded configuration of the ET 200X
When dangerous system states can occur as a result of double faults
ET 200X in overall configuration
Figure 4-1 shows the location of the ET 200X distributed I/O device in the overall
system (load power supply and grounding philosophy) for supply from a TN-S
system.
Ground bus
1L+
1M
ET 200X
L1
L2
L3
N
Load circuit
AC 400V for motor starters and
frequency converters
24 VDC load circuit for digital and analog
outputs and motor starters (fed via connectors
on basic module)
AC
DC
Low-voltage distribution
For example, TN-S system
(3 400 V)
PE
BM
Minternal
Data
mP
AC
DC
In an ungrounded ET 200X
configuration, there is no conĆ
nection between 1M and PE.
In the case of the ET 200X-DESINA
and ET 200X-ECOFAST:
DC 24 V-NS
Figure 4-1 Operating the ET 200X with reference potential
Wiring
4-6 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
4.3 Electrical design of the ET 200X
Electrical isolation between ...
The electrical design of the ET 200X includes isolation between:
The load circuits and all the other circuit components of the ET 200X
The PROFIBUS-DP port in the basic module and circuit components
ET 200X configuration
The diagrams below show the potentials in an ET 200X configuration.
1L+
1M
BM
2M
2L+
EM DO
Ground bus
Actuator
1M
Data
EM DI EM 300 DS
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
AC
DC
AC
DC
M
3
Note: The potentials of the analog modules EM AI and EM AO
correspond to those of the EM DI expansion modules.
mP
Figure 4-2 Potentials present in an ET 200X configuration with motor starter
Wiring
4-7
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
1L+
1M
BM
2M
2L+
EM DO
Ground bus
Actuator
1M
Data
EM DI EM 148-FC
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
AC
DC
AC
DC
M
3
Note: The potentials of the analog modules EM AI and EM AO
correspond to those of the EM DI expansion modules.
mP
mC
Brake
Filter
mC
Figure 4-3 Potentials present in an ET 200X configuration with frequency converter
Wiring
4-8 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
BM 143-DESINA FO or BM 143-DESINA RS485
Ground bus
Interface
Data
L1
L2
L3
N
PE mP
Feed
DESINA
connection
AC
DC
A
B
DC 24 V-NS
M-NS
AC
DC
DC 24 V-S
M-S
Loop through
DESINA
connection
A
B
DC 24 V-NS
M-NS
DC 24 V-S
M-S
X1
X3
X5
X7
X2
X4
X6
X8
Figure 4-4 Potentials present in an ET 200X-DESINA configuration
Wiring
4-9
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
BM 141-ECOFAST
Ground bus
RS 485
interface
Data
L1
L2
L3
N
PE mP
Feed
DESINA
connection
AC
DC
A
B
DC 24 V-NS
M-NS
AC
DC
DC 24 V-S
M-S
Loop through
DESINA
connection
A
B
DC 24 V-NS
M-NS
DC 24 V-S
M-S
X1
X3
X5
X7
X2
X4
X6
X8
Figure 4-5 Potentials present in an ET 200X-ECOFAST configuration
Note
In the case of the ET 200X-DESINA/ET 200X-ECOFAST distributed I/O device,
the frame potentials of the switched and non-switched load voltage are connected
to each other.
Wiring
4-10 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Note
The following applies to the BM 143-DESINA FO, BM 143-DESINA RS485, and
EM 143-DESINA modules:
All inputs receive the non-switched load voltage.
Outputs (if present) of sockets X1, X3, X5, X7 are supplied by the switched
load voltage.
Outputs (if present) of sockets X2, X4, X6, X8 are supplied by the
non-switched load voltage.
The outputs of all other expansion modules receive the switched load voltage.
Protection against destruction of components
In order to prevent the components of the ET 200X from being destroyed, you
must always protect the supply voltage lines to the electronics/sensors and the
load voltage with an external circuit–breaker – for example, Siemens Series 5SN1
that has the following characteristics:
Protection of the supply voltage for the electronic components/sensors:
230 VAC (with rated current)/max. 6 A: tripping characteristic (type) B or C
Protection of the load voltage:
230 VAC (with rated current)/max. 16 A: tripping characteristic (type) B or C
Wiring
4-11
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
4.4 Wiring the ET 200X
Wiring procedure
You have to wire the ET 200X distributed I/O device in several steps. We
recommend you adopt the following procedure:
Table 4-1 Order of steps for wiring the ET 200X
Step Procedure See ...
1. Install the connectors for PROFIBUS-DP, supply and
load voltage, if required. Section 4.4.1
2. Wire the above connectors. Section 4.4.2
3. Wire the connectors for connection to the inputs and
outputs on the modules. Section 4.4.4
4. Connect the protective ground to the basic module. Section 4.4.5
5. Connect the protective ground to expansion modules
with analog inputs and outputs. Section 4.4.6
6. Install the connectors and the plugs for the inputs and
outputs on the modules. Section 4.4.7
7. Seal unused sockets with M12 plugs.
Note
Steps 1 and 2 do not apply to ET 200X-DESINA, because the cables used are of
the ready-to-use DESINA hybrid type.
Wiring
4-12 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Suitable cable types
The table below shows the suitable cable types and their applications. You can find
a list of cables and their order numbers in Appendix
A. If cables other those listed in Appendix A are used for connecting and looping
through PROFIBUS-DP, these cables must meet the specification for cable type A
as per PROFIBUS-DP.
Table 4-2 Cable types
Cable type Application
5-core cable,
shielded Connecting and looping through PROFIBUS-DP and supply
voltage to electronics/sensors via a common cable
3-core
copper cable, flexible Connecting supply voltage to electronics/sensors or load
voltage1
2-core cable,
shielded (bus cable) Connecting and looping through PROFIBUS-DP
DESINA hybrid cable
(fiber-optic cable or
RS 485, prepared
with a DESINA
connector)
Connecting and looping through PROFIBUS-DP and
non-switched and switched supply voltages via a common
cable
The DESINA hybrid cable is supplied ready for use (wired)
with DESINA connectors in various lengths. See Appendix
A.
3-, 4- or 5-core
copper cable, flexible Connecting the actuators and sensors to the digital
inputs/outputs2
4-core copper cable,
shielded Connecting the actuators and sensors to the
analog inputs/outputs2
4 or 6-core copper
cable, flexible Connecting the motor starter3:
The load and brake supply voltage (with looping through)
A load
(with brake, only a 6-core cable can be used; see the
EM 300 Motor Starters manual for order number)
4-, or 8-core copper
cable, flexible,
shielded
Connecting the frequency converter4:
The load supply voltage
(with looping through)
A load with brake and thermistor (only an 8-core cable)
For order number see EM 148-FC frequency converter
Manual
1Core cross-section must be 2.5 mm2
2Core cross-section must be 0.75 mm2
3Core cross-section must be = 1.5 or 2.5 mm2
4Core cross-section must be = 1.5, 2.5 or 4 mm2
Wiring
4-13
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Table 4-3 Technical specifications of the 5-core cable
Parameters Value
Type of cable
With PVC sheath
With PUR sheath, suitable for drum
use
02Y(ST)C 120.65/2.56-150 LI
LIY-J Y 310.75 VI KF30
02Y(ST)C 120.65/2.56-150 LI
LIY-J Y 11 310.75 PETROL
Cable structure
a) Core LIY 0.75/1.70
Copper strands 24 0.2 BLW
Polyvinylchloride sheathing (PVC)
Section thickness
b) Core 02Y 0.65/2.56 LI
Copper strands 19 0.13 BLW
Celled polyethylene sheathing
c) Pair LI02Y(ST)C 120.25/2.6
2 cores to b) RD, GN braided
Aluminum coated foil, overlapped
Braided shield made of Cu wires
Outer sheath
∅ 1.23 mm
∅ 1.7 mm
approx. 0.23 mm
∅ 0.65 mm
∅ 2.56 mm
0.15 mm ∅ VZN
approx. 65 %
Core
1 bundle to c), 3 cores to a) GNYE, BK,
BL
Filler
Plastic foil, overlapped ∅ 7.9 mm
Sheath
Section thickness PVC or PUR
approx. 0.8 mm
Outside diameter (9.5 0.5) mm
Permissible minimum bending radius
recurrent bending
once-only bending
70 mm
35 mm
Operating temperature –30 °C to +60 °C
Weight approx. 105 kg/km
Wiring
4-14 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Table 4-3 Technical specifications of the 5-core cable, continued
Parameters Value
Electrical properties at 20 °C Tests in
accordance with DIN VDE 0472
Conductor resistance of cores to a)
Conductor resistance of cores to b)
Insulation resistance
Operating capacity 1
Surge impedance at 3 to 20 MHz 1
Wave attenuation at 0.2 MHz 1
Operating voltage (peak voltage)
Test voltage
(core/core eff. 50 Hz 1 min)
Test voltage
(core/shield eff. 50 Hz 1 min)
26 Ω/km
84 Ω/km
20 MΩ/km
30 pF/m
135 to 165 Ω
0.6 dB/100 m
35 V
500 V
500 V
Flame test to VDE 0472, Part 804, test type B
only cables with PUR sheath
Oil resistance
Suitable for drum use to VDE 0471, Part 804, test type B
Yes
1 Values for pair to c)
4.4.1 Installing/removing connectors
To affix the cables and provide IP 65, IP 66, and IP 67 protection, the connectors
for PROFIBUS-DP, the supply voltage, and load voltage are supplied with M16
cable glands.
A connector assembly consists of a protective shell, a 6-pin connector, 1(2) M16
cable gland(s) and 1(2) lock nut(s). You can find the order numbers for the
connectors in Appendix A.
1st M16 cable gland 2nd M16 cable gland
can be attached
Shell
Figure 4-6 Connector: protective shell with an M16 cable gland
Wiring
4-15
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Installing connectors
Proceed as follows to install a connector:
1. Pierce the shell of the connector with a screwdriver at the point at which you
want to feed through the cable.
Risk of injury. Watch your fingers.
2. Place the lock nut in the shell over the pierced hole.
3. Screw the M16 cable gland tightly onto the protective shell.
Note: If you feed PROFIBUS-DP and the supply voltage for the electronic
components/sensors to the basic module via 2 separate cables, you must
install two M16 cable glands on the protective shell.
4. Feed the cable through the installed M16 cable gland.
5. Wire the 6-pin plug connector (see Section 4.4.2). In doing so, comply with the
wiring rules listed in Table 4-4.
6. Withdraw the cable until the start of the sheath is roughly level with the start of
the M16 cable gland, then screw the M16 cable gland tight (the sheath is
clamped).
7. Feed the wired plug connector back into the shell until it snaps into place. This
is shown in the diagram below (apart from the wiring).
Locking hooks
Locking hooks
Shell Connector
Figure 4-7 Snapping the connector into place in the shell
Wiring
4-16 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Removing connectors
If you want to remove a connector, proceed as follows
1. Release the two locking hooks as illustrated in Figure 4-8 using a pointed
implement.
2. Remove the connector from the shell.
Release locking hooks
Remove the connector from the shell
1
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
Shell
Connector
Figure 4-8 Removing the connector from the shell
Wiring
4-17
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
4.4.2 Wiring connectors
Rules for wiring connectors
The following table shows you the rules you have to take into account in respect of
the wiring of the connectors.
Table 4-4 Wiring rules for connectors
Rules for ... Wiring connectors
Connectable core cross-sections:
Solid conductors Options for PROFIBUS-DP connection:
2-core cable, shielded (bus cable)
Direct-buried cable
Flexible conductors
with wire end ferrule
without wire end ferrule 0.25 to 1.5 mm2
0.25 to 2.5 mm2
Number of cores per terminal connection 1 or combination of 2 cores up to 1.5 mm2
(sum) in a common wire end ferrule
Permissible outside diameter of cable ∅4 to 10 mm
Bared length of cores (with or without
insulation collar) 6 mm
Bared length of cable sheath 45 mm
Wire end ferrules to DIN 46228
without insulation collar
with insulation collar Form A up to 7 mm long
Form E up to 8 mm long
Bared Lengths: Example
The diagram below shows an example of bared lengths. These lengths apply to all
cables that are suitable for use with the connector assembly. Braided shields must
be twisted and inserted into wire end ferrules, and the projecting lengths cut off.
The shield around the PROFIBUS cores must be brought as close as possible to
the connectors.
45
6
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Braided shield
twisted and cut to
correct length
Figure 4-9 Bared length of a 5-core cable
Wiring
4-18 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Connection alternatives
The following connection alternatives are available for the ET 200X in accordance
with the configuration options:
Supply voltage for the electronics/sensors and PROFIBUS-DP fed via a
common cable
Supply voltage for the electronics/sensors and PROFIBUS-DP fed via separate
cables
The load voltage must either be fed separately to each ET 200X or looped through.
Wiring of PROFIBUS-DP and supply voltage
If you want to feed PROFIBUS-DP and the supply voltage for the
electronics/sensors to the basic module separately, you will need:
A connector
A 2-core cable, shielded for the PROFIBUS-DP terminal connection (the
braided shield must be twisted, inserted in a wire end ferrule and connected to
pin 2 of the shield; see Figure 4-10)
A 3-core, flexible copper cable for the supply voltage connection
If you want to feed PROFIBUS-DP and the supply voltage for the
electronics/sensors to the basic module via a common cable, you will need a
5-core, shielded cable in addition to the connector (6ES7 194-1LY00-0AA0-Z).
Connector pinout
You must always wire the connector as shown in the diagram below, irrespective of
whether you are using one or two cables. The pins for the PROFIBUS-DP terminal
connection are highlighted in bold type.
2
3
4
5
1
6
B (red)
Shield (PE)
A (green)
L+* (black)
M* (blue)
* Connect supply voltage for electronics/sensors to these pins; either do not connect the
cable’s 3rd core when using a BM 147/CPU or connect it to pin 3
BM 141/142: PE (green-yellow)*
BM 147/CPU: unassigned
Figure 4-10 Pinout of the connector for wiring PROFIBUS-DP and the supply voltage for
the electronics/sensors
Wiring
4-19
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Looping through PROFIBUS-DP and supply voltage
If you want to loop PROFIBUS-DP and/or the supply voltage for the
electronics/sensors through to the next ET 200X, you have to wire the second
connector. This connector must be wired in exactly the same way as the connector
for feeding the first ET 200X (see Figure 4-10).
Wiring of load power supply
If you want to connect a load power supply (24 VDC), you will need:
A connector
A 3-core, flexible Cu cable
Wire the connector to pins 1, 2 and 3 as shown in the diagram below. Terminals 1
and 4; 2 and 5; 3 and 6 are internally jumpered.
2
3
4
5
1
6
PE PE
L+
M
L+
M
Figure 4-11 Pinout of the load voltage connector
!Caution
If you wire the connectors incorrectly, the device or its components may be
damaged beyond repair!
Looping through load voltage
If you want to loop a load voltage (24 VDC) through to the next ET 200X, you must
wire a 3-core, flexible, copper cable to the connector (pins 4, 5 and 6) in addition to
the wiring arrangement shown in Figure 4-11. Then wire the other end of the cable
to pins 1, 2 and 3 of the next load voltage connector.
Always use the same core colors for the same signals.
Note
The load voltage can be looped through from the power module only when the
connector is plugged into the power module.
Wiring
4-20 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Looping through the load voltage from the power module
If you want to loop the load voltage through to the next power module or ET 200X,
you must install a second M16 cable gland on the connector (see wiring in
Figure 4-11).
Connector assembly
Load voltage supply
Load voltage looped
through to next module
Figure 4-12 Power module with connector and 2 M16 cable glands
Note
The load voltage can be looped through from the power module only when the
connector is plugged into the power module.
Using a common power supply
You can feed the supply voltage for the electronics/sensors and for loads from a
single power supply, providing no electrical isolation is necessary between the
sensor and the load supply. You simply need to wire the two connectors together
externally (L+, M and PE). Note the restrictions imposed by the current
consumption (see Section 2.8)! If necessary, use a power module or a
SITOP power 24V/10A.
Always plug in 3 connectors
Note
You must always plug all three connectors into the basic module, irrespective of
whether or not they are wired, in order to ensure that the degree of protection
(IP 65, IP 66 or IP 67) is achieved.
An alternative is to close unused connectors with covers. You can find the order
numbers for the covers in Appendix A.
Wiring
4-21
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
4.4.3 Pinout of the ET 200X-DESINA / ET 200X-ECOFAST
Figure 4-13 shows the pinout of the connector for the BM 143-DESINA FO basic
module.
5
2
1
6
3
4
5
2
1
6
3
4
Supply
Looping through
Socket
X01
Supply
(Supply voltage
for electronics/
sensors, actuators
PROFIBUS-DP)
Pinout
1 L+ (NS)
2 M (NS)
3 M (S)
4 L+ (S)
5 Signal A (RD)
6 Signal B (TD)
X02
Loop through 1 L+ (NS)
2 M (NS)
3 M (S)
4 L+ (S)
5 Signal A (RD)
6 Signal B (TD)
View of the connec-
tions of the basic
module (fiber-optic
cable)
Figure 4-13 Pinout of the connector for the BM 143-DESINA FO
Figure 4-14 shows the pinout of the connector for the BM 141-ECOFAST and
BM 143-DESINA RS485 basic modules.
Supply
Looping through
5
2
1
6
3
4
5
2
1
6
3
4
Socket
X01
Supply
(Supply voltage
for electronics/
sensors, actuators
PROFIBUS-DP)
Pinout
1 L+ (NS)
2 M (NS)
3 M (S)
4 L+ (S)
5 Signal A
6 Signal B
X02
Loop through 1 L+ (NS)
2 M (NS)
3 M (S)
4 L+ (S)
5 Signal A
6 Signal B
View of the connections of
the basic module (RS 485)
Figure 4-14 Pinout of the connector for the BM 141-ECOFAST and
BM 143-DESINA RS485 basic modules
Wiring
4-22 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
4.4.4 Wiring the connectors for inputs and outputs
Connectors for digital inputs and outputs
You can connect digital inputs and outputs to the round, 5-pin M12 sockets on the
front of the basic/expansion modules. Alternatively, you can use 5-pin M12 coupler
plugs or Y connectors. Please refer to Appendix A for the order numbers.
Connectors for analog inputs and outputs
You connect analog inputs and outputs to the round, 5-pin M12 sockets on the
front of the expansion module. You use 4- or 5-pin M12 coupler plugs. You can
obtain further information on the connectors on request:
4-pin Outgoing cable unit PG 7 99-1429-814-04
4-pin Outgoing cable unit PG 9 99-1429-812-04
5-pin Outgoing cable unit PG 7 99-1437-814-05
5-pin Outgoing cable unit PG 9 99-1437-812-05
Address for ordering:
Franz Binder GmbH + Co.
Elektrische Bauelemente KG
Rötelstraße 27
D-74172 Neckarsulm
Wiring
4-23
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Wiring of M12 coupler plug for digital inputs
To connect the digital inputs, you require:
A 5-pin, M12 coupler plug, possibly integrally molded
A flexible 3-, 4- or 5-core copper cable with a core cross-section of 0.75 mm2
Wire the coupler plug in accordance with the pinout table below. The pinout of the
sockets X1 to X4/X8, which are used for the inputs on the ET 200X, is shown
together with the data for the individual modules in Section 7.1 ff.
Table 4-5 Pinout of the coupler plug for digital inputs
Pin Assignment View of coupler plug
(wiring side)
124 V power supply for sensor*
2** Input signal 2
3Chassis ground, power supply 13
5
4Input signal 4
5 PE
* Made available by the ET 200X for the connected sensor
** Only relevant if socket has 2 assigned channels
Note
If a sensor has a normally-closed contact and a normally-open contact, the
normally-closed contact is automatically wired to pin 2. The channel assigned to
pin 2 can thus no longer be used for the adjacent socket.
Wiring of M12 coupler plug for digital inputs (DESINA/ECOFAST)
To connect the digital inputs, you require:
A 5-pin, M12 coupler plug, possibly integrally molded
A flexible 4- or 5-core copper cable with a core cross-section of 0.75 mm2
Wire the coupler plug in accordance with the pinout table below. The pinout of
sockets X1 to X8, which are used for the inputs on the
ET 200X-DESINA/ECOFAST, is shown together with the data for the individual
modules in Section 7.5 ff.
Connecting digital inputs (DESINA):
You have set the following parameters:
Pin 2 as diagnostic input and pin 4 as digital input.
Channel type (pin 4): digital input
Input functionality (pin 2): diagnostic input
Wiring
4-24 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Table 4-6 Pinout of the coupler plug for digital inputs (DESINA)
Pin Assignment for digital
input (DESINA) View of coupler plug
(wiring side)
124 V power supply for
sensor* Digital input
2Diagnostic input of
DESINA sensor
(DESINA)
2
3Chassis ground,
power supply 1
2
35
4Input signal from
DESINA sensor
4
5not assigned
* Made available by the ET 200X-DESINA/ET 200X-ECOFAST for the connected sensor
Wiring
4-25
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Connecting digital inputs (standard):
You have set the following parameters:
Pin 2 as input with NC function and pin 4 as digital input.
Channel type (pin 4): digital input
Input functionality (pin 2): input with NC function
Table 4-7 Pinout of the coupler plug for digital inputs (standard)
Pin Assignment for digital
input (standard) View of coupler plug
(wiring side)
124 V power supply for
sensor* Digital inputs
(standard)
2Input signal** (NC
function) 2
3Chassis ground,
power supply 13
4
5
4Input signal
5not assigned
* Made available by the ET 200X-DESINA/ET 200X-ECOFAST for the connected sensor
** NC function:
Non-switched means: To the process when status is ”1”, in PII status ”0”;
switched means: To the process when status is ”0”, in PII status ”1”
Wiring of M12 coupler plug for digital outputs
To connect the digital inputs, you require:
A 5-pin, M12 coupler plug, possibly integrally molded
A flexible, 3- or 4-core copper cable with a core cross-section of 0.75 mm2
Wire the coupler plug in accordance with the pinout table below. The pinout of
sockets X1 to X4/X8, which are used for the outputs on the ET 200X, is shown in
Section 7.4 ff.
Table 4-8 Pinout of the coupler plug for digital outputs
Pin Assignment View of coupler plug
(wiring side)
1–
2* Output signal 2
3Chassis ground, load voltage 135
4Output signal 4
5 PE
* Only relevant if socket has 2 assigned channels
Wiring
4-26 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Wiring of M12 coupler plug for digital inputs (DESINA/ECOFAST)
To connect the digital inputs, you require:
A 5-pin, M12 coupler plug, possibly integrally molded
A flexible 4- or 5-core copper cable with a core cross-section of 0.75 mm2
Wire the coupler plug in accordance with the pinout table below. You can find the
pinout of sockets X1 to X8 which are used for the outputs on the
ET 200X-DESINA/ET 200X-ECOFAST as of Section 7.5.
Connecting digital outputs (DESINA):
Your parameter settings are as follows:
Channel type (pin 4): digital output
Input functionality (pin 2): diagnostic input
Table 4-9 Pinout of the coupler plug for digital outputs (DESINA)
Pin Assignment for digital
output (DESINA) View of coupler plug
(wiring side)
124 V power supply for
diagnostics input* Digital output (DE-
SINA)
2Diagnostic input SINA)
3Chassis ground, load
supply 1
2
35
4Output signal to
DESINA actuator 4
5not assigned
* Made available by the ET 200X-DESINA for the diagnostics input
Wiring
4-27
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Connecting digital outputs (standard):
Your parameter settings are as follows:
Channel type (pin 4): digital output
Input functionality (pin 2): diagnostic input
Table 4-10 Pinout of the coupler plug for digital outputs (standard)
Pin Assignment for digital
output (standard) View of coupler plug
(wiring side)
124 V power supply for
diagnostics input*
2Diagnostic input Digital output
2
3Chassis ground, load
supply
(standard)
1
2
35
4Output signal to
actuator
4
5not assigned Diagnostics
input
* Made available by the ET 200X-DESINA/ET 200X-ECOFAST for the diagnostic input
Y connector
The Y connector permits double wiring of actuators and sensors at the inputs or
outputs of the ET 200X.
It is advisable to use the Y connector if each socket of a module has two assigned
channels. The Y connector divides the two channels between two coupler plugs
(see Tables 4-11 and 4-12 for pinout).
Note: You cannot use the Y connector in conjunction with the M12, 5-pin angular
coupler plug.
Ó
Ó
Ó
Ó
Ó
Ó
ÓÓ
ÓÓ
Screw to ET 200X
Inputs or outputs
connected via M12
coupler plugs
A (top)
B (bottom)
Figure 4-15 Y connector
Note
The Y connector cannot be used on the expansion modules EM 141 DI
8 x DC 24V (long type of construction) and EM 142 DO 8 x DC 24V/1.2A.
Wiring
4-28 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Wiring of coupler plugs (DI) for Y connector
To connect the digital inputs using a Y connector, you require:
A Y connector and 2 M12 coupler plugs
A flexible, 3- or 4-core copper cable with a core cross-section of 0.75 mm2
Wire the two M12 coupler plugs for the Y connector in accordance with the pinout
table below. The assignment of pin 4 depends on the socket of the ET 200X to
which you screw the Y connector.
Table 4-11 Pinout of the coupler plugs for digital inputs when a Y connector is used
Pin Coupler plug assignment ... View of
A (top) B (bottom) Y connector
124 V power supply for sensor*
2– – A
(top)
4
3Chassis ground, power supply
(t
op
)
13 5
4 Input signal on
socket X1: channel 0
socket X2: channel 1
socket X3: channel 2
socket X4: channel 3
Input signal on
so. X1: channel 4/1**
so. X2: channel 5/–**
so. X3: channel 6/3**
so. X4: channel 7/–** B
2
1
2
3
4
5
5 PE (bottom)
4
* Made available by the ET 200X for the connected sensor
** Channel specified after the ”/” valid if the BM/EM has four channels
Wiring
4-29
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Wiring of coupler plugs (DO) for Y connector
To connect the digital outputs using a Y connector, you require:
A Y connector
Two M12 coupler plugs
A flexible, 3- or 4-core copper cable with a core cross-section of 0.75 mm2
Wire the two M12 coupler plugs for the Y connector in accordance with the pinout
table below. The assignment of pin 4 depends on the socket of the ET 200X to
which you screw the Y connector.
Table 4-12 Pinout of the coupler plugs for digital outputs when a Y connector is used
Pin Coupler plug assignment ... View of
A (top) B (bottom) Y connector
1–
A
2– – A
(top)
4
3Chassis ground, load voltage
(top)
13 5
4Output signal on
socket X1: channel 0
socket X2: channel 1
socket X3: channel 2
socket X4: channel 3
Output signal on
socket X1: channel 1
socket X2: –
socket X3: channel 3
socket X4: –B
2
1
2
3
4
5
5 PE (bottom)
Pinout of the sockets for inputs/outputs
The pinout of the sockets for inputs/outputs is shown together with the data for the
individual modules in Section 7.1 ff.
Wiring the M12 coupler plug for analog inputs and outputs
To connect the analog inputs and analog outputs, you require:
A 4- or 5-pin, M12 coupler plug
A shielded 4-core copper cable with a core cross-section of 0.75 mm2
Wire the coupler plug in accordance with the pinout of the sockets on the
expansion module. You will find the pinout in the information on the various
modules as of Section 7.21.9. You may have to connect the expansion module to
the protective ground (see Section 4.4.6).
Wiring
4-30 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
4.4.5 Connecting the protective ground to the basic module
Protective ground connection
You must connect the protective ground to the basic module. A grounding screw is
provided on the basic module for this purpose.
Minimum cross-section from the conductor to the protective ground: 4 mm2.
The connection to the protective ground is also required to divert the interference
currents and for EMC resistance. To improve the EMC performance, it is advisable
to select the largest possible cross-section for the wire to the protective ground
(e.g. copper braided cable).
Note
Make sure that the protective ground connection always has a low impedance.
Figure 4-16 shows how the protective ground connects to the BM 141, BM 142
and BM 147/CPU basic modules. The fixing screw M5 is enclosed with the basic
module as standard.
Figure 4-16 Connecting the protective ground to the BM 141, 142 and 147/CPU basic
modules
Wiring
4-31
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Figure 4-17 shows how the basic modules BM 143-DESINA FO,
BM 143-DESINA RS485, and BM 141 DI 8DC 24V ECOFAST must be
connected to protective ground.
Wire t o
protective ground
Grounding screw
Figure 4-17 Connecting the basic modules BM 143-DESINA FO, BM 143-DESINA RS485,
and BM 141 DI 8DC 24V ECOFAST to protective ground
EMC
You will find additional notes on EMC installation and wiring in the manual for the
DP master you are using or for the host system.
Wiring
4-32 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
4.4.6 Connecting a protective ground to expansion modules with
analog inputs and outputs
Grounding expansion modules with AI/IO
To ensure the ET 200X remains operative even when subject to interference
(especially RF coupling in accordance with ENV 50141), you must ground every
expansion module with analog inputs or outputs separately.
Connection to protective ground
You must connect the protective ground to the expansion module. A grounding
screw is provided on the expansion module for this purpose. You either connect
the protective ground to the PE screw of the basic module (see Section 4.4.5) or
directly to protective ground. Minimum cross-section from the conductor to the
protective ground: 4 mm2.
Note
Make sure that the protective ground has a low impedance (Figure 4-18).
Figure4-18 shows you how to connect the protective earth to the analog module.
The M5 fixing screw is attached to the analog module such that it cannot get lost.
Figure 4-18 Connecting the protective ground to the analog module
EMC
You will find additional notes on EMC installation and wiring in the manual for the
DP master you are using or for the host system.
Wiring
4-33
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
4.4.7 Plugging the connectors into the ET 200X
Requirements for plugging in connectors
You must have wired the cables to the connectors. In addition, you must have set
the PROFIBUS address (in accordance with your configuration) and if necessary
connected the terminating resistance.
Plugging connectors into the ET 200X
Proceed as follows after you have completed the wiring:
1. Press two fixing screws into each connector and plug the connectors into the
plate.
2. Plug the plate with the two connectors and the connector for the load voltage
into the basic module. Note the mechanical polarization of the connector plate.
Note: You must always plug all three connectors into the basic module
irrespective of whether or not they are wired in order to ensure that the degree
of protection (IP 65, IP 66 or IP 67) is achieved. An alternative is to close
unused connectors with covers.
3. Screw the connectors tightly onto the basic module with a torque of
max. 0.8 Nm.
4. Plug all the other connectors into the appropriate sockets on the front of the
basic module/expansion modules.
!Caution
The connector for the load voltage, the coupler plugs and the Y connectors must
not be removed from the sockets for the inputs/outputs while the ET 200X is
operating, nor must the power connectors be removed from the motor starters or
frequency converters.
You should therefore always either disconnect the ET 200X from PROFIBUS-DP
(by removing the PROFIBUS-DP connector) or switch off the supply voltage to the
electronics/sensors, the load voltage and the load before you remove the above
connectors!
Wiring
4-34 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Installing the connector on the ET 200X-DESINA/ET 200X-ECOFAST
Proceed as follows after you have completed the wiring of the sensors and
actuators:
1. Push up the latch for the DESINA connectors on the basic module.
2. Plug the DESINA connectors (non-switched and switched load voltages and
PROFIBUS-DP via fiber-optic or copper cables) into the sockets on the basic
module. Note the mechanical coding of the connectors for feed and
loop-through.
Note: You must always plug both DESINA connectors into the basic module in
order to ensure that the degree of protection (IP 65, IP 66, or IP 67) is
achieved. Fit a cover if a DESINA socket remains unused. You can find the
order numbers for the covers in Appendix A.
3. Push down the latch for the DESINA connectors.
DESINA
connector
Latch
2
1
3
Figure 4-19 Plugging connectors into the ET 200X-DESINA/ET 200X-ECOFAST
4. Plug all the other connectors into the appropriate sockets on the front of the
basic module/expansion modules.
Wiring
4-35
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
!Caution
Do not unplug the DESINA connectors or the coupler plugs for the inputs/outputs
or the power connector for the motor starters or frequency converters while the
ET 200X-DESINA/ET 200X-ECOFAST is operating, or the modules may be
damaged or possibly even destroyed.
Always switch off the non-switched and switched load voltages and loads before
unplugging the connectors.
Installing connectors on analog modules
Note
You must push the M12 coupler plug securely into the analog socket (against the
resistance of the shield plate) so that the thread of the coupler plug is engaged.
When doing this, watch the mechanical coding on the connector.
Installing connectors on power modules
Install the connector with the two short screws on the power module. The short
screws are enclosed with the power module as standard.
Covering up unused sockets
You must seal off any sockets which are not required with M12 screw caps in order
to ensure the degree of protection (IP 65, IP 66 or IP 67) is maintained. You can
find the order numbers for the M12 screw caps in Appendix A.
Wiring
4-36 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Wired ET 200X
The diagram below shows a wired ET 200X. (The power connectors for the load
supply voltage and the load on the motor starter are not featured here.)
Figure 4-20 Wired ET 200X
4.4.8 Wiring the SITOP power power supply and adapting It to
deployment conditions
Only very little wiring work is required to integrate the SITOP power 24V/10A
power supply into the ET 200X. The output voltage can either be used as supply
voltage for electronics/sensors and/or load voltage. The power supply response in
the event of a fault can be parameterized.
Wiring
4-37
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Wiring
!Warning
Before starting the installation work, the main switch on the system is to be
switched off and secured to prevent it from being turned on again. If this point is
not observed, death or severe physical injury may be caused through touching live
components.
Proceed as follows to wire the SITOP power:
1. The connections for the incoming voltage are accessible once the terminal
cover has been removed. Undo the four screws to gain access .
!Caution
Only qualified personnel may open the device. They must know how to handle
electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD).
Terminal cover
Figure 4-21 Removing the terminal cover
2. Take off the terminal cover. When doing this, make sure that the seal is not
damaged.
3. Feed the power cable through the M16 cable gland. The outside diameter of the
mains power supply cable must be between 4 mm and 10 mm and be suitable
for special operating conditions (environmental influences).
4. Connect the mains power supply cable to supply terminals L1, N and PE .
Conductor cross-sections between 0.5 mm2 and 2.5 mm2 can be clamped.
Wiring
4-38 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Note
The screw-type terminals can be plugged in as a unit.
AC 120V
120/230 VAC
50/60Hz
L+ M
OUTPUT
AD-
JUST
INPUT
24 VDC / 10A
22.8...25.2
VDC
N L1
L+ M
LINK
AC INPUT
R306
Figure 4-22 Connecting the mains power supply cable
Note
When installing the SITOP power 24V/10A power supply, the relevant DIN/VDE
regulations or the regulations specific to the country are to be observed.
The supply voltage (120/230 VAC) must be in accordance with VDE 0100 and
VDE 0160. A protective device (fuse) and disconnecting device to isolate the
power supply must be provided.
Operation on 120 VAC
When operating on a 120 VAC power supply, a bridge must be wired between the
two ”AC 120V LINK” terminals. The bridge must have the same cross-section and
insulation as the mains power supply cable. The length must not exceed 100 mm.
!Warning
Even the optional bridge carries dangerous electrical voltage!
5. Install the M16 cable gland(s).
Wiring
4-39
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
6. If required, make the following settings:
Setting the output voltage
The output voltage can be set in the range from 22.8 V to 25.2 V using
potentiometer R306.
AC 120V
AC 120/230V
50/60Hz
L+ M
OUTPUT
AD-
JUST
INPUT
24 VDC / 10A
22.8...25.2
VDC
N L1
L+ M
LINK
R306
Figure 4-23 Potentiometer R306 for setting the output voltage
!Warning
Potentiometer R306 may only be operated with an insulated screwdriver in
accordance with DIN 7437, because components carrying dangerous electrical
voltage may be touched unintentionally.
Wiring
4-40 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Switching the output voltage to the bus segment of the ET 200X
The top section of the SITOP power must be removed to make the following
settings.
!Warning
The top section may only be removed when the mains voltage has been switched
off and measures put in place to ensure that it cannot be turned on again.
Undo the six screws and remove the top section. When doing this, make sure
that the seal is not damaged.
Figure 4-24 Removing the top section
The output voltage can be switched on the underside of the top section by
rearranging adapter plate A1 on the various bus segments of the ET 200X. For
this, the combinations listed in Table 4-13 are possible. In the case of adapter
position IV, basic insulation is provided between the bus segments and the output
terminals (for an insulation rating voltage of 400 VAC).
The reference potential of the supply voltage for electronics/sensor 1L+ and load
voltage supply 2L+ are not floating.
Wiring
4-41
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Table 4-13 Switching the output voltage to the bus segment of the ET 200X
Position of
adapter plate
A1
Supply
voltage for
electronics/
sensor 1L+
Load
voltage
supply 2L+
Output
terminals
I x –x
II x x x
III –xx”As delivered”
condition
IV ––x
x: Voltage present
–: No voltage present
Adapter plate
A1 in position I Adapter plate
A1 in position II Adapter plate
A1 in position III
(”As delivered”
condition)
Adapter plate
A1 in position IV
STORE RESTART
R230 8A
10 A
Figure 4-25 Positions of adapter plate A1
Wiring
4-42 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Switching over the short circuit response
The SITOP power response in the event of a short circuit on the output side can be
switched over using potentiometer R230.
Table 4-14 Switching over the short circuit response
Position of potentiometers R230 Response in the event of a
short circuit
Right-hand stop ”RESTART”Automatic attempts to start up ”As delivered”
condition
Left-hand stop ”STORE”Stored shutdown.
RESET by switching off the
mains voltage for at least
5 minutes.
STORE RESTART
R230
STORE RESTART
R230 8 A
10 A
Figure 4-26 Position of the R230 potentiometer
Wiring
4-43
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Switching over the power supply
Output current limitation can be changed by rearranging adapter plate A2.
Note
Switching over to 10 A is only permissible at ambient temperature < 40 C.
Table 4-15 Switching over current limiting
Position of adapter plate A2 Application of current limiting
at approx.
8 A 9.5 A ”As delivered”
condition
10 A 11 A
Adapter plate A2 in
position 8 A
(”As delivered” condition)
Adapter plate A2 in
position 10 A
STORE RESTART
R230 8 A
10 A
RESTART
R230 8A
10A
RESTART
R230 8A
10A
Figure 4-27 Positions of the adapter plate A2
7. Refit the top section and the terminal cover and screw down both units
securely.
Note
In order to ensure that IP 65 degree of protection is maintained, once the wiring
and setting is complete, all M16 cable glands and covers must be screwed
together correctly.
Tightening torque
For casing screws: 0.5 Nm
For M16 cable glands: tighten the cap nut until the rubber seal lies
on the cable. Then tighten for a further 1/2 turn.
Configuration Options
2-18 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
5-1
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Commissioning and Diagnostics
Contents of Chapter
Section Subject Page
5.1 Configuring ET 200X-DESINA 5-2
5.2 Commissioning and starting up the DP slave 5-7
5.3 Diagnostics using LEDs 5-13
5.4 Parameterizable diagnostic messages 5-20
5.5 Evaluating ET 200X interrupts 5-24
5.6 ET 200X diagnostics with STEP 7 and STEP 5 5-27
5
Commissioning and Diagnostics
5-2 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
5.1 Configuring ET 200X-DESINA
Introduction
An ET 200X-DESINA channel assumes the functionality determined by the
settings sent to it on parameterization.
The possibilities are:
Digital input
Digital output
Diagnostic input
Diagnostics input with diagnostics frame
Input with NC function
Parameterization for the functional input (Pin 2) is displayed and analyzed in
accordance with Table5-1.
Table 5-1 Display and analysis of the parameters for the DESINA functional input
Pin 2 is ”1” (+24 V)
Process image is always ”0”LEDs Analysis
Diagnostics input (default) Redoff Process image
Diagnostics input with diagnostics
frame Redoff Process image and
SFC 13, for example
(see Section 5.6.1)
Input with NC function Yellowon Process image
Pin 2 is ”0”
Process image is always ”1”LEDs Analysis
Diagnostics input (default) Redon Process image
Diagnostics input with diagnostics
frame Redon Process image and
SFC 13, for example
(see Section 5.6.1)
Input with NC function Yellowoff Process image
pin 4
pin 2
Commissioning and Diagnostics
5-3
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Configuration
2 bytes for inputs and 2 bytes for outputs are reserved for data transfer in the
process image (PI). In the process image the input and output ranges must not be
at the same address.
Figure 5-1 shows the arrangement of the digital inputs and outputs on the
BM 143-DESINA and EM 143-DESINA in relation to the bits of the inputs and
outputs in the PI.
76543210 Bit
SF
RUN
DC 24 V-NS
DC 24 V-S
X01 X02
X1 X2
X5 X6
X3 X4
X7 X8
Figure 5-1 Correlation of DIs/DOs on BM 143-DESINA/EM 143-DESINA with bits of
inputs/outputs in the PI
Commissioning and Diagnostics
5-4 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Signals (user data) and diagnostics data are mutually independent. The
diagnostics input merely shows the state of the sensor or actuator; there is no
defined effect on the signal. The necessary or desired reaction can only be derived
from the application.
The examples below illustrate the relationship between the individual signals and
the diagnostic inputs.
Bit assignment of the inputs
In the PI, inputs are assigned as shown in Figure 5-2.
76543210 Bit
Byte 0 ND7 ND6 ND5 ND4 ND3 ND2 ND1 ND0
Byte 1 FI7 FI6 FI5 FI4 FI3 FI2 FI1 FI0
ND0 ... ND7: Signal (user datum, digital)
channel 0 to channel 7
FI0 ... FI7: Functional input (diagnostics datum)
channel 0 to channel 7
Each functional input can be parameterized
–as a diagnostics input or
–as an input with NC function.
Default: diagnostic input
Figure 5-2 Assignment of the inputs in the process image (PI)
Bit assignment of the outputs
In the PI, outputs are assigned as shown in Figure 5-3.
76543210 Bit
Byte 0 ND7 ND6 ND5 ND4 ND3 ND2 ND1 ND0
Byte 1 0
ND0 ... ND7: Signal (user datum, digital)
channel 0 to channel 7
Byte 1 is not used (= 0)
0000000
Figure 5-3 Assignment of the outputs in the process image (PI)
Commissioning and Diagnostics
5-5
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Examples of assignment
1. The 8 channels of a BM 143-DESINA are to be parameterized as 5DIs +
3DOs. The functional inputs are parameterized as diagnostics inputs.
Channel
7Channel
6Channel
5Channel
4channel
3Channel
2Channel
1Channel
0
DI DI DO DI DO DI DO DI
The input/output assignment in the process image is thus:
76 54 3210 Bit
Byte 0 ND7 ND6 0 ND4 ND2 ND0
Byte 1 FI7
(D) FI6
(D) FI5
(D) FI4
(D) FI3
(D) FI2
(D) FI1
(D) FI0
(D)
PII:
00
Byte 0 ND5 ND3 ND1
Byte 1
PIO:
000000
000
0
0
0
0
FEn (D): Diagnostics input n
The arrows indicate the permanent relationship between signal and diagnostics
input.
The following applies in the example:
Diagnosis for channel 0 (DI) is in bit 0 of byte 1 of the PII
Diagnosis for channel 1 (DO) is in bit 1 of byte 1 of the PII
Diagnosis for channel 2 (DI) is in bit 2 of byte 1 of the PII
.
.
.
This assignment has to be taken into account when the application is programmed.
Commissioning and Diagnostics
5-6 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
2. The 8 channels of a EM 143-DESINA are to be parameterized as 5DIs +
3DOs. Of these, two DIs should have NC functionality. The remaining six
functional inputs are parameterized as diagnostics inputs.
Channel
7Channel
6Channel
5Channel
4channel
3Channel
2Channel
1Channel
0
DI
(NC
contact)
DI DI
(NC
contact)
DI DI DO DO DO
The input/output assignment in the process image is thus:
76 54 3210 Bit
Byte 0 ND7 ND6 ND4 ND3
Byte 1 FI7
(NC) FI6
(D) FI5
(NC) FI4
(D) FI3
(D) FI2
(D) FI1
(D) FI0
(D)
PII:
Byte 0 ND0ND1
Byte 1
PIO:
000000
00
0
0
0
FEn (D): Diagnostics input n
FEn (Ö): Input with NC functionality
ND5 000
ND200
The arrows indicate the permanent relationship between signal and diagnostics
input. This assignment has to be taken into account when the application is
programmed.
Commissioning and Diagnostics
5-7
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
5.2 Commissioning and starting up the DP slave
Software requirements
Table 5-2 Software requirements for commissioning an ET 200X (except DESINA)
Project software
used Version Explanations
STEP 7 Version 3.1 The type file of the DP slave is integrated in
STEP 7.
Version 3.1 Included in STEP 7 or new modules to be
embedded with OM or type file
COM PROFIBUS Version 2.1 You have embedded the type file of the DP slave in
COM PROFIBUS.
Configuration
software for a
different DP master
being used
You require the device master file and the contents
of the configuration frame and parameter
assignment frame for the DP slave (refer to
Appendix B and the configuration and parameter
assignment frame for ET 200X at
http://www.ad.siemens.de/simatic-cs).
Commissioning and Diagnostics
5-8 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Table 5-3 Software requirements for commissioning an ET 200X-DESINA
Project software
used Version Explanations
ET 200X with BM 143-DESINA FO
STEP 7 Version 5.0
and Service
Pack 3
You have embedded the device master file of the
DP slave in STEP 7 or
You use HWCONFIG. As of Service Pack 3, the ET
200X-DESINA with fiber-optic cable is included in
the hardware catalog.
ET 200X with BM 143-DESINA RS485/
BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST
STEP 7 Version 5.1
and Service
Pack 2
You have embedded the device master file of the
DP slave in STEP 7 or
You use HWCONFIG. As of Service Pack 2, the ET
200X with RS 485 is included in the hardware
catalog.
ET 200X with BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG
STEP 7 Version 5.1
and Service
Pack 4
You have embedded the device master file of the
DP slave in STEP 7 or
You use HWCONFIG. As of Service Pack 4, the ET
200X with RS 485 is included in the hardware
catalog.
COM PROFIBUS Version 2.1 You have embedded the device master file of the
DP slave in COM PROFIBUS (refer to Appendix B).
Configuration
software for a
different DP master
being used
You require the device master file and the contents
of the configuration frame and parameter
assignment frame for the DP slave (refer to
Appendix B and configuration and parameter
assignment frame for ET 200X at
http://www.ad.siemens.de/simatic-cs).
Commissioning and Diagnostics
5-9
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Device master file
You can download the DDB file
From the Internet at http://www.ad.siemens.de/csi_e/gsd
Integrating the DDB file in the configuration software
The following table 5-4 tells you how to integrate the type file in SIMATIC S7 or
SIMATIC S5 (COM PROFIBUS).
Table 5-4 Integrating the DDB file in the configuration software
Step STEP 7, as of V3.1 COM PROFIBUS, as of V2.11
1Start STEP 7 and in HWCONFIG call
the Options " Install New GSD
menu command.
Copy the DDB file from the ET 200X to
the COM PROFIBUS directory:
...CPBV..\GSD (default)
Copy the bitmap file to the directory:
...CPBV..\BITMAPS
2Select the DBB file you want to install
from the following dialog box and
confirm with OK.
Result: The ET 200X is displayed in
the hard-
ware catalog in the PROFIBUS-DP
directory.
Start COM PROFIBUS, and choose the
File " Read GSD File menu command.
Result: The ET 200X is displayed in the
hardware catalog at slave configuration.
3Configure the ET 200X with STEP 7
(see the integrated help system in
STEP 7).
Configure the ET 200X with
COM PROFIBUS (see the integrated help
system in COM PROFIBUS).
1If you are using a different configuration software package, refer to its software
documentation
Commissioning and Diagnostics
5-10 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Function: Direct communication between basic modules
In STEP 7 V5.0 and later, you can configure direct communication for PROFIBUS
nodes. The following basic modules can participate in direct communication as the
sender (publisher):
BM 141 DI 8DC 24V, 6ES7 141-1BF01-0XB0, from product version 08
6ES7 141-1BF11-0XB0, from product version 01
6ES7 141-1BF12-0XB0, from product version 01
BM 141 DI 8DC 24V
ECOFAST, 6ES7 141-1BF00-0AB0, from product version 01
6ES7 141-1BF01-0AB0, from product version 01
BM 141 DI 8DC 24V 6ES7 141-1BF40-0AB0, from product version 01
ECOFAST DIAG,
BM 142 DO 4DC 24V/2A, 6ES7 142-1BD11-0XB0, from product version 08
6ES7 142-1BD21-0XB0, from product version 01
6ES7 142-1BD22-0XB0, from product version 01
BM 143-DESINA FO, 6ES7 143-1BF00-0XB0, from product version 01
BM 143-DESINA RS485, 6ES7 143-1BF00-0AB0, from product version 01
You will find a detailed description of direct communication in the STEP 7 Online
Help.
Requirements for commissioning
Table 5-5 Requirements for commissioning the DP slave
Presumed activity See ...
1. DP slave installed Section 3.1
2. PROFIBUS address set on DP slave Section 3.3
3. If the bus signals are transferred using copper conductors
and the DP slave is at the end of the segment, the
terminating resistor must be activated on the DP slave:
–In the case of the BM 141, BM 142 and BM 147/CPU by
bringing it into the circuit
–In the case of the BM 141-ECOFAST and
BM 143-DESINA RS485 by mounting the terminating
resistor on the right-hand DESINA connector
Section 3.4
4. DP slave wired Section 4.4
5. DP slave configured Online Help/configuration
software manual
6. Supply voltage turned on for DP master Manual for DP master
7. DP master set to RUN mode Manual for DP master
Commissioning and Diagnostics
5-11
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Commissioning the DP slave
Table 5-6 Order of steps for commissioning the DP slave
Step Procedure
1. Turn on the supply voltage to the DP slave.
2. Turn on the supply voltage to the load as necessary.
Starting up the ET 200X
The ”BF” LED goes out; inputs
and outputs are enabled;
Data transfer between the
ET 200X and the DP master is
possible.
Supply voltage to the
ET 200X electronics/sensors
Supply voltage to the
ET 200X electronics/sensors
Yes
No
ET 200X sets outputs to ”0”
and applies set PROFIBUS ad-
dress
ET 200X receives configuration
data from DP master
Does configuration
data agree with real in-
stallation?
Match configuration data to
configuration or vice versa
The ”ON” and ”BF” LEDs
come on
SF red
BF flashing red
Figure 5-4 Start-up of the ET 200X
Commissioning and Diagnostics
5-12 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Starting up the ET 200X-DESINA
”RUN” LED comes on. Inputs
and outputs enabled; data trans-
fer possible between the ET
200X-DESINA and DP master.
Switch off non-switched
load voltage for
ET 200X-DESINA
Switch on non-switched load
voltage for ET 200X-DESINA
Yes
No
ET 200X-DESINA sets out-
puts to ”0” and applies set
PROFIBUS address
ET 200X-DESINA receives
configuration data from DP
master
Does configuration
data agree with real in-
stallation?
Match configuration data to
configuration or vice versa
”DC 24V-NS” LED comes on
SF red
RUN flashing green
Figure 5-5 Start-up of the ET 200X-DESINA
Commissioning and Diagnostics
5-13
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
5.3 Diagnostics using LEDs
All the basic and some of the ET 200X expansion modules have LEDs for
displaying the status and errors.
5.3.1 LEDs on BM 141 and BM 142 basic modules
Table 5-7 Status and error display by means of LEDs on the BM 141 and BM 142 basic modules
SF (system fault): red
BF (bus fault): red
ON (supply voltage): green
24 VDC (load supply voltage): green
LEDs Meaning Action
SF BF ON
Off Off Off There is either no supply voltage to
the electronics/sensors on the DP
slave or it is too low.
Turn on the supply voltage to the
DP slave.
A hardware fault has occurred. Replace the basic module.
* * On Supply voltage is applied to the DP
slave. –
*On On The DP slave is starting up. –
The connection to the DP master
has failed.
The DP slave does not detect a
baud rate.
Check the PROFIBUS-DP
connection.
Check the DP master.
Bus interrupt
The DP master is not operating
Check all the cables in your
PROFIBUS-DP network.
Check whether the cable
connectors for PROFIBUS-DP are
firmly attached to the basic module.
On Off On Diagnostic message has been
issued.
The PROFIBUS address set on the
DP slave is not allowed.
A DP slave hardware fault has
occurred.
Evaluate the diagnosis.
Change the PROFIBUS address
set on the basic module.
Check whether the modules are
securely connected together.
On Flash. On The configuration data sent by the
DP master to the DP slave does not
agree with the configuration of the
DP slave.
Check the configuration of the DP
slave (input/output, PROFIBUS
address).
Commissioning and Diagnostics
5-14 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Table 5-7 Status and error displays by means of LEDs on the basic module, continued
SF (system fault): red
BF (bus fault): red
ON (supply voltage): green
24 VDC (load supply voltage): green
LEDs Meaning Action
SF BF ON
Off Flash. On The DP slave has detected the
baud rate but is not being
addressed by the DP master.
The DP slave has not been
configured.
Check the PROFIBUS address set
in the DP slave or in the
configuration software.
Check the configuration of the DP
slave (station type).
Flash. On On A basic module hardware fault has
occurred. Replace the basic module.
*Not applicable
SF LED
On the BM 141 and BM 142 basic modules, version 06 or later, the red system
fault LED (SF) comes on as soon as a diagnostic event is registered. The SF LED
goes not go out unless all diagnostic events have been acknowledged.
24 VDC LED
The 24 VDC LED is on when the ET 200X is connected to a load power supply.
Commissioning and Diagnostics
5-15
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
5.3.2 LEDs on basic modules
BM 143-DESINA FO,
BM 143-DESINA RS485
BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST
BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG
BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V DIAG
Table 5-8 Status and fault displays using LEDs on the basic modules
SF (system fault): red
RUN (status indicator): green
DC 24 V-NS (non-switched load voltage): green
DC 24 V-S (switched load voltage): green
LEDs Meaning Action
SF RUN DC 24 V-NS DC 24 V-S
On * * * Diagnostic message has
been issued.
The PROFIBUS address set
on the DP slave is not
allowed.
Evaluate the diagnosis.
Change the PROFIBUS
address for the basic module
as set by means of the
configuration connector.
A DP slave hardware fault
has occurred. Check whether the modules
are securely connected
together.
On Flash. On On The configuration data sent
by the DP master to the DP
slave does not agree with
the configuration of the DP
slave.
Check the configuration of
the DP slave (input/output,
PROFIBUS address).
Off Flash. On On PROFIBUS address is
incorrect
Bus interruption at
PROFIBUS-DP
Correct the
PROFIBUS address
Rectify the bus interruption
*Not applicable
RUN LED
The RUN LED lights up when the DP slave is in the process of exchanging data
with the DP master.
DC 24-NS LED
The DC 24V-NS LED is on when the DC 24V-NS non-switched supply voltage is
applied.
Commissioning and Diagnostics
5-16 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
DC 24V-S LED
The DC 24V-S LED is on when the switched DC 24V-S supply voltage is available
along with the DC 24V-NS supply voltage.
BM 143-DESINA FO and BM 143-DESINA RS485 status display
The ET 200X-DESINA has two LEDs per channel (X1 to X8) 2 LEDs for status
indication:
”Yellow” LED (for digital input or output, pin 4)
The LED is yellow when the input or output is active.
LED ”red/yellow” (for pin 2 input functionality, see Table 5-1)
The LED is red when
–the functional input is parameterized as a diagnostics input for DESINA and
–a DESINA fault (status ”0”) is registered for the sensor/actuator.
The LED is yellow when
–the functional input is parameterized as an input with NC function and
–The status of the sensor connected to the input is non-switched (”1”).
Status display of the BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST
In the case of the BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST basic module there is one
LED for each channel (X1 to X8) for status display:
Green LED (for digital input)
The LED is green when the input is active.
Status display of the BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG
In the case of the BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG basic module there
are two LEDs for each channel (X1 to X8) for status display:
Green LED
The LED is green when the input is active.
Red LED
The LED is red if there is a fault on the channel:
–Short circuit of the 24 V sensor power supply
–Digital input wire break
Commissioning and Diagnostics
5-17
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
5.3.3 LEDs on expansion modules (except DESINA)
SF LED (system fault display)
Some ET 200X expansion modules have an ”SF” LED:
EM 142 DO 4 DC 24V/2A expansion module with digital outputs
(6ES7 142-1BD40-0XB0)
PM 148 DO 4 DC 24V/2A power module
All expansion modules with analog inputs
All expansion modules with analog outputs
Parameterizable and non-parameterizable diagnostic messages
There are parameterizable and non-parameterizable diagnostic messages.
Non-parameterizable diagnostic messages are issued without you having to take
any action. You have to set parameterizable diagnostic messages in the
configuration software for them to be issued (refer to Table 5-10 onwards).
SF LED On
The SF LED on the expansion module is turned on as soon as a diagnostic
message is triggered by the expansion module.
Status display
In addition, all the ET 200X modules have a status display for every input and
output. The LEDs are lit when the inputs and outputs are active.
Status display of the EM 141 DI 8 DC 24V DIAG (6ES7 141-1BF40-0AB0)
In the case of the expansion module there are 2 LEDs for each channel (X1 to X8)
for status display:
Green LED
The LED is green when the input is active.
Red LED
The LED is red when there is a fault on the channel:
–Short circuit of the 24 V sensor power supply
–Digital input wire break
Commissioning and Diagnostics
5-18 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Status display of the EM 141 DI 8 DC 24V DIAG (6ES7 141-1BF30-0AB0)
In the case of the expansion module there is 1 LED (with two colors) for each
channel (X1 to X4) for status display:
Green/red LED
The LED is green when the input is active.
The LED is red when there is a fault on the channel:
–Short circuit of the 24 V sensor power supply
–Digital input wire break
24 VDC LED
The power module also has a 24 VDC LED. The 24 VDC LED is on when the
power module is connected to a load-voltage supply.
If no load voltage is available:
the SF LED on the power module is on
the 24 VDC LED on the power module is off
5.3.4 LEDs on EM 143-DESINA expansion modules
Status display
The ET 200X-DESINA has two LEDs per channel (X1 to X8) 2 LEDs for status
indication:
”Yellow” LED (for digital input or output, pin 4)
The LED is yellow when the input or output is active.
Red/yellow LED (for pin 2 input functionality, see Table 5-1)
The LED is red when
–the functional input is parameterized as a diagnostics input for DESINA and
–a DESINA fault (status ”0”) is registered for the sensor/actuator.
The LED is yellow when
–the functional input is parameterized as an input with NC function and
–the status of the sensor connected to the input is non-switched (”1”).
Commissioning and Diagnostics
5-19
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
5.3.5 LED on SITOP power
Table 5-9 Status and error displays by means of LEDs on SITOP power
24 VDC (24 V at output terminals): green
ELECTRONIC/SENSOR 1L+ (supply voltage for electronic components/sensors): green
LOAD 2L+ (load voltage supply): green
TEMP > (temperature rise): red
LEDs Meaning Action
24 VDC ELECTRONIC/
SENSOR 1L+ LOAD 2L+ TEMP >
Off Off Off * No supply voltage
Short circuit at
output1)
Switch on the
mains voltage.
Repair the short
circuit.
Flash. Flash. Flash. * Overload in
RESTART mode
Short circuit at
output 1)
Check the current
consumption and
reduce, if
appropriate, the
number of modules
(see Section 2.7)
Repair the short
circuit.
On * * * 24 V is applied to
the output
terminals.
–
* On On * Associated bus
segment is
supplied with 24 V
–
* * * Flash. Switch off as
maximum
temperature
exceeded
Check
environmental and
load conditions
* Not applicable
1) Depends on parameterized short-circuit response
Commissioning and Diagnostics
5-20 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
5.4 Parameterizable diagnostic messages
You can assign parameters to diagnostic messages for the following modules with
STEP 7 or COM PROFIBUS:
EM 142 DO 4 DC 24V/2A expansion module with digital outputs
(6ES7 142-1BD40-0XB0)
PM 148 DO 4 DC 24V/2A power module
All expansion modules with analog inputs
All expansion modules with analog outputs
Diagnostics messages of the EM 142 DO 4 DC 24V/2A
(6ES7 142-1BD40-0XB0) and the PM 148 DO 4 DC 24V/2A
Table 5-10 Diagnostics messages of the EM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A and
PM 148 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A
Diagnostic message Area affected by
diagnostics Configurable
Configuration or parameter
assignment error Expansion module Not configurable
Wire break Channel Configurable
Short-circuit to M Channel Configurable
Short circuit to L+ Channel Configurable
* The broken wire signal is triggered at a current value of < 6 mA and only if the
corresponding channel has been set.
Commissioning and Diagnostics
5-21
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Diagnostic messages of expansion modules with analog inputs
When a fault is detected, modules with analog inputs supply a signal value of
”7FFFH”, irrespective of parameter assignment.
Table 5-11 Diagnostic messages for modules with AI
Diagnostic message Area affected by
diagnostics Configurable
Configuration or parameter assignment error Expansion module Not configurable
Wire break (only with current inputs and over
the measuring ranges 4 to 20 mA)1Channel Configurable
Upper limit violation Channel Parameterizable2
Lower limit violation Channel Parameterizable2
1The broken wire signal is triggered at a current value of 3.6 mA.
2Perform the setting by activating the ”group diagnosis” parameter in the configuration
software.
Diagnostic messages of expansion modules with analog outputs
Table 5-12 Diagnostic messages for modules with AO
Diagnostic message Area affected by
diagnostics Configurable
Configuration or parameter
assignment error Expansion module Not configurable
Wire break (with current
outputs only)1Channel Parameterizable2
Short-circuit to M (with
voltage outputs only)3Channel Parameterizable2
1In the case of EM 145 AO 2 I (6ES7 145-1GB31-0XB0) the broken wire signal is
triggered at a current value of –2 mA or +2 mA.
2Perform the setting by activating the ”group diagnosis” parameter in the configuration
software.
3In the case of EM-circuit signal is triggered at a voltage value of –750 mV or +750 mV.
Commissioning and Diagnostics
5-22 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Action following diagnostic message in STEP 7
Every diagnostic message results in the following action:
If you have selected the ”enable diagnostic interrupt” parameter, a diagnostic
interrupt is triggered (refer to Section 5.5.1).
A diagnostic interrupt is followed by the diagnostic message being entered in
the diagnostic buffer of the master CPU or – if you are using the BM 147/CPU
on the ET 200X – in the diagnostic buffer of the BM 147/CPU.
The SF LED on the expansion module goes on.
The OB 82 is called. If it is not present, the CPU then switches to STOP mode
(either the master CPU or, if the BM 147/CPU is being used on the ET 200X,
the CPU of the BM 147/CPU).
Action following diagnostic message in COM PROFIBUS
If you have enabled diagnostic interrupts with COM PROFIBUS, diagnostic
interrupts are shown in the device-specific diagnosis of the ET 200X. In
other words, the module that triggered the interrupt and the cause of the interrupt
are entered in the device-specific diagnosis (see Section 5.6.9).
The SF LED on the expansion module goes on.
Commissioning and Diagnostics
5-23
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Causes and action
The following table shows all the diagnostic messages possible for expansion
modules, together with their causes and remedial action.
Table 5-13 Diagnostic messages – causes and remedial action
Diagnostic message Possible cause Remedial action
Configuration/parameter
assignment error You have assigned different
parameters to the module in the
user program (possible in
STEP 7 SFC call).
The new values are not within the
permissible range or are not
consistent.
Assign new parameters to
module
Wire break Resistance of sensor/actuator
wiring too high Use a different sensor/actuator
type or wire differently – for
example, use wires having a
larger cross-section
Interruption of the cable between
the module and the
sensor/actuator
Establish cable connection
Channel not wired (open) Deactivate channel at AI
(by means of ”measurement
type” parameter)
Wire up channel
Short-circuit to M
(error detection only when output
at ”1”)
Output overloaded
Output short-circuited to M
Clear overloading
Clear short-circuit
Short-circuit to L+ Output short-circuited to L+ of
module supply Replace module
Lower limit violation Input value below underrange,
fault possibly caused by:
Sensor connected with
reverse polarity
Incorrect measuring range set Check connections
Assign parameters to other range
Lower limit violation Input value higher than
overrange Assign parameters to other range
Parameters
The parameters you can set and their ranges can be found in the technical data
applicable to expansion modules:
for EM 142 DO 4 DC 24V/2A (6ES7 142-1BD40-0XB0) in Table 7-28
for PM 148 DO 4 DC 24V/2A in Table 7-37
for the expansion modules with analog inputs in Table 7-41
for the expansion modules with analog outputs in Table 7-42
Commissioning and Diagnostics
5-24 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
5.5 Evaluating ET 200X interrupts
With certain faults, interrupts are triggered by the DP slave. Interrupts are
evaluated differently from each other, depending on the DP master being used.
Evaluating interrupts with S7 DP master
Prerequisite: You have configured the ET 200X with STEP 7 as of version 3.1.
When an interrupt occurs, interrupt OBs are processed automatically in the CPU of
the DP master if you have programmed them (refer to the System Software for
S7-300/S7-400, Program Design programming manual).
Evaluating interrupts with a different DP master
If you are operating the ET 200X with a different DP master, the alarms are
simulated within the extended diagnosis of the ET 200X (see Section 5.6.7
onwards). You must continue processing the results of the diagnosis in the
application of the DP master.
Note
In order to be able to evaluate alarms by means of the extended diagnosis with a
different DP-master, take note of the following:
The DP master must be able to save the diagnostic messages; it might store
the diagnostic messages in a ring buffer, for example. If the DP master cannot
store diagnostic messages, only the latest diagnostic message to be received
is stored, for instance.
You have to poll regularly in your user program the corresponding bits in the
extended diagnosis. Take into account the bus transit time with PROFIBUS-DP
so that you can retrieve the bits at least in synchronism with the bus transit
time, for example.
With an IM 308-C as a DP master you cannot use process alarms and cycle
end alarms within the extended diagnosis.
Commissioning and Diagnostics
5-25
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
5.5.1 Module interrupts (STEP 7)
You can assign parameters to diagnostic and hardware interrupts for modules
having analog inputs with STEP 7.
For
modules with analog outputs
EM 142 DO 4 DC 24V/2A (6ES7 142-1BD40-0XB0)
PM 148 DO 4 DC 24V/2A
BM 143-DESINA and EM 143-DESINA
BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG and EM 141 DI 8 DC 24V DIAG
it is possible to configure diagnostic interrupts.
Triggering a diagnostic interrupt
With a coming or going event – for example, wire break fault – the module triggers
a diagnostic interrupt if the ”enable diagnostic interrupt” parameter has been
assigned.
Table 5-14 Events that can trigger diagnostic interrupt
Event EM 142
DO 4
DC 24V/2A
Module
with ana-
log
inputs
Module
with ana-
log
outputs
BM
143-DE-
SINA
BM 141 DI
8 DC 24V
ECOFAST
DIAG
PM 148
DO 4
DC 24V/2A
EM
143-DE-
SINA
EM 141 DI
8 DC 24V
DIAG
Configuration/
parameter
assignment error*
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Wire break Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Short-circuit to M Yes Yes Yes No Yes
Short circuit to L+ Yes No No No No
Lower limit violation No Yes No No No
Upper limit violation No Yes No No No
Rising edge No No No No Yes
Falling edge No No No No Yes
* MAINS OFF/MAINS ON for the ET 200X is required following rectification of the
configuration/parameter-assignment error.
The CPU interrupts the processing of the user program and processes the
diagnostic interrupt block (OB 82). The event that led to the interrupt is entered in
the start information of OB 82.
Commissioning and Diagnostics
5-26 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Triggering a hardware interrupt from modules with analog inputs
You define a work area by assigning parameters to an upper and lower limit value.
If the process signal – for example, the ignition temperature – of a module leaves
this work area, the module triggers a hardware interrupt the ”enable hardware
interrupt upon limit exceeded” parameter has been assigned. The CPU interrupts
the processing of the user program and processes the hardware interrupt block
OB 40.
The channels violating a limit value and the limit value concerned are entered in
the start information of the OB 40 in tag OB40_POINT_ADDR. You will find an
assignment of the bits to local data double word 8 in the figure below.
116 Bit no.
17
3130 29 282726 LD 81
LB 8 LB 9
25 24
Upper limit value exceeded on channel 0
Lower limit value violated on channel 0
Upper limit value exceeded on channel 1
LB 11
0
1
Lower limit value violated on channel 1
11
18202223 1921
Figure 5-6 Start information of OB 40: modules with analog inputs
Triggering of a hardware interrupt in the case of the BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V
ECOFAST DIAG and EM 141 DI 8 DC 24V DIAG
The channel that triggered the hardware interrupt is entered in the start information
of the OB 40 in the variable OB40_POINT_ADDR. You will find an assignment of
the bits to local data double word 8 in the figure below.
116 Bit no.
17
3130 29 282726 LD 8
1
LB 8 LB 9
25 24
Rising edge, channel 0
Falling edge, channel 0
Rising edge, channel 1
LB 11
01
Falling edge, channel 1
11
Falling edge, channel 7
1
1
Rising edge, channel 1
::
::
181920212223
Figure 5-7 Start information of OB 40: BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG and
EM 141 DI 8 DC 24V DIAG
Note
You will find a description of OBs 40 and 82 in the System and Standard Functions
reference manual.
Commissioning and Diagnostics
5-27
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
5.5.2 Module interrupts (COM PROFIBUS)
You can assign parameters to diagnostic and hardware interrupts for modules
having analog inputs with COM PROFIBUS.
For
modules with analog outputs
EM 142 DO 4 DC 24V/2A (6ES7 142-1BD40-0XB0)
PM 148 DO 4 DC 24V/2A
BM 143-DESINA and EM 143-DESINA
BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG
EM 141 DI 8 DC 24V DIAG
it is possible to configure diagnostic interrupts.
The alarms are simulated in the extended diagnosis of the ET 200X (see Section
5.6.9). You can continue processing the interrupt messages in the user program of
the DP master.
5.6 ET 200X diagnostics with STEP 7 and STEP 5
Slave diagnosis
The slave diagnosis behaves in accordance with the IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP
3/1 standard. Depending on the DP master, It can be read using STEP 7 or
STEP 5 for all DP slaves that comply with the standard.
Displaying and structuring the slave diagnostics is described in the following
sections.
BM 141, BM 141-ECOFAST, BM 142 and BM 143-DESINA provide the slave
diagnosis that complies with the Standard. Note the differences in the diagnostic
frame depending on which version and which release you have.
The basic modules provide an extended diagnosis, depending on the DP master
and the parameterization.
Note
The extended diagnosis can only be used in the slave mode that complies with
the Standard (not in S7 slave operation).
Diagnosis as per the Standard and module diagnosis will always be signaled,
even if no alarm is enabled during parameterization of the basic module.
Commissioning and Diagnostics
5-28 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
S7 diagnostics
S7 diagnosis can be requested for all modules in the
SIMATIC S7/M7 range of modules. The structure of the S7 diagnosis is identical
for base unit and distributed modules.
The diagnosis data of a module is in data records 0 and 1 of the system data part
of the module. Data record 0 contains 4 bytes of diagnostic data describing the
current state of a module. Data record 1 contains module diagnostics data in
addition.
Data records 0 and 1 are contained in the slave diagnosis (refer to Section for its
structure 5.6.2).
Commissioning and Diagnostics
5-29
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
5.6.1 Reading out the diagnosis
Options for reading out the diagnosis
Table 5-15 Reading out the diagnosis of ET 200X with STEP 7 and STEP 5
Programmable logic
controller with DP
master
Block or register in
STEP 7 Application See ...
SIMATICS7/M7 ”DP slave diagnosis”
register Display slave diagnostics
as plain text on the
STEP 7 user interface
The section on hardware
diagnostics in the STEP 7
online help system
SFC 13
”DP NRM_DG”Display slave diagnosis
(store in data area of the
user program)
Configuration, see Section
5.6.2;
for the SFC see System
SFC 59 ”RD_REC”Read out data records of
S7 diagnosis (store in
data area of the user
program)
and Standard Functions
reference manual
FB 125/FC 125 Evaluate slave
diagnostics On the Internet at
http://www.ad.siemens.de/
simatic-cs under the
ID 387 257
SFB 52 Read data record from a
DP slave See online help system in
STEP 7
SFB 54 Receive interrupts from
the interrupt OBs
SIMATIC S5 with the
IM 308-C as DP
master
FB192 ”IM308C”Display slave diagnosis
(store in data area of the
user program)
Configuration, see Section
5.6.2;
for the FB see the ET200
SIMATIC S5 with
S5-95U as DP master FB 230 ”S_DIAG”Note: not for enhanced
diagnosis Distributed I/O Device
manual
Commissioning and Diagnostics
5-30 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Example of reading out the slave diagnosis with SFC 13 ”DPNRM_DG”
Here you will find an example of how to use SFC 13 to display the slave diagnosis
for a DP slave in the STEP 7 user program.
Assumptions
The following assumptions apply to this STEP 7 user program:
The diagnosis address of the ET 200X is 1022 (3FEH).
The slave diagnosis should be stored in DB 82: as of address 0.0, length 64
bytes.
The slave diagnosis consists of 64 bytes.
STEP 7 user program
STL Description
CALL SFC 13
REQ :=TRUE
LADDR :=W#16#3FE
RET_VAL :=MW 0
RECORD :=P#DB82.DBX 0.0 BYTE 64
BUSY :=M2.0
Read request
Diagnosis address of the ET 200X
RET_VAL of SFC 13
Data mailbox for the diagnosis in DB 82
Read operation runs over several OB1 cycles
Commissioning and Diagnostics
5-31
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Example of displaying the slave diagnosis with FB 192 ”IM308C”
Here you will find an example of how you use FB 192 to read out the slave
diagnosis for a DP slave in the STEP 5 user program.
Assumptions
The following assumptions apply to this STEP 5 user program:
The IM 308-C is assigned pages 0 to 15 (number 0 of the IM 308-C) as the DP
master.
The DP slave has PROFIBUS address 3.
The slave diagnosis is required to be stored in DB 20. However, you can also
use any other data block for this.
The slave diagnosis consists of 26 bytes.
STEP 5 user program
STL Description
:A DB 30
:JU FB 192
Name :IM308C
DPAD : KH F800
IMST : KY 0, 3
FCT : KC SD
GCGR : KM 0
TYPE : KY 0, 20
STAD : KF +1
LENG : KF –1
ERR : DW 0
Default address area of the IM 308-C
IM No. = 0, PROFIBUS address of DP slave = 3
Function: Read slave diagnosis
Not evaluated
S5 data area: DB 20
Diagnostic data from data word 1
Diagnosis length = joker length (all permissible
bytes)
Error code stored in DW 0 of DB 30
Commissioning and Diagnostics
5-32 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
5.6.2 Structure of the slave diagnosis, ET 200X
Structure of slave diagnosis, ET 200X
Byte 0
Byte 1 Station statuses 1 to 3
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
Byte 5 Low byte
High byte Manufacturer
identification
Byte 6
:
Byte 8
Master PROFIBUS address
. . .
Module diagnosis
Channel-specific diagnosis
(3 bytes per error)
.
.
.
Byte 9 Module
statusByte 15
:
. .
Byte 17
Byte 16
Max. 20 bytes Interrupts
(only 1 interrupt per slave
diagnostic frame)
Enhanced diagnostics
Max. length: 64 bytes
(can be adjusted via parameter in configuration
tool)
Byte 9
Station diagnosis
:
. .. .
Up to
max.
byte 28
*
*
***
*These diagnoses can be enabled or disabled using the DPV1 parameters (DDB file Rev. 3).
If you disable these diagnoses, they are removed
from the diagnostic frame.
** If you disable the interrupts using the DPV1 parameters (DDB file Rev. 3), the additional area
is available for channel-specific diagnoses.
*
Figure 5-8 Structure of the slave diagnosis, ET 200X
Commissioning and Diagnostics
5-33
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Data records of the S7 diagnosis contained in the station diagnosis
Bytes 13 to 16 of the device-specific diagnosis correspond to data record 0 of the
S7 diagnosis. Bytes 13 to 28 of the station diagnosis correspond to data record 1
of the S7 diagnosis. (Data record 1 contains data record 0 in the first 4 bytes.)
Commissioning and Diagnostics
5-34 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
5.6.3 Station statuses 1 to 3
Definition
Station statuses 1 to 3 provide an overview of the status of a DP slave.
Station status 1
Table 5-16 Structure of station status 1 (Byte 0) ET 200X
Bit Meaning Cause/remedy
01: The DP slave cannot be addressed
by the DP master.
The bit in the DP slave is always 0.
Correct PROFIBUS address set on the DP
slave?
Bus connector/fiber-optic cable connected?
Voltage at DP slave?
RS 485 repeater set correctly?
Reset on the DP slave executed (switch
on/off)
11: The DP slave is not yet ready to ex-
change data. Wait while the DP slave starts up.
21: The configuration data sent by the
DP master to the DP slave does not
agree with the configuration of the
DP slave.
Correct station type or correct configuration
of the DP slave entered in the configuration
software?
31: External diagnosis available. Evaluate the module diagnostics, the
module status and/or the channel-specific
diagnostics. Bit 3 is reset as soon as all the
faults have been rectified. The bit is reset
when there is a new diagnostic message in
bytes of the above-mentioned diagnostics.
41: The requested function is not sup-
ported by the DP slave (e.g.
SYNC/FREEZE).
Check the configuration.
51: The bit is always ”0”. Note:
When reading the station status from the DP
master, is the bit at ”1”?
The DP master cannot interpret the response
of the DP slave.
Commissioning and Diagnostics
5-35
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Table 5-16 Structure of station status 1 (Byte 0) ET 200X
Bit Cause/remedyMeaning
61: The DP slave type does not agree
with the software configuration. Compare the desired configuration with the
actual configuration.
71: Parameters have been assigned to
the DP slave by a different DP ma-
ster (not that which currently has
access to the DP slave).
The bit is always ”1” when you are
accessing the DP slave with the
programmer or another DP master, for
example.
The PROFIBUS address of the DP master
which assigned parameters to the DP slave
is located in the ”master PROFIBUS
address” diagnostic byte.
Station status 2
Table 5-17 Structure of station status 2 (Byte 1) ET 200X
Bit Meaning
01: New parameters have to be assigned to the DP slave.
11: A diagnostic message has been issued. The DP slave will not work until
the fault has been corrected (static diagnostic message).
21: The bit is always ”1” in the DP slave.
31: Response monitoring has been enabled for this DP slave.
41: The DP slave has received the ”FREEZE” control command.
51: The DP slave has received the ”SYNC” control command.
60: The bit is always at 0.
71: The bit is always at 0.
Note: When the station status is read by the DP master, the bit is at ”1” if
the DP slave in the DP master has been deactivated.
The DP slave is deactivated – that is, it has been removed from current
processing.
Station Status 3
Table 5-18 Structure of Station Status 3 (Byte 2) ET 200X
Bit Meaning
0 to 6 0: The bits are always at ”0”.
71: There are more channel-specific diagnostic messages than can be
represented in the diagnostic frame.
Commissioning and Diagnostics
5-36 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
5.6.4 Master PROFIBUS address
Definition
The PROFIBUS address of the DP master is stored in diagnostics byte 3: this is
the master
which assigned parameters to the DP slave
which has read and write access to the DP slave
FFH in byte 3
If the value FFH is defined as the master PROFIBUS address in byte 3, the DP
slave has not been parameterized by the DP master.
5.6.5 Manufacturer identification
Definition
A code is stored in the manufacturer ID that describes the type of the DP slave.
Manufacturer identification
Table 5-19 Structure of the manufacturer ID (Byte 4, 5) ET 200X
Byte 4 Byte 5 Manufacturer ID for
80H3DHBM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V
80HD2HBM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V ECOFAST
80HD3HBM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V EDOFAST DIAG
80H3CHBM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A
80H9AHBM 143-DESINA FO
80H9AHBM 143-DESINA RS485
Commissioning and Diagnostics
5-37
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
5.6.6 ID-specific diagnosis
Definition
The ID-specific diagnosis states whether or not the modules of the ET 200X are
defective. The module diagnosis begins as of byte 6 and comprises 3 bytes.
Module diagnosis
The module diagnosis for the ET 200X is structured as follows:
Byte 6 70
Bit no.
Length of the module diagnosis
including byte 6 (= 3 bytes)
Byte 7
Entry for ET 200X
Entry for expansion module 1
Entry for expansion module 2
Entry for expansion module 3
Entry for expansion module 4
Byte 8
Entry for expansion module 5
Entry for expansion module 6
Entry for expansion module 7
Code for module diagnosis
01000011
7654 1
021
3
Entry for I/O section of basic module
Legend for the entry for a module:
Bit is set when
- a module is pulled
- an unconfigured module is inserted
- access to a module is not possible
- a module reports a diagnostic interrupt
Bit no.
Bit no. See legend
Figure 5-9 Structure of ID-specific diagnosis for ET 200X
Commissioning and Diagnostics
5-38 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
5.6.7 Module status
Definition
The module status indicates the status of the configured modules and provides
details of the ID-specific diagnosis in respect of the configuration. The module
status begins after the module diagnosis and comprises 7 bytes.
The module is only contained in the diagnosis frame if you have activated
”extended diagnosis” during parameterization.
Module status
The module status for ET 200X is configured as follows:
Byte 9
Byte 10
Byte 11 70
0H
0H
Byte 12
Status type: Module status
Always ”0”
Always ”0”
Byte 13 7
I/O section of the basic module
6
Byte 14 70
1
Expansion module 1
Expansion module 2
Expansion module 3
Expansion module 4
23456
00B: Module OK;
valid data
01B: Module fault;
invalid data
(module defective)
10B: Incorrect module;
invalid data
11B: no module;
invalid data
70
123456 1
00 11
000
Length of the module status
incl. byte 9 (= 7 bytes)
Code for station diagnosis
70
123456 00 11 0000
2H = Module status
Code for status message
Byte 15 70
1
Expansion module 5
Expansion module 6
Expansion module 7
23456
00
000000
Figure 5-10 Configuration of the module status for ET 200X
Commissioning and Diagnostics
5-39
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
5.6.8 Channel-specific diagnosis
Definition
The channel-specific diagnosis gives information on channel errors of modules and
expands on the module diagnosis. Channel-specific diagnosis begins after the
module status. Channel-specific diagnosis does not affect the module status.
Channel-specific diagnosis
Important: The diagnostic interrupt must be switched on for each module!
The channel-specific diagnosis is only contained in the diagnosis frame if have
activated the ”extended diagnosis” during parameterization.
The maximum number of channel-specific diagnoses is limited by the maximum
overall length of the slave diagnosis of 64 Bytes. The length of the slave diagnosis
is dependent on the number of the channel-specific diagnoses currently present.
If more channel-specific diagnoses are present than can be shown in the slave
diagnosis, bit 7 ”diagnosis overrun” is set in the station status 3.
Tip: If you disable the interrupts for the ET 200M during parameter assignment,
there are still up to 20 additional bytes available in the interrupt section for the
channel-specific diagnosis (see also Figure 5-8).
Commissioning and Diagnostics
5-40 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
7 Bit no.
10
654 132
000001B to 001000B: ID number of the module that delivers the
channel-specific diagnosis. The slot is encrypted. The following
applies: displayed number + 1 slot of the module (3 slot
4; 4 slot 5, etc.).
0
7 Bit no.654 132 0
Byte 17
000000B to 111111B: Number of the channel that delivers the diagnosis
Input/output:
7Bit no.
654 132 0
Byte 18
Error type
Channel type:
as of
byte 16
001B: Bit
010B: 2 Bit
011B: 4 Bit
100B: Byte
101B: W ord
110B: 2 words
00B: DESINA or reserved
01B: input
10B: output
11B: input/output
Bytes 19
to 21 Next channel-specific diagnostic message
(assignment as for bytes 16 to 18)
Max. byte 63
Code for channel-specific diagnosis
. .
To PROFIBUS standard (see Table 5-20)
Figure 5-11 Configuration of channel-specific diagnosis, ET 200X
Commissioning and Diagnostics
5-41
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Channel-specific error messages
Table 5-20 Channel-specific error messages to PROFIBUS standard
Error type Error text Meaning Action
00001B1DShort circuit Short circuit because, for example:
Sensor wiring to P potential short-circuited
Sensor wiring to M potential short-circuited
Output wiring to P potential short-circuited
Output wiring to ground short-circuited
Correct the pro-
cess wiring.
00010B2DUndervol-
tage Main voltage failed or too low Correct
mains voltage
00011B3DOvervoltage Mains voltage too high Correct
mains voltage
Braking power too high Increase ramp-
down time param-
eter on EM 148-FC
00100B4DOverload The output level is overloaded Correct the mod-
ule/actuator match.
00101B5DTempera-
ture rise The output level is overloaded and is too hot Correct the mod-
ule/actuator match.
00110B6DOpen circuit Wire break because, for example:
The signal line to a sensor is interrupted
The signal line from an actuator is interrupted
Power cable of the sensor interrupted
Correct the pro-
cess wiring
00111B7DUpper limit
violation Value is above the overrange. Correct the mod-
ule/actuator match.
01000B8DLower limit
violation Value is below the underrange. Correct the mod-
ule/actuator match.
01001B9DError Internal module fault Exchange the fre-
quency converter
Commissioning and Diagnostics
5-42 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Table 5-21 Channel-specific error messages – manufacturer-specific
Error type Error text Meaning Action
10000B16DParameteriz
ation error Parameter assignment error, for example, because:
The module cannot use the parameter
(unknown, impermissible combination...)
Module is not parameterized.
Correct the
parameter
assignment.
10001B17DLoad
voltage is
missing
The following voltages may be missing:
Load voltage at BM 141/BM 142
Switched load voltage in the case of BM 143
DESINA and BM 141-ECOFAST 8DI
Correct the
process wiring
10110B22DHardware
interrupt lost Hardware interrupt lost Correction,
coordination of
program, process,
module
11000B24DActuator
fault Excess temperature on motor Check mechanical
loading of motor
Thermistor not connected Connect thermistor
or deactivate
thermistor
monitoring, motor
parameter on
EM 148-FC
11010B26DExternal
fault External (process-related) error, for example:
Sensor error
Actuator error
Sensor data is not correct
Break in wire to EM
Replace the
sensor/actuator;
correct the process
wiring.
Commissioning and Diagnostics
5-43
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
5.6.9 Interrupts
Definition
The interrupts section of the slave diagnosis provides information on the type of
interrupt and the cause that triggered the interrupt.
The interrupt section has a maximum of 20 bytes.
A maximum of one interrupt can be used per slave diagnosis.
Position in the diagnostic frame
The position of the interrupt section in the slave diagnosis depends on the
structure of the diagnostic frame and on the number of channel-specific diagnoses
(see also Figure 5-8):
No enhanced diagnosis: always as of byte 9 after the module diagnosis
Enhanced diagnosis: after the channel-specific diagnoses.
For example: if there are 3 channel-specific diagnoses, the interrupt section
begins as of byte 25.
More than one interrupt
Interrupt information in the slave diagnosis is overwritten by the interrupt
information of the next interrupt to be triggered.
Contents
The contents of the interrupt information depend on the type of interrupt:
In the case of diagnostic interrupts, the diagnostic data record 1 for SIMATIC S7
(16 bytes) is sent as interrupt information (as of byte x+4). You can find out what
these bytes mean for digital and analog modules in Figures 5-14 to 5-17.
In the case of hardware interrupts, the additional interrupt information is 4 bytes
long. You can find out what these bytes mean in Figure 5-18.
Commissioning and Diagnostics
5-44 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Alarms
The alarm unit for ET 200X is configured as follows.
Byte x 70
Bit no.
Length of the interrupt section including byte x (= max. 20 bytes)
Code for device-specific diagnosis
00
Byte x+1 70
00
Byte x+2 70
01
70
01
00B: Hardware
interrupt
01B: At least one
fault is present
10B: Going error
11B: Reserved
Byte x+3
0000001B: Diagnostic interrupt
0000010B: Hardware interrupt
Type of interrupt:
04 to 11: Slot of the module that is producing an interrupt
02: BM provides the alarm
6
5
13
6
0
Code for interrupt
”Slot” number
Bytes x+4 to ...
Diagnostic-interrupt data
(contents of data records 0 and 1)
(see Figures 5-14 to 5-17)
.
.
.
Hardware interrupt data
(see Figure 5-18)
... Byte x+19 ... Byte x+7
for
BM 141 (6ES7 141-1BF11-0XB0)
BM 141DI 8 x DC 24V
ECOFAST (6ES7 141-1BF01-0AB0)
BM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V (6ES7 141-1BF40-0AB0)
ECOFAST DIAG
BM 142 (6ES7 142-1BD21-0XB0)
BM 143-DESINA FO (6ES7 143-1BF00-0XB0)
BM 143-DESINA RS485 (6ES7 143-1BF00-0AB0)
00B: for
BM 141 (6ES7 141-1BF01-0XB0)
BM 142 (6ES7 142-1BD11-0XB0)
Figure 5-12 Structure of the ET 200X alarm unit
Commissioning and Diagnostics
5-45
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Diagnostic interrupt of modules with digital inputs
Byte x+4
Module malfunction, i. e. a problem has been detected
0
Byte x+5 0
External error: Module no longer addressable
27
Parameterization error
Internal fault in module
Channel fault in module
Parameters not assigned to module
136
Byte x+8 70
70H: Module with digital inputs
Byte x+9 708H: Length of channel-specific diagnosis
70
08H: Number of channels per module
Byte x+10
0
Byte x+11 70
Diagnostic event on channel 0 of module
Byte x+12 70
Configuration or parameter assignment error
0
Diagnostic event on channel 1 of module
1
Channel 0
Short circuit to M (in the event of an error, bit 2 or Bit 3 is set)
3
Wire break
4
Byte x+19: Assignment for channel 7 as for byte x+12
Byte x+13: Assignment for channel 1 as for byte x+12
1FH: Module class, digital module
4
Bytes x+6 to x+7: Are not used
23
6
Byte x+14: Assignment for channel 2 as for byte x+12
:
2
5
4
56
:
:
51
7
Diagnostic event on channel 7 of module
Diagnostic events for channel 0
0
00
0
0
Figure 5-13 Structure as of byte x+4 for diagnostic interrupt (digital input)
Commissioning and Diagnostics
5-46 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Diagnostic interrupt of modules with digital outputs
Byte x+4
Module malfunction, i. e. a problem has been detected
0
Byte x+5 0
External error: Module no longer addressable
27
Parameterization error
Internal fault in module
Channel fault in module
Parameters not assigned to module
136
Byte x+8 70
72H: Module with digital outputs
Byte x+9 7Length of channel-specific diagnosis
70
Number of channels per module
Byte x+10
0
Byte x+11 70
Diagnostic event on channel 0 of module
Byte x+12 70
Configuration or parameter assignment error
0
Diagnostic event on channel 1 of module
1
Channel 0
Short-circuit to M
3
Wire break
4
Byte x+19: Assignment for channel 7 as for byte x+12
Byte x+13: Assignment for channel 1 as for byte x+12
1FH: Module class, digital module
External auxiliary supply is missing, i. e.:
Load power supply is missing or is too low
4
Bytes x+6 to x+7: Are not used
23
6
Temperature rise
Byte x+14: Assignment for channel 2 as for byte x+12
:
Short circuit to L+
2
5
4
56
:
:
51
7
Diagnostic event on channel 7 of module
Diagnostic events for channel 0
0
00
Figure 5-14 Structure as of byte x+4 for diagnostic interrupt (digital outputs)
Commissioning and Diagnostics
5-47
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Diagnosis alarm from EM 143-DESINA modules
Byte x+4
Module malfunction, i. e. a problem has been detected
0
Byte x+5 0
External error: Module no longer addressable
27
Parameterization error
Internal fault in module
Channel fault in module
Parameters not assigned to module
136
Byte x+8 70
7AH: DESINA module with parameterized I/O channels
Byte x+9 708H: Length of channel-specific diagnosis
70
08H: Number of channels per module
Byte x+10
0
Byte x+11 70
Diagnostic event on channel 0 of module
Byte x+12 7
00 0
Diagnostic event on channel 1 of module
1
Channel 0
3
External fault
(sensor/actuator fault or break in wiring)
4
Byte x+19: Assignment for channel 7 as for byte x+12
Byte x+13: Assignment for channel 1 as for byte x+12
1FH: Module class, digital module
4
Bytes x+6 to x+7: are not used
23
6
Byte x+14: Assignment for channel 2 as for byte x+12
:
2
5
4
56
:
:
51
7
Diagnostic event on channel 7 of module
Diagnostic events for channel 0
0
00000
0
Figure 5-15 Structure from Byte x+4 for diagnosis alarm of EM 143-DESINA modules
In channel-specific diagnostics, a diagnostic interrupt from the EM 143-DESINA
expansion module leads to error type 11010B (see Table 5-20).
Commissioning and Diagnostics
5-48 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Diagnostic interrupt of modules with analog inputs
Byte x+6
70
15H: Module class, analog module
7
Module in STOP mode
70
Error during analog/digital conversion in module
0
2
4
71H: Module with analog inputs
Length of channel-specific diagnosis
Number of channels per module
Byte x+5
Byte x+8
Byte x+9
Byte x+10
Byte x+7
Module malfunction, i. e. a problem has been detected
0
External error: Module no longer addressable
27
Parameterization error
Internal fault in module
Channel fault in module
Parameters not assigned to module
13645
Byte x+4
Coding key incorrect or missing
Byte x+11 70
Diagnostic event on channel 0 of module
Diagnostic event on channel 1 of module
1
23
Diagnostic event on channel 7 of module
4
56
:
:
Byte x+12 700
Configuration or parameter assignment error
0
Short-circuit to M
3
Wire break
4
62
51
Lower limit violation
Upper limit violation
Byte x+19: Assignment for channel 7 as for byte x+12
Byte x+13: Assignment for channel 1 as for byte x+12
:
Diagnostic events for channel 0
0
00
Figure 5-16 Structure as of byte x+4 for diagnostic interrupt (analog inputs)
Commissioning and Diagnostics
5-49
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Diagnostic interrupt of modules with analog outputs
70
7
Module in ST OP mode
Byte x+7: Is not used
0
2
73H: Module with analog outputs
Length of channel-specific diagnosis
Number of channels per module
Bytes x+14 to x+19: Are always 00H
Byte x+13: Assignment for channel 1 as for byte 12
15H: Module class, analog module
Module malfunction, i. e. a problem has been detected
0
External error: Module no longer addressable
27
Parameterization error
Internal fault in module
Channel fault in module
Parameters not assigned to module
13645
Byte x+4
Byte x+5
Byte x+6
Byte x+8
70
Diagnostic event on channel 0 of module
Diagnostic event on channel 1 of module
1
23
Diagnostic event on channel 3 of module
4
56
:
7
0
Configuration or parameter assignment error
0
Short-circuit to M
3
Wire break
462
51
Byte x+11
00
Byte x+9
Byte x+10
Byte x+12 Diagnostic events for channel 0
Byte x+14: Assignment for channel 2 as for byte 12
Byte x+13: Assignment for channel 3 as for byte 12
00
00
Figure 5-17 Configuration as of byte x+4 for diagnostic interrupt (analog outputs)
Commissioning and Diagnostics
5-50 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Hardware interrupt of analog input modules
Byte x+4
Limit value exceeded on channel 0 of module
0
Bytes x+6 to x+7: Are always 00H
17
Limit value exceeded on channel 1 of module
Byte x+5
Limit value violated on channel 0 of module
017
Limit value violated on channel 1 of module
Limit value exceeded on channel 7 of module
:
:
Limit value violated on channel 7 of module
:
:
34625
346251
Figure 5-18 Structure as of byte x+4 for hardware interrupt (analog inputs)
Hardware interrupt of digital input modules
Byte x+4
Rising edge on channel 0 of the module
0
Bytes x+6 to x+7: Are always 00H
17
Rising edge on channel 1 of the module
Byte x+5
Falling edge on channel 0 of the module
017
Falling edge on channel 1 of the module
Rising edge on channel 7 of the module
:
:
Falling edge on channel 7 of the module
:
:
34625
346251
Figure 5-19 Structure as of byte x+4 for hardware interrupt (digital inputs)
Commissioning and Diagnostics
5-51
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Byte x+4 to x+7 (x+10) for diagnosis of ET 200X
If byte x+2 contains the slot number 02, this indicates that a basic module is
generating diagnostic messages. These diagnostic messages are contained in
bytes x+4 to x+7 (x+10).
Table 5-22 gives you the meaning of bytes x+4 to x+7 (x+10) when the following
basic modules are used:
Basic module MLFB
BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V 6ES7 141-1BF11-0XB0
6ES7 141-1BF12-0XB0
BM 141 DI 8 DC 2 ECOFAST 6ES7 141-1BF00-0AB0
6ES7 141-1BF01-0AB0
BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V
ECOFAST DIAG 6ES7 141-1BF40-0AB0
BM 142 DO 4 DC 24V/2A 6ES7 142-1BD21-0XB0
6ES7 142-1BD22-0XB0
BM 143-DESINA FO 6ES7 143-1BF00-0XB0
BM 143-DESINA RS485 6ES7 143-1BF00-0AB0
Table 5-22 Bytes x+4 to x+10 in the diagnosis of ET 200X
Byte Bit Meaning Remarks
0 Error 1:
0: Error
No error
1Internal error Cause of fault is in BM
2External error Cause of fault is in configuration of ET 200X
3Module fault BM cannot access one or more plugged-in
modules
x+4 4Load voltage 1:
0: Error
No error
5not assigned –
6Parameters not assigned to module –
7Parameter assignment 1:
0: Error
No error
x+5 0 to 7 1BHFixed
x+6 0 to 7 not assigned –
x+7 0 to 7 not assigned –
x+8 0 to 7 Module ID 55H for basic module
x+9 0 to 7 08HLength of channel-specific diagnosis
x+10 0 to 7 08HFixed
x+11
to
x+19
0 to 7 not assigned –
Commissioning and Diagnostics
5-52 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Table 5-23 gives you the meaning of bytes x+4 to x+7 (x+10) when the following
basic modules are used:
Basic module MLFB
BM 141 6ES7 141-1BF01-0XB0
BM 142 6ES7 142-1BD11-0XB0
Table 5-23 Bytes x+4 to x+7 in the diagnosis of ET 200X
Byte Bit Meaning Remarks
0Module malfunction
(power supply for sensor/logic too
low or Bits 2 and 4 are set)
1:
0: Error
No error
1not assigned –
2External error Cause of fault is configuration if ET 200X
(EM can no longer be addressed)
3not assigned –
x+4 4No external auxiliary voltage
(no load voltage supply or it is too
low)
1:
0: Error
No error
5not assigned –
6not assigned –
7Parameter assignment 1:
0: Error
No error
x+5 0 to 3 1011 Fixed
(Module class: Basic module)
x+5 4 to 7 not assigned –
x+6 0 to 7 not assigned –
x+7 0 to 7 not assigned –
Commissioning and Diagnostics
5-53
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
5.6.10 Analyzing interrupts from station diagnosis
The structure of the station diagnosis is the same as the structure of the interrupt
section, as described in Section 5.6.9.
Interrupts with S7 DP master
The ET 200X supports the following alarms:
Diagnostic interrupt
Hardware interrupt
You can evaluate these interrupts with an S7 DP master. In the case of an
interrupt, interrupt OBs run automatically in the CPU (see the System Software for
S7-300/S7-400, Program Design programming manual).
Interrupts with another DP master
If you operate the ET 200X with another DP master, these alarms will be simulated
as device-specific diagnosis of the ET 200X. You must postprocess the relevant
diagnostic events in the DP master’s user program.
Commissioning and Diagnostics
5-54 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Saving the diagnosis
Depending on byte x+1, transfer the contents of the station diagnosis to a data
block because:
The interrupts are updated cyclically.
The contents of the diagnosis as of byte x+3 depend on whether the S7
diagnosis or S7 hardware interrupt is reported.
Note
The following points are important in evaluating diagnostic interrupts and hardware
interrupts with a different DP master by means of the station diagnosis:
The DP master should be able to store the diagnostic messages, that is, the
DP master should have a ring buffer in which to place these messages. If the
DP master cannot store diagnostic messages, only the latest diagnostic
message to be received is stored, for instance.
You have to poll regularly in your user program the corresponding bits in the
station diagnosis. You must also take PROFIBUS-DP’s bus cycle time into
consideration so that you can scan the bits at least once in sync with the bus
cycle time, for example.
You cannot use hardware interrupts in the station diagnosis in an IM 308-C as
DP master, because only coming – and not going – interrupts are reported. For
example, the ”upper limit violation” bit is only reset when the ”lower limit
violation” bit is set.
6-1
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
General Technical Specifications
What are general technical specifications?
The general technical specifications contain the standards and test values with
which the ET 200X conforms and which it fulfills, and the test criteria by which the
ET 200X distributed I/O device was tested.
In this Chapter
Section Subject Page
6.1 Standards, certificates and approvals 6-2
6.2 Electromagnetic compatibility 6-4
6.3 Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions 6-6
6.4 Details of insulation testing, safety class, degree of protection and rated
voltage of the ET 200X 6-9
6
General Technical Specifications
6-2 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
6.1 Standards, certificates and approvals
This chapter contains the following information about the components of the
ET 200X:
The most important standards for which the ET 200X satisfies the criteria
The certificates and approvals available for the ET 200X
PROFIBUS standard
The ET 200X distributed I/O device is based on IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1.
Identification code for Australia
The ET 200X distributed I/O device complies with
AS/NZS 2064 (Class A).
IEC 61131
The ET 200X distributed I/O device meets the requirements and criteria of IEC
61131-2, (programmable controllers, part 2 on equipment requirements and tests).
CE certification
The ET 200X distributed I/O device meets the requirements and protection
objectives of the following EC directives and complies with the harmonized
European standards (ENs) that have been published in the Official Gazettes of the
European Community for programmable logic controllers:
73/23/EEC ”Electrical equipment for use within fixed voltage ranges”
(low-voltage directive)
89/336/EEC ”Electromagnetic compatibility” (EMC directive)
The EC declarations of conformity are being kept available for the cognizant
authorities at:
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Bereich Automatisierungs- und Antriebstechnik
A&D AS RD42
Postfach 1963
D-92209 Amberg
UL Recognition
UL Recognition Mark
Underwriters Laboratories (UL) as per
Standard UL 508, File No. 116536
General Technical Specifications
6-3
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
CSA Certification
CSA Certification Mark
Canadian Standard Association (CSA) to
Standard C22.2 No. 142, File No. LR 48323
The SITOP power power supply has cUL certification.
DESINA
The ET 200X-DESINA fulfills the requirements of the DESINA specification.
General Technical Specifications
6-4 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
6.2 Electromagnetic compatibility
Definition
Electromagnetic compatibility is the ability of an electric device to function
satisfactorily in its electromagnetic environment without interfering with this
environment.
The ET 200X distributed I/O device complies with the requirements of the EMC
legislation of the European internal market. A requirement for this is that the ET
200 distributed I/O system meets the specifications and directives concerning
electrical installation.
Bus parameter settings for the PROFIBUS-DP
Note
To maintain the EMC values, you must increase the ”Retry Limit” bus parameter to
at leas ”3” in your configuration software (e.g. COM PROFIBUS or STEP 7) for
transmission rates of 500 kbps and 1.5 Mbps. Leave all the other bus
parameters as they are, in accordance with your selected bus profile.
Pulse-shaped interference
The following table shows the electromagnetic compatibility of the ET 200X
distributed I/O device with regard to pulse-shaped interference.
Pulse-shaped interference Tested with Corresponds to
severity
Electrostatic discharge
to IEC 61000-4-2. 8 kV
4kV 3 (air discharge)
2 (contact
discharge)
Burst pulses (fast transient interference) in ac-
cordance with IEC 61000-4-4. 2 kV (supply line)
1 kV (signal line) 3
2
Surge in accordance with IEC 61000-4-5
Only with lightning protection elements (refer to DP master manual)
Asymmetrical connection 2 kV (supply line)
2 kV (signal line/
data line) 3
Symmetrical connection 1 kV (supply line)
1 kV (signal line/
data line)
General Technical Specifications
6-5
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Sine-shaped interference
The following table shows the electromagnetic compatibility of the ET 200X
distributed I/O device with regard to sine-shaped interference.
RF radiation in accordance with IEC 61000-4-3
Electromagnetic RF field RF coupling in
accordance with
Amplitude-modulated Pulse-modulated IEC 61000-4-6
80 to 1000 MHz 900 MHz 5 MHz 0.15 to 80 MHz
10 V/m 10 Vrms unmodulated
80 % AM (1 kHz) 50 % ED 80 % AM (1 kHz)
200 Hz repetition frequency 150 W source impedance
Emission of radio interference
Emitted interference of electromagnetic fields in accordance with EN 55011: limit
value class A, group 1 (measured at a distance of 30 m).
Frequency Emitted interference
From 30 to 230 MHz < 30 dB (mV/m)Q
From 230 to 1000 MHz < 37 dB (mV/m)Q
General Technical Specifications
6-6 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
6.3 Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions
Shipping and storage conditions
The ET 200X distributed I/O device exceeds the requirements of EC 61131-2 with
regard to transport and storage conditions. The following figures are valid for
modules that have been transported or stored in their original packaging.
Type of condition Permissible range
Free fall BM/EM/frequency converter: 1 m
Motor starter: 0.35 m
Temperature BM/EM, except the pneumatic module:
from –40 C to +70 C
Pneumatic module: from –30 C to +70 C
Temperature variation 20 K/h
Air pressure From 1080 to 660 hPa (corresponds to an
altitude of -1000 to 3500 m)
Relative humidity From 5 to 95 %, without condensation
Climatic environmental conditions
The following climatic environmental conditions apply:
Environmental conditions Operating ranges Remarks
Temperature From 0 to 55 CFor horizontal installation; not
for pneumatic components
From 0 to 50 CFor horizontal installation of
pneumatic components
From 0 to 40 CFor all other installation posi-
tions
Temperature variation 10 K/h
Relative humidity From 5 to 100 %
Air pressure From 1080 to 795 hPa Corresponds to an altitude of
-1000 to 2000 m
Contaminant concentration SO2: < 0.5 ppm;
rel. humidity < 60 %, no moisture con-
densation
H2S: < 0.1 ppm;
rel. humidity < 60 %, no moisture con-
densation
Test:
10 ppm; 4 days
1 ppm; 4 days
General Technical Specifications
6-7
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Mechanical environmental conditions
The mechanical environmental conditions are shown in the following table in the
form of sinusoidal oscillations. For this, each module of the ET 200X is secured to
the substrate.
Basic and expansion mo-
dules Frequency
range Permanent Tested with ...
All except motor starters/fre-
quency converters and pneu-
matic components
5 f 8 Hz 0.35 mm amplitude 0.75 mm amplitude
8 f 150 Hz 5 g constant acceleration 10 g constant accelera-
tion
Motor starters/frequency con-
verters and pneumatic com-
ponents
5 f 8 Hz 0.15 mm amplitude 0.15 mm amplitude
8 f 150 Hz 2 g constant acceleration 2 g constant acceleration
General Technical Specifications
6-8 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Testing mechanical environmental conditions
The following tables provide information about the type and scope of tests for
mechanical ambient conditions. For this, each module of the ET 200X is secured
to the substrate.
Test for ... Test standard Basic and expansion modules without motor starter/
frequency converter and pneumatic components
Oscillations Oscillation test to
IEC 60068-2-8 Type of oscillation: frequency sweeps with a rate of change of 1 octave
per minute.
5 Hz f 8 Hz, constant amplitude of 0.75 mm
8 Hz f 150 Hz, constant acceleration of 10 g
Duration of oscillation: 10 frequency sweeps per axis in each of the
three perpendicular axes
Shock Shock test to
IEC 60068-2-27 Type of shock: half-sine
Shock strength: 30 g peak value, 18 ms duration
Direction of the shock: 3 shocks per +/– direction in each of
the three perpendicular axes
Repetitive
shock Shock test to
IEC 60068-29 Type of shock: half-sine
Shock strength: 25 g peak value, 6 ms duration
Direction of the shock: 1000 shocks per +/– direction in each of the
three perpendicular axes
Test for ... Test standard Motor starters/frequency converters and pneumatic components
Oscillations Oscillation test to
IEC 60068-2-8 Type of oscillation: frequency sweeps with a rate of change of 1 octave
per minute.
5 Hz f 8 Hz, constant amplitude of 0.15 mm
8 Hz f 150 Hz, constant acceleration of 2 g
Duration of oscillation: 10 frequency sweeps per axis in each of the
three perpendicular axes
Shock Shock test to
IEC 60068-2-27 Type of shock: half-sine
Shock strength: 15 g peak value, 11 ms duration
Direction of the shock: 3 shocks per +/– direction in each of
the three perpendicular axes
General Technical Specifications
6-9
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
6.4 Details of insulation testing, safety class, degree of protection
and rated voltage of the ET 200X
Test voltage
Insulation strength is demonstrated in the routine test with the following test
voltage in accordance with IEC 61131-2:
Circuits with rated voltage Ue to other
circuits and ground Test voltage
0 V < Ue 50 V 500 VDC
300 V < Ue 600 V 2.6 kVDC to ground
4 kVDC to backplane bus
Pollution severity
Pollution severity 3 in accordance with IEC 61131
Safety class
Safety class I in accordance with IEC 60536
IP 65 degree of protection
Degree of protection IP 65 in accordance with IEC 60529 for all basic and
expansion modules, EM 148-FC frequency converters, motor starters and
pneumatic components of the ET 200X. This means:
Protection against the ingress of dust and complete protection against electric
shock
Protection against water jets from nozzles which are aimed at the casing from
all directions. (There must be no harmful effects from the water.)
IP 66 and IP 67 degrees of protection
Degree of protection IP 66 and IP 67 in accordance with IEC 60529 for all basic
and expansion modules (except motor starters, EM 148-FC frequency converters
and pneumatic components):
Protection against the ingress of dust and complete protection against electric
shock
IP 66: Protection against heavy seas or strong water jets. (There must be no
ingress of harmful quantities of water into the casing.)
IP 67: Protection against water when the casing is immersed in it under defined
pressure and time conditions. (There must be no ingress of harmful quantities
of water into the casing.)
General Technical Specifications
6-10 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Note
The above-mentioned degrees of protection are only warranted when the ET 200X
is completely closed. Therefore:
Always plug all connectors for PROFIBUS-DP and the supply voltage for the
electronics/sensors and the load into the basic module (BM 141, BM 142,
BM 147/CPU), irrespective of whether or not they are all wired. An alternative
is to close unused connectors with covers.
Plug all the DESINA connectors into the
BM 141-ECOFAST or BM 143-DESINA basic modules. Fit a cover if a DESINA
socket remains unused.
Seal off any terminal connections which are not required with screw caps.
NEMA classification of the ET 200X (for the US market)
All the basic and expansion modules of the ET 200X (except motor starters, EM
148-FC frequency converters, CPV 10 and CPV 40 valve terminals, and pneumatic
modules) meet the requirements of NEMA: Enclosure rating Type: 4X – indoor use
only.
Rated voltage for operation
The ET 200X distributed I/O device operates with the rated voltage and
corresponding tolerances shown in the following table.
Rated voltage Tolerance range
24 VDC 20.4 to 28.8 VDC
7-1
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Technical Specifications
The ET 200X consists of different components that are connected together to form
the ET 200X distributed I/O device. In this chapter, we have summarized the
technical specifications relating to the different types of component.
Contents of Chapter
Section Subject Page
7.1 BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V basic module
(6ES7 141-1BF12-0XB0) 7-3
7.2 BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST basic module
(6ES7 141-1BF01-0AB0) 7-8
7.3 BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG basic module
(6ES7 141-1BF40-0AB0) 7-12
7.4 BM 142 DO 4 DC 24V/2A basic module
(6ES7 142-1BD22-0XB0) 7-18
7.5 BM 143-DESINA FO basic module
(6ES7 143-1BF00-0XB0) 7-22
7.6 BM 143-DESINA RS485
Basic Module (6ES7 143-1BF00-0AB0) 7-28
7.7 EM 141 DI 4 DC 24V expansion module
(6ES7 141-1BD31-0XA0) 7-34
7.8 EM 141 DI 8 DC 24V expansion module
(6ES7 141-1BF31-0XA0) 7-37
7.9 EM 141 DI 8 DC 24V DIAG expansion module
(6ES7 141-1BF30-0XB0) 7-39
7.10 EM 141 DI 8 DC 24V expansion module
(6ES7 141-1BF41-0XA0) 7-44
7.11 EM 141 DI 8 DC 24V DIAG expansion module
(6ES7 141-1BF40-0XB0) 7-47
7.12 EM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/0.5A expansion module
(6ES7 142-1BD30-0XA0) 7-51
7.13 EM 142 DO 4 DC 24V/2A expansion module
(6ES7 142-1BD40-0XA0) 7-54
7.14 EM 142 DO 4 DC 24V/2A expansion module
(6ES7 142-1BD40-0XB0) 7-57
7.15 EM 142 DO 8 DC 24V/1.2A expansion module
(6ES7 142-1BF30-0XA0) 7-62
7.16 EM 143-DESINA expansion module
(6ES7 143-1BF30-0XB0) 7-65
7.17 EM 148-P DI 4 x DC 24V/DO 2 x expansion module
(pneumatic module)
(6ES7 148-1DA00-0XA0)
7-70
7
Technical Specifications
7-2 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Section PageSubject
7.18 EM 148-P DO 16 x P/CPV10 expansion module
(pneumatic interface module for CPV10)
(6ES7 148-1EH00-0XA0)
7-74
7.19 EM 148-P DO 16 x P/CPV14 expansion module
(pneumatic interface module for CPV14)
(6ES7 148-1EH10-0XA0)
7-76
7.20 PM 148 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A power module
(6ES7 148-1CA00-0XB0) 7-78
7.21 Expansion Modules with Analog Inputs and Outputs 7-83
7.22 SITOP power power supply 24V/10A
(6EP1 334-2CA00) 7-129
Technical Specifications
7-3
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
7.1 BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V basic module
(6ES7 141-1BF12-0XB0)
Features
The basic module BM 141 DI 8DC 24V with the order number
6ES7 141-1BF12-0XB0 has the following features:
8 digital inputs
Rated input voltage of 24 VDC
Suitable for switches and proximity switches (BEROs)
Pinout of the sockets for DI
The following table shows the pinout of the four sockets used to connect the digital
inputs. The connector wiring is described in Section 4.4.4. You can find the layout
of the sockets 1 to 4 on the module in Appendix C.
Table 7-1 Pinout of the sockets for 8-channel digital inputs
Pin Assignment
of socket X1 Assignment
of socket X2 Assignment
of socket X3 Assignment
of socket X4 Front view of
socket
(Front view)
1Sensor supply output 1L+
2Input signal,
channel 4 Input signal,
channel 5 Input signal,
channel 6 Input signal,
channel 7 2
3Chassis ground, power supply 1
2
3
5
4Input signal,
channel 0 Input signal,
channel 1 Input signal,
channel 2 Input signal,
channel 3 4
5
5 PE
Covering up unused connections
You must seal off any connections which are not required with M12 screw caps, in
order to ensure that the degree of protection (IP 65, IP 66 or IP 67) is achieved.
Technical Specifications
7-4 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Basic circuit diagram
The basic circuit diagram of the basic module is shown below.
Connector assembly
PROFIBUS
address
PROFIBUS-D
P connection
A
B
Electrical
isolation
Electronic
components
Internal power
supply
ON BF
1L+ 1M AB
2L+ 2M
Backplane bus
interface
1L+
24 VDC
Load voltage
monitor
Socket connections
(see Table 7-1)
SF
So. X1 So. X4So. X3
So. X2
Supply voltage
Electronic components/ sensors
Load voltage
X01
X02
X03
Short-circuit
protection
Figure 7-1 Basic circuit diagram of the BM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V basic module
Technical Specifications
7-5
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Parameters
The following tables provide an overview of the parameters on the basic module
that can be set.
Table 7-2 Parameters of the BM 141 DI 8DC 24V
Parameters Range Default Area
S7 slave with
HWCONFIG Standard slave
with DDB file
SIEM803D.GSG1
Standard slave
with DDB file
SI03803D.GSG1
affected
––– ––– DP interrupt mode DPV0/DPV1 DPV1 ET 200X
Diagnostic interrupt Yes/no Yes ET 200X
Hardware interrupt Yes/no Yes ET 200X
––– Enhanced
diagnostics2––– Yes/no Yes ET 200X
––– ––– Startup when
expected/actual
config. dif fer
Yes/no No ET 200X
Diagnosis: no load voltage (S) Yes/no Yes ET 200X
––– ––– Module diagnosis Yes/no Yes ET 200X
––– ––– Module status Yes/no Yes ET 200X
––– ––– Channel-specific
diagnosis Yes/no Yes ET 200X
1As of basic module 6ES7 141-1BF12-0XB0, version 1
2The length of the diagnostic frame is 32 bytes
Technical Specifications
7-6 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions
W H D (mm) 134 110 55
Weight Approx. 500 g
Module-specific data
Baud rate 9.6/19.2/93.75/187.5
/500 kbps
1.5/3/6/12 Mbps
Bus protocol PROFIBUS-DP
FREEZE compatibility Yes
SYNC compatibility Yes
Number of inputs 8
Cable length
Unshielded Max. 30 m
Manufacturer identification 803DH
Voltages, currents, potentials
Rated supply voltage for
electronic components and
sensors 1L+
Max. perm. current for
electronic components
and sensors
Reverse polarity
protection
Short circuit protection
24 VDC
Up to 40 C 1 A;
Up to 55 C 0.8 A
Yes
Yes, electronic
Rated load voltage 2L +
Reverse polarity
protection
24 VDC
No
Max. perm. power input
from load Up to 40 C 10 A;
Up to 55 C 8 A
Maximum number of inputs
driven simultaneously
All installation positions
To 55 C8
Electrical isolation
Between channels
Between load voltage
and all other circuit
components
Between
PROFIBUS-DP and all
other circuit
components
No
Yes
Yes
Permissible potential diffe-
rence
Between different
circuits 75 VDC, 60 VAC
Insulation tested with 500 VDC
Power input
From supply voltage
1L+ Max. 180 mA
Power loss of module Typ. 3.5 W
Status, alarms, diagnostics
Status display Green LED per
channel
Alarms Diagnostic interrupt
Diagnostic functions
Group error
PROFIBUS-DP bus
monitoring
Monitoring of the
electronics power
supply
Load voltage monitor
Reading diagnostic
information
Configurable
Red LED (SF)
Red LED (BF)
Green LED (ON)
Green LED (24VDC)
Possible
Sensor supply outputs
Outputs
Output current*
Short circuit protection
4
Up to 40 C
max. 0.9A;
Up to 55 C
max. 0.7A
Yes, electronic
Technical Specifications
7-7
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Sensor selection data
Input voltage
Rated value
With signal ”1”
With signal ”0”
24 VDC
13 to 30 V
–3 to 5 V
Input current
With signal ”1”Typ. 7 mA
Input delay
From ”0” to ”1”
From ”1” to ”0”1.2 to 4.8 ms
1.2 to 4.8 ms
Input characteristic To IEC 61131,
Type 1
Connection of two-wire
BEROs
Permissible
closed-circuit current
Possible
Max. 1.5 mA
* Please note the total current per ET 200X.
Technical Specifications
7-8 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
7.2 BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST basic module
(6ES7 141-1BF01-0AB0)
Features
The BM 141 DI 8DC 24V ECOFAST basic module with the order number
6ES7 141-1BF01-0AB0 has the following features:
PROFIBUS-DP connection via copper conductors (RS 485)
8 digital inputs
Rated input voltage of 24 VDC
Suitable for switches and proximity switches (BEROs)
Pinout of the sockets for DI
The following table shows the pinout of the eight sockets used to connect the
digital inputs. The connector wiring is described in Section 4.4.4. You can find the
layout of the sockets in Appendix C.
Table 7-3 Pinout of sockets X1 to X8 for digital inputs
Pin Assignment
of socket X1 Assignment
of socket X2 Assignment
of socket X3 Assignment
of socket X4 Front view of
socket
1Sensor supply output 1L+
2not assigned
3Chassis ground, power supply 2
4Input signal,
channel 0 Input signal,
channel 1 Input signal,
channel 2 Input signal,
channel 3
13
4
5
5 PE
Pin Assignment
of socket X5 Assignment
of socket X6 Assignment
of socket X7 Assignment
of socket X8
1Sensor supply output 1L+
2not assigned
3Chassis ground, power supply
4Input signal,
channel 4 Input signal,
channel 5 Input signal,
channel 6 Input signal,
channel 7
5 PE
Covering up unused connections
You must seal off any connections which are not required with M12 screw caps, in
order to ensure that the degree of protection (IP 65, IP 66 or IP 67) is achieved.
Technical Specifications
7-9
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Basic circuit diagram
The basic circuit diagram of the basic module is show below.
DC 24 V-NS PROFIBUS
address
Electronic
components
Internal power
supply
DC 24 V-NS RUN
A
DC 24 V-S
Load voltage
monitor
SF
RS 485
interface
BDC 24 V-S
521
634
B
A
634
521
DESINA
connector
Backplane bus
interface
So. X1 So. X8
So. X3
So. X2
X01
X02
Socket connections
(see Table 7-3)
Short-circuit
protection
Figure 7-2 Basic circuit diagram for the BM 141 DI 8DC 24V ECOFAST basic module
(6ES7 141-1BF01-0AB0)
Technical Specifications
7-10 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Parameters
The following tables provide an overview of the parameters on the basic module
that can be set.
Table 7-4 Parameters of the BM 141 DI 8DC 24V ECOFAST
Parameters Range Default Area
S7 slave with
HWCONFIG Standard slave
with DDB file
SIEM80D2.GSG1
Standard slave
with DDB file
SI0380D2.GSG1
affected
––– ––– DP interrupt mode DPV0/DPV1 DPV1 ET 200X
Diagnostic interrupt Yes/no Yes ET 200X
Hardware interrupt Yes/no Yes ET 200X
––– Enhanced
diagnostics2––– Yes/no Yes ET 200X
––– ––– Startup when
expected/actual
config. dif fer
Yes/no No ET 200X
Diagnosis: no load voltage (S) Yes/no Yes ET 200X
––– ––– Module diagnosis Yes/no Yes ET 200X
––– ––– Module status Yes/no Yes ET 200X
––– ––– Channel-specific
diagnosis Yes/no Yes ET 200X
1As of basic module 6ES7 141-1BF01-0AB0, version 1
2The length of the diagnostic frame is 32 bytes
Technical Specifications
7-11
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions
W H D (mm) 175 180 110
Weight Approx. 650 g
Module-specific data
Baud rate 9.6/19.2/45.45/93.75/1
87.5/ 500 kbps
1.5/3/6/12 Mbps
Bus protocol PROFIBUS-DP
FREEZE compatibility Yes
SYNC compatibility Yes
Number of channels 8 digital inputs
Cable length
Unshielded Max. 30 m
Manufacturer identification 80D2H
Voltages, currents, potentials
Non-switched rated load
voltage (NS)
Max. perm. power
input from load
Reverse polarity
protection
Short circuit protection
24 VDC
Up to 40 C 10 A;
Up to 55 C 8 A
No
No
Switched rated load
voltage (NS)
Max. perm. power
input from load
Reverse polarity
protection
24 VDC
Up to 40 C 10 A;
Up to 55 C 8 A
No
Maximum number of in-
puts driven simulta-
neously
all installed positions
to max. 55 C
8
Electrical isolation
Between channels and
backplane bus No
Between channels No
Between load voltages No
Between load voltage
and all other circuitry No
Between
PROFIBUS-DP and all
other circuitry
Yes
Permissible potential diffe-
rence
Between different
circuits
75 VDC, 60 VAC
Insulation tested with 500 VDC
Power input
From backplane bus
(1L+) Max. 180 mA
Power loss of module Typ. 3.5 W
Status, alarms, diagnostics
Status display Green LED per chan-
nel
Alarms Diagnostic interrupt
Diagnostic functions Configurable
Group error Red LED (SF)
Status indicator Green LED (RUN)
Indicator for
non-switched load
voltage
Green LED
(DC 24V-NS)
Indicator for switched
load voltage Green LED
(DC 24V-S)
Reading diagnostic
information Possible
Sensor supply outputs
Outputs
Output current*
Short circuit protection
8
Up to 40 C max. 1A;
to 55 C max. 0.8A
Yes, electronic
Technical Specifications
7-12 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Sensor selection data
Input voltage
Rated value
With signal ”1”
With signal ”0”
24 VDC
13 to 30 V
– 3 to 5 V
Input current
With signal ”1”Typ. 7 mA
Input delay
From ”0” to ”1”
From ”1” to ”0”1.2 to 4.8 ms
1.2 to 4.8 ms
Input characteristic To IEC 61131, Type 1
Connection of two-wire
BEROs
Permissible
closed-circuit current
Possible
Max. 1.5 mA
* Please note the total current per ET 200X.
7.3 BM 141 DI 8DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG basic module
(6ES7 141-1BF40-0AB0)
Features
The BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG with the order number
6ES7 141-1BF40-0AB0 has the following features:
PROFIBUS-DP connection via copper conductors (RS 485)
8 digital inputs
Rated input voltage of 24 VDC
Suitable for switches and proximity switches (BEROs)
Diagnostic interrupt for short circuit and wire break for each channel (I/O
component of the basic module)
Hardware interrupt at rising and falling edges for each channel (I/O component
of the basic module)
Direct communication
Parameterizable input delays
Technical Specifications
7-13
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Pinout of the sockets for DI
The following table shows the pinout of the eight sockets used to connect the
digital inputs. You can find the wiring of the connector in the ET 200X manual,
Section 4.4.4. You can find the layout of the sockets in the ET 200X manual,
Appendix C.
Table 7-5 Pinout of sockets X1 to X8 for digital inputs
Pin Assignment
of socket X1 Assignment
of socket X2 Assignment
of socket X3 Assignment
of socket X4 Front view of
socket
1Sensor supply output 1L+
2not assigned
3Chassis ground, power supply 2
4Input signal,
channel 0 Input signal,
channel 1 Input signal,
channel 2 Input signal,
channel 3
13
4
5
5 PE
Pin Assignment
of socket X5 Assignment
of socket X6 Assignment
of socket X7 Assignment
of socket X8
1Sensor supply output 1L+
2not assigned
3Chassis ground, power supply
4Input signal,
channel 4 Input signal,
channel 5 Input signal,
channel 6 Input signal,
channel 7
5 PE
Covering up unused connections
You must seal off any connections which are not required with M12 screw caps, in
order to ensure that the degree of protection (IP 65, IP 66 or IP 67) is achieved.
Technical Specifications
7-14 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Basic circuit diagram
The basic circuit diagram of the basic module is show below.
DC 24 V-NS PROFIBUS
address
Electronic
components
Internal power
supply
DC 24 V-NS RUN
A
DC 24 V-S
Load voltage
monitor
SF
RS 485
interface
BDC 24 V-S
521
634
B
A
634
521
DESINA
connector
Backplane bus
interface
So. X1 So. X8
So. X3
So. X2
Socket connections
(see Table 7-3) Short-circuit
protection Short-circuit
protection Short-circuit
protection Short-circuit
protection
X01
X02
Figure 7-3 Basic circuit diagram for the BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG basic module
(6ES7 141-1BF40-0AB0)
Technical Specifications
7-15
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Parameters
The following tables provide an overview of the parameters on the basic module
that can be set.
Table 7-6 Parameters of the BM 141 DI 8DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG
Parameters Range Default Area
S7 slave with
HWCONFIG Standard slave
with DDB file
SIEM80D3.GSG1
Standard slave
with DDB file
SI0380D3.GSG1
affected
––– ––– DP interrupt mode DPV0/DPV1 DPV1 ET 200X
Diagnostic interrupt Yes/no Yes ET 200X
Hardware interrupt Yes/no Yes ET 200X
––– Enhanced
diagnostics2––– Yes/no Yes ET 200X
––– ––– Startup when
expected/actual
config. dif fer
Yes/no No ET 200X
Diagnosis: no load voltage (S) Yes/no Yes ET 200X
––– ––– Module diagnosis Yes/no Yes ET 200X
––– ––– Module status Yes/no Yes ET 200X
––– ––– Channel-specific
diagnosis Yes/no Yes ET 200X
1As of basic module 6ES7 141-1BF40-0AB0, version 2
2The length of the diagnostic frame is 32 bytes
Table 7-7 Parameters of the BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG for digital inputs
Parameters Range Default Area affected
Input delay10.5 ms/ 3 ms/ 15 ms/
20 ms 3 ms Module
Diagnosis: short circuit
to M Yes/no No Channel
Diagnosis: wire break Yes/no No Channel
Diagnostic interrupt Yes/no No Module
Hardware interrupt Yes/no No Module
Hardware interrupt on
rising edge2Yes/no No Channel
Hardware interrupt on
falling edge2Yes/no No Channel
1The input delay applies at ”0” to ”1” and at ”1” to ”0”.
2These parameters can only be set if you enable the hardware interrupt parameter.
Technical Specifications
7-16 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Technical data
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions
W H D (mm) 175 180 110
Weight Approx. 650 g
Module-specific data
Baud rate 9.6/19.2/45.45/93.75/1
87.5/ 500 kbps
1.5/3/6/12 Mbps
Bus protocol PROFIBUS-DP
FREEZE compatibility Yes
SYNC compatibility Yes
Number of channels 8 digital inputs
Cable length
Unshielded Max. 30 m
Manufacturer identification 80D3H
Voltages, currents, potentials
Non-switched rated load
voltage (NS)
Max. perm. power
input from load
Reverse polarity
protection
Short-circuit protection
24 VDC
Up to 40 C 10 A;
Up to 55 C 8 A
No
No
Switched rated load
voltage (NS)
Max. perm. power
input from load
Reverse polarity
protection
24 VDC
Up to 40 C 10 A;
Up to 55 C 8 A
No
Maximum number of in-
puts driven simulta-
neously
all installed positions
max. 55 C
8
Electrical isolation
Between channels and
backplane bus No
Between channels No
Between load voltages No
Between load voltage
and all other circuitry No
Between
PROFIBUS-DP and all
other circuitry
Yes
Permissible potential diffe-
rence
Between different
circuits
75 VDC, 60 VAC
Insulation tested with 500 VDC
Power input
From backplane bus
(1L+) Max. 180 mA
Power loss of the module Typ. 3.5 W
Status, alarms, diagnostics
Status display Green LED per chan-
nel
Alarms Hardware interrupt
Diagnostic interrupt
Hardware interrupt Configurable
Diagnostic interrupt Configurable
Diagnostic functions Configurable
Group error Red LED (SF)
Status indicator Green LED (RUN)
Indicator for
non-switched load
voltage
Green LED
(DC 24V-NS)
Indicator for switched
load voltage Green LED
(DC 24V-S)
Channel error display red LED per channel
Reading diagnostic
information Possible
Technical Specifications
7-17
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Sensor supply outputs
Outputs
Output current*
Short-circuit protection
8
Up to 40 C max. 1A;
to 55 C max. 0.8A
Yes, electronic
Sensor selection data
Input voltage
Rated value
With signal ”1”
With signal ”0”
24 VDC
13 to 30 V
– 3 to 5 V
Input current
With signal ”1”Typ. 10 mA
Input delay (parameteriza-
ble)
At ”0” to ”1” and at ”1”
to ”0”Typ. 0.5 ms
Typ. 3 ms
Typ. 15 ms
Typ. 20 ms
Input characteristic To IEC 61131, Type 2
Connection of two-wire
BEROs
Permissible
closed-circuit current
Possible
Max. 1.5 mA **
* Please note the total current per ET 200X.
** The required closed-circuit current for wire break
detection is 0.6 mA < I < 1.5 mA
Technical Specifications
7-18 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
7.4 BM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A basic module
(6ES7 142-1BD22-0XB0)
Features
The BM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A basic module, order number
6ES7 142-1BD22-0XB0, has the following features:
4 digital outputs
Output current 2 A per output
Rated load voltage 24 VDC
Suitable for solenoids, DC contactors and indicator lights
Pinout of the sockets for DO
The following table shows the pinout of the four sockets used to connect the digital
outputs. The connector wiring is described in Section 4.4.4. You can find the layout
of the sockets X1 to X4 on the module in Appendix C.
Table 7-8 Pinout of the sockets for 4-channel digital outputs
Pin Assignment of
socket X1 Assignment of
socket X2 Assignment of
socket X3 Assignment of
socket X4 Front view
of socket
(Front)
1–
2Output signal,
channel 1* –Output signal,
channel 3* –
2
3Chassis ground, load power supply 1
2
3
5
4Output signal,
channel 0 Output signal,
channel 1* Output signal,
channel 2 Output signal,
channel 3* 4
5
5 PE
*Note: Channel 1 and channel 3 are only allowed to be used at one socket (X1/X2 or X3/X4).
Covering up unused connections
You must seal off any connections which are not required with M12 screw caps, in
order to ensure that the degree of protection (IP 65, IP 66 or IP 67) is achieved.
Technical Specifications
7-19
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Basic circuit diagram
The basic circuit diagram of the basic module is shown below.
Connector assembly
PROFIBUS
address
PROFIBUS-D
P connection
A
B
Electrical
isolation
Electronic
comp.
Internal power
supply
ON
Backplane bus
interface
1M
Socket connections
(see Table 7-8)
24 VDC
BF SF
Load voltage
monitor
1L+ 1M AB
2L+ 2M
Supply voltage
Electronic components/
sensors
Load voltage
X01
X02
X03
Figure 7-4 Basic circuit diagram of the BM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A basic module
Technical Specifications
7-20 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Parameters
The following table provides an overview of the parameters that can be set on the
basic module.
Table 7-9 Parameters of the BM 142 DO 4DC 24V/2A
Parameters Range Default Area
S7 slave with
HWCONFIG Standard slave
with DDB file
SIEM803C.GSG1
Standard slave
with DDB file
SI03803C.GSG1
affected
––– ––– DP interrupt mode DPV0/DPV1 DPV1 ET 200X
Diagnostic interrupt Yes/no Yes ET 200X
Hardware interrupt Yes/no Yes ET 200X
––– Enhanced
diagnostics2––– Yes/no Yes ET 200X
––– ––– Startup when
expected/actual
config. dif fer
Yes/no No ET 200X
Diagnosis: no load voltage (S) Yes/no Yes ET 200X
––– ––– Module diagnosis Yes/no Yes ET 200X
––– ––– Module status Yes/no Yes ET 200X
––– ––– Channel-specific
diagnosis Yes/no Yes ET 200X
1As of basic module 6ES7 142-1BD22-0XB0, version 3
2The length of the diagnostic frame is 32 bytes.
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions
W H D (mm) 134 110 55
Weight Approx. 500 g
Module-specific data
Baud rate 9.6/19.2/93.75/187.5
/500 kbps
1.5/3/6/12 Mbps
Bus protocol PROFIBUS-DP
FREEZE compatibility Yes
SYNC compatibility Yes
Number of outputs 4
Cable length
Unshielded Max. 30 m
Manufacturer identification 803CH
Technical Specifications
7-21
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Voltages, currents, potentials
Rated supply voltage for
electronic components and
sensors 1L+
Max. perm. current for
electronic components
and sensors
Reverse polarity
protection
Short-circuit protection
24 VDC
Up to 40 C 1 A;
Up to 55 C 0.8 A
Yes
Yes, electronic
Rated load voltage 2L +
Reverse polarity
protection
24 VDC
No
Max. perm. power input
from load Up to 40 C 10 A;
Up to 55 C 8 A
Aggregate current of out-
puts
All installation positions
Up to 20 C
Up to 55 CMax. 6 A
Max. 4 A
Electrical isolation
Between channels and
backplane bus
Between channels and
supply voltage for
electronic components
Between channels
Between load power
supply and all other
circuit components
Between
PROFIBUS-DP and all
other circuit
components
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Permissible potential diffe-
rence
Between different
circuits 75 VDC, 60 VAC
Insulation tested with 500 VDC
Power input
From supply voltage
1L+
From load voltage 2L+
(without load)
Max. 180 mA
Max. 12 mA
Power loss of module Typ. 4 W
Status, alarms, diagnostics
Status display Green LED per
channel
Alarms Diagnostic interrupt
Diagnostic functions
Group error
PROFIBUS-DP bus
monitoring
Monitoring of the
electronics power
supply
Load voltage monitor
Reading diagnostic
information
Configurable
Red LED (SF)
Red LED (BF)
Green LED (ON)
Green LED (DC24V)
Possible
Actuator selection data
Output voltage
With signal ”1”
Output current
With signal ”1”
Rated value
Permissible range
With signal ”0” (residual
current)
Min. of 2L+ (– 0.8 V)
2 A
5 mA to 2.4 A
Max. 0.5 mA
Load resistance range 12 W to 4 kW
Lamp load Max. 10 W
Parallel connection of two
outputs
For redundant control of
load
For performance
improvement
Possible (outputs of
same basic module
only)
Not possible
Driving a digital input Possible
Switching frequency
Resistive load
Inductive load to
IEC 947-5-1, DC13
Lamp load
Max. 100 Hz
Max. 0.5 Hz
Max. 1 Hz
Limitation (internal) of vol-
tage induced on circuit in-
terruption
Typ. 2L+ (– 47 V)
Short-circuit protection for
output
Response threshold
Yes, electronic
Typ. 3 A
Technical Specifications
7-22 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
7.5 BM 143-DESINA FO basic module
(6ES7 143-1BF00-0XB0)
Features
The BM 143-DESINA FO basic module (order number 6ES7 143-1BF00-0XB0)
has the following features:
PROFIBUS-DP connection via fiber-optic cables
8 digital inputs or outputs (individually parameterizable as input or output) plus 8
diagnostic inputs or inputs with NC functionality (individually parameterizable).
Rated input voltage of 24 VDC
Digital inputs are suitable for switches and proximity switches (BERO switches)
Digital outputs are suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors and indicator
lights
Pinout of the sockets for DI/DO
The tables below show the pinouts of the 8 sockets for connecting digital inputs
and outputs. The connector wiring is described in Section 4.4.4. The arrangement
of sockets X1 to X8 on the module in Appendix C.
Table 7-10 Pinout of sockets X1, X3, X5 and X7 for digital inputs or outputs
Pin Assignment
of socket X1 Assignment
of socket X3 Assignment
of socket X5 Assignment
of socket X7 Front view of
socket
(Front view)
1Non-switched supply voltage DC 24V-NS
2 Diagnostics
input or input
with NC
functionality
Diagnostics
input or input
with NC
functionality
Diagnostics
input or input
with NC
functionality
Diagnostics
input or input
with NC
functionality 2
3Chassis ground, power supply 1
2
3
5
4* Digital input or
output
(DESINA)
channel 0
Digital input or
output
(DESINA)
channel 2
Digital input or
output
(DESINA)
channel 4
Digital input or
output
(DESINA)
channel 6
1
4
5
5not assigned
* If it is parameterized as a digital output, pin 4 is fed by the DC 24V-S switched supply voltage.
Technical Specifications
7-23
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Table 7-11 Pinout of sockets X2, X4, X6 and X8 for digital inputs or outputs
Pin Assignment
of socket X2 Assignment
of socket X4 Assignment
of socket X6 Assignment
of socket X8 Front view of
socket
(Front view)
1Non-switched supply voltage DC 24V-NS
2 Diagnostics
input or input
with NC
functionality
Diagnostics
input or input
with NC
functionality
Diagnostics
input or input
with NC
functionality
Diagnostics
input or input
with NC
functionality 2
3Chassis ground, power supply 1
2
3
5
4* Digital input or
output
(DESINA)
channel 1
Digital input or
output
(DESINA)
channel 3
Digital input or
output
(DESINA)
channel 5
Digital input or
output
(DESINA)
channel 7
1
4
5
5not assigned
* If it is parameterized as a digital output, pin 4 is fed by the DC 24V-NS non-switched supply voltage.
Covering up unused connections
You must seal off any connections which are not required with M12 screw caps, in
order to ensure that the degree of protection (IP 65, IP 66 or IP 67) is achieved.
Basic circuit diagram
The basic circuit diagram of the basic module is shown below.
DC 24 V-NS PROFIBUS
address
Electronic
components
Internal power
supply
DC 24 V-NS RUN
A
Backplane bus
DC 24 V-S
Load voltage
monitor
SF
FO
interface
Parameterizable digital inputs
and outputs
X1 X3 X5 X7 X2 X4 X6 X8
BDC 24 V-S
521
634
B
A
634
521
DESINA
connector
DC 24V-S
(for digital outputs)
DC 24 V-NS
X01
X02
Figure 7-5 Basic circuit diagram of the BM 143-DESINA FO basic module
Technical Specifications
7-24 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Parameters
The following table provides an overview of the parameters you can set for the
basic module.
Table 7-12 Parameters of the BM 143-DESINA FO
Parameters Range Default Area
S7 slave with
HWCONFIG Standard slave
with DDB file
SIEM809A.GSG1
Standard slave
with DDB file
SI03809A.GSG1
affected
––– ––– DP interrupt mode DPV0/DPV1 DPV1 ET 200X
Diagnostic interrupt Yes/no Yes ET 200X
Hardware interrupt Yes/no Yes ET 200X
––– Enhanced
diagnostics2––– Yes/no Yes ET 200X
––– ––– Startup when
expected/actual
config. dif fer
Yes/no No ET 200X
Diagnosis: no load voltage (S) Yes/no Yes ET 200X
––– ––– Module diagnosis Yes/no Yes ET 200X
––– ––– Module status Yes/no Yes ET 200X
––– ––– Channel-specific
diagnosis Yes/no Yes ET 200X
1As of basic module 6ES7 143-1BF00-0XB0, version 5
2The length of the diagnostic frame is 32 bytes.
Technical Specifications
7-25
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Table 7-13 Parameters of the BM 143-DESINA FO for digital inputs and outputs
Parameters Range Default Area affected
Channel type for I/On
(n= 0...7) Digital input/
digital output Digital output
(Channel K0, K2, K4,
K6)
Digital input
(Channel K1, K3, K5,
K7)
Channel
Functional input In
(n=8...15) Diagnostic input/
diagnostic input with
diagnostic frame/
Input with NC function
Diagnostic input Channel
Response to
CPU/master STOP Output No current or
voltage
hold last value/
Apply substitute value/
Output No current or
voltage Channel
Substitute value On
(n=0...7) 0/1 0 Channel
Diagnostic interrupt Yes/no No Module
Technical Specifications
7-26 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions
W H D (mm) 175 180 110
Weight Approx. 650 g
Module-specific data
Baud rate 9.6/19.2/45.45/93.75/
187.5/ 500 kbps
1.5/3/6/12 Mbps
Bus protocol PROFIBUS-DP
FREEZE compatibility Yes
SYNC compatibility Yes
Number of channels 8 digital inputs and
outputs
8 functional
inputs (diagnostics
inputs or inputs with
NC functionality)
Cable length
Unshielded Max. 30 m
Manufacturer identification 809AH
Voltages, currents, potentials
Non-switched rated load
voltage (NS)
Max. perm. power input
from load
Reverse polarity
protection
Short-circuit protection
24 VDC
Up to 40 C 10 A;
Up to 55 C 8 A
No
No
Switched rated load voltage
(NS)
Max. perm. power input
from load
Reverse polarity
protection
24 VDC
Up to 40 C 10 A;
Up to 55 C 8 A
No
Maximum number of inputs
driven simultaneously
all installed positions
max. 55 C8
Aggregate current of out-
puts
All installation positions
To 20 C
To 50 C
To 55 C
Max. 10 A
Max. 6 A
Max. 5 A
Electrical isolation
Between channels and
backplane bus No
Between channels No
Between load voltages No
Between load voltage
and all other circuitry No
Between
PROFIBUS-DP and all
other circuitry
Yes
Permissible potential diffe-
rence
Between different
circuits 75 VDC, 60 VAC
Insulation tested with 500 VDC
Power loss of module Typ. 3.5 W
Status, alarms, diagnostics
Status display Yellow LED per
channel
Indicator for functional input Yellow/red LED
per channel
Alarms Diagnostic interrupt
Diagnostic functions Configurable
Group error Red LED (SF)
Status indicator Green LED (RUN)
Indicator for
non-switched load
voltage
Green LED
(DC 24V-NS)
Indicator for switched
load voltage Green LED
(DC 24V-S)
Reading diagnostic
information Possible
Sensor supply outputs
Outputs
Output current
Short-circuit protection
8
Up to 40 C
max. 1 A;
Up to 55 C
max. 0.8 A
Yes, electronic
Technical Specifications
7-27
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Sensor selection data
Input voltage for paramete-
rized DI (pin 4)
Rated value
With signal ”1”
With signal ”0”
24 VDC
13 to 30 V
–30 to 5V
Input voltage for functional
input (pin 2)
Rated value
With signal ”1”
With signal ”0”
24 VDC
13 to 30 V
–30 to 2 V
Input current
With signal ”1”Typ. 5 mA
Input delay
From ”0” to ”1”
From ”1” to ”0”1.2 to 4.8 ms
1.2 to 4.8 ms
Input characteristic To IEC 61131,
Type 2
Connection of two-wire BE-
ROs
Permissible
closed-circuit current
Possible
Max. 1.5 mA
Actuator selection data
Output voltage
With signal ”1”
Output current
With signal ”1”
Rated value
Permissible range
With signal ”0” (residual
current)
Min. NS/S (– 0.8 V)
1.2 A
7 mA to 1.3 A
Max. 0.5 mA
Load resistance range 21 ohms to 4 kohms
Lamp load Max. 10 W
Parallel connection of two
outputs No
Driving a digital input Possible
Switching frequency
Resistive load
Inductive load to
IEC 947-5-1, DC13
Lamp load
Max. 100 Hz
Max. 2 Hz
Max. 1 Hz
Limitation (internal) of vol-
tage induced on circuit in-
terruption
Typ. NS/S (– 47 V)
Short-circuit protection for
output
Response threshold
Yes, electronic
Typ. 1.8 A
Technical Specifications
7-28 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
7.6 BM 143-DESINA RS485 basic module
(6ES7 143-1BF00-0AB0)
Features
The BM 143-DESINA RS485 basic module with the order number
6ES7 143-1BF00-0AB0 has the following features:
PROFIBUS-DP connection via copper conductors (RS 485)
8 digital inputs or outputs (individually parameterizable as input or output) plus 8
diagnostic inputs or inputs with NC functionality (individually parameterizable).
Rated input voltage of 24 VDC
Digital inputs are suitable for switches and proximity switches (BERO switches)
Digital outputs are suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors and indicator
lights
Pinout of the sockets for DI/DO
The following tables show the pinouts of the eight sockets used to connect the
digital inputs or outputs. The connector wiring is described in Section 4.4.4. The
arrangement of sockets X1 to X8 on the module in Appendix C.
Table 7-14 Pinout of sockets X1, X3, X5 and X7 for digital inputs or outputs
Pin Assignment
of socket X1 Assignment
of socket X3 Assignment
of socket X5 Assignment
of socket X7 Front view of
socket
(Front view)
1Non-switched supply voltage DC 24V-NS
2 Diagnostics
input or input
with NC
functionality
Diagnostics
input or input
with NC
functionality
Diagnostics
input or input
with NC
functionality
Diagnostics
input or input
with NC
functionality 2
3Chassis ground, power supply 1
2
3
5
4* Digital input or
output
(DESINA)
channel 0
Digital input or
output
(DESINA)
channel 2
Digital input or
output
(DESINA)
channel 4
Digital input or
output
(DESINA)
channel 6
1
4
5
5not assigned
* If it is parameterized as a digital output, pin 4 is fed by the DC 24V-S switched supply voltage.
Technical Specifications
7-29
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Table 7-15 Pinout of sockets X2, X4, X6 and X8 for digital inputs or outputs
Pin Assignment
of socket X2 Assignment
of socket X4 Assignment
of socket X6 Assignment
of socket X8 Front view of
socket
(Front view)
1Non-switched supply voltage DC 24V-NS
2 Diagnostics
input or input
with NC
functionality
Diagnostics
input or input
with NC
functionality
Diagnostics
input or input
with NC
functionality
Diagnostics
input or input
with NC
functionality 2
3Chassis ground, power supply 1
2
3
5
4* Digital input or
output
(DESINA)
channel 1
Digital input or
output
(DESINA)
channel 3
Digital input or
output
(DESINA)
channel 5
Digital input or
output
(DESINA)
channel 7
1
4
5
5not assigned
* If it is parameterized as a digital output, pin 4 is fed by the DC 24V-NS non-switched supply voltage.
Covering up unused connections
You must seal off any connections which are not required with M12 screw caps, in
order to ensure that the degree of protection (IP 65, IP 66 or IP 67) is achieved.
Basic circuit diagram
The basic circuit diagram of the basic module is shown below.
DC 24 V-NS PROFIBUS
address
Electronic
components
Internal power
supply
DC 24 V-NS RUN
A
Backplane bus
DC 24 V-S
Load voltage
monitor
SF
RS 485
interface
Parameterizable digital inputs
and outputs
X1 X3 X5 X7 X2 X4 X6 X8
BDC 24 V-S
521
634
B
A
634
521
DESINA
connector
DC 24V-S
(for digital outputs)
DC 24 V-NS
X01
X02
Figure 7-6 Basic circuit diagram of the BM 143-DESINA RS485 basic module
Technical Specifications
7-30 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Parameters
The following table provides an overview of the parameters you can set for the
basic module.
Table 7-16 Parameters of the BM 143-DESINA RS485
Parameters Range Default Area
S7 slave with
HWCONFIG Standard slave
with DDB file
SIEM809A.GSG1
Standard slave
with DDB file
SI03809A.GSG1
affected
––– ––– DP interrupt mode DPV0/DPV1 DPV1 ET 200X
Diagnostic interrupt Yes/no Yes ET 200X
Hardware interrupt Yes/no Yes ET 200X
––– Enhanced
diagnostics2––– Yes/no Yes ET 200X
––– ––– Startup when
expected/actual
config. dif fer
Yes/no No ET 200X
Diagnosis: no load voltage (S) Yes/no Yes ET 200X
––– ––– Module diagnosis Yes/no Yes ET 200X
––– ––– Module status Yes/no Yes ET 200X
––– ––– Channel-specific
diagnosis Yes/no Yes ET 200X
1As of basic module 6ES7 143-1BF00-0AB0, version 2
2The length of the diagnostic frame is 32 bytes.
Technical Specifications
7-31
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Table 7-17 Parameters of the BM 143-DESINA RS485 for digital inputs and outputs
Parameters Range Default Area affected
Channel type for I/On
(n= 0...7) Digital input/
digital output Digital output
(Channel K0, K2, K4,
K6)
Digital input
(Channel K1, K3, K5,
K7)
Channel
Functional input In
(n=8...15) Diagnostic input/
diagnostic input with
diagnostic frame/
Input with NC function
Diagnostic input Channel
Response to
CPU/master STOP Output No current or
voltage
hold last value/
Apply substitute value/
Output No current or
voltage Channel
Substitute value On
(n=0...7) 0/1 0 Channel
Diagnostic interrupt Yes/no No Module
Technical Specifications
7-32 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Dimensions and Weight
Dimensions
W H D (mm) 175 180 110
Weight Approx. 650 g
Module-specific data
Baud rate 9.6/19.2/45.45/93.75/
187.5/ 500 kbps
1.5/3/6/12 Mbps
Bus protocol PROFIBUS-DP
FREEZE compatibility Yes
SYNC compatibility Yes
Number of channels 8 digital inputs and
outputs
8 functional
inputs (diagnostics
inputs or inputs with
NC functionality)
Cable length
Unshielded Max. 30 m
Manufacturer identification 809AH
Voltages, currents, potentials
Non-switched rated load
voltage (NS)
Max. perm. power input
from load
Reverse polarity
protection
Short-circuit protection
24 VDC
Up to 40 C 10 A;
Up to 55 C 8 A
No
No
Switched rated load voltage
(NS)
Max. perm. power input
from load
Reverse polarity
protection
24 VDC
Up to 40 C 10 A;
Up to 55 C 8 A
No
Maximum number of inputs
driven simultaneously
all installed positions
max. 55 C8
Aggregate current of out-
puts
All installation positions
To 20 C
To 50 C
To 55 C
Max. 10 A
Max. 6 A
Max. 5 A
Electrical isolation
Between channels and
backplane bus No
Between channels No
Between load voltages No
Between load voltage
and all other circuitry No
Between
PROFIBUS-DP and all
other circuitry
Yes
Permissible potential diffe-
rence
Between different
circuits
75 VDC, 60 VAC
Insulation tested with 500 VDC
Power loss of module Typ. 3.5 W
Status, alarms, diagnostics
Status display Yellow LED
per channel
Indicator for functional input Yellow/red LED
per channel
Alarms Diagnostic interrupt
Diagnostic functions Configurable
Group error Red LED (SF)
Status indicator Green LED (RUN)
Indicator for
non-switched load
voltage
Green LED
(DC 24V-NS)
Indicator for switched
load voltage Green LED
(DC 24V-S)
Reading diagnostic
information Possible
Sensor supply outputs
Outputs
Output current
Short-circuit protection
8
Up to 40 C
max. 1 A;
Up to 55 C
max. 0.8 A
Yes, electronic
Technical Specifications
7-33
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Sensor selection data
Input voltage for paramete-
rized DI (pin 4)
Rated value
With signal ”1”
With signal ”0”
24 VDC
13 to 30 V
–30 to 5V
Input voltage for functional
input (pin 2)
Rated value
With signal ”1”
With signal ”0”
24 VDC
13 to 30 V
–30 to 2 V
Input current
With signal ”1”Typ. 5 mA
Input delay
From ”0” to ”1”
From ”1” to ”0”1.2 to 4.8 ms
1.2 to 4.8 ms
Input characteristic To IEC 61131,
Type 2
Connection of two-wire BE-
ROs
Permissible
closed-circuit current
Possible
Max. 1.5 mA
Actuator selection data
Output voltage
With signal ”1”
Output current
With signal ”1”
Rated value
Permissible range
With signal ”0” (residual
current)
Min. NS/S (– 0.8 V)
1.2 A
7 mA to 1.3 A
Max. 0.5 mA
Load resistance range 21 ohms to 4 kohms
Lamp load Max. 10 W
Parallel connection of two
outputs No
Driving a digital input Possible
Switching frequency
Resistive load
Inductive load to
IEC 947-5-1, DC13
Lamp load
Max. 100 Hz
Max. 2 Hz
Max. 1 Hz
Limitation (internal) of vol-
tage induced on circuit in-
terruption
Typ. NS/S (– 47 V)
Short-circuit protection for
output
Response threshold
Yes, electronic
Typ. 1.8 A
Technical Specifications
7-34 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
7.7 EM 141 DI 4 DC 24V expansion module
(6ES7 141-1BD31-0XA0)
Features
The EM 141 DI 4 DC 24V expansion module; order number
6ES7 141-1BD31-0XA0 has the following features:
4 digital inputs
Rated input voltage of 24 VDC
Suitable for switches and proximity switches (BEROs)
Pinout of the sockets for DI
The following table shows the pinout of the four sockets used to connect the digital
inputs. You can find the wiring of the connector in Section 4.4.3. You can find the
layout of the sockets in Appendix C.
Table 7-18 Pinout of the sockets for 4-channel digital inputs
Pin Assignment
of socket X1 Assignment
of socket X2 Assignment
of socket X3 Assignment
of socket X4 Front view of
socket
1Sensor supply output 1L+
2Input signal,
channel 1* –Input signal,
channel 3* –
2
3Chassis ground, power supply 1
2
3
5
4Input signal,
channel 0 Input signal,
channel 1* Input signal,
channel 2 Input signal,
channel 3* 4
5 PE
*Note: Channel 1 and channel 3 are only allowed to be used at one socket (X1/X2 or X3/X4).
Covering up unused connections
You must seal off any connections which are not required with M12 screw caps, in
order to ensure that the degree of protection (IP 65, IP 66 or IP 67) is achieved.
Technical Specifications
7-35
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Basic circuit diagram
The basic circuit diagram of the expansion module is shown below.
Backplane bus
interface
Socket connections
(see Table 7-22)
1L+ 1M
Supply voltage for
electronic components and
sensors via backplane bus
So. X1 So. X4So. X3
So. X2
Short-circuit
protection
Figure 7-7 Basic circuit diagram of expansion module EM 141 DO 4 x DC 24V
Technical Specifications
7-36 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions
W H D (mm) 87 110 55
Weight Approx. 250 g
Module-specific data
Number of inputs 4
Cable length
Unshielded Max. 30 m
Voltages, currents, potentials
Maximum number of inputs
driven simultaneously
All installation positions
Up to 55 C4
Electrical isolation No
Permissible potential diffe-
rence
Between different
circuits 75 VDC, 60 VAC
Insulation tested with 500 VDC
Power input
From backplane bus
(1L+) Max. 16 mA
Power loss of module Typ. 1.5 W
Status, alarms, diagnostics
Status display Green LED per
channel
Alarms None
Sensor supply outputs
Outputs
Output current*
Short-circuit protection
4
Up to 40 C
max. 0.9A;
Up to 55 C
max. 0.7A
Yes, electronic
Sensor selection data
Input voltage
Rated value
With signal ”1”
With signal ”0”
24 VDC
13 to 30 V
- 3 to 5 V
Input current
With signal ”1”Typ. 7 mA
Input delay
From ”0” to ”1”
From ”1” to ”0”1.2 to 4.8 ms
1.2 to 4.8 ms
Input characteristic To IEC 61131,
Type 1
Connection of two-wire
BEROs
Permissible
closed-circuit current
Possible
Max. 1.5 mA
* Please note the total current per ET 200X.
Technical Specifications
7-37
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
7.8 EM 141 DI 8 DC 24V expansion module
(6ES7 141-1BF31-0XA0)
Features
The EM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V expansion module with the order number
6ES7 141-1BF31-0XA0 has the following features:
8 digital inputs
Rated input voltage of 24 VDC
Suitable for switches and proximity switches (BEROs)
Pinout of the sockets for DI
The following table shows the pinout of the four sockets used to connect the digital
inputs. The connector wiring is described in Section 4.4.4. You can find the layout
of the sockets in Appendix C.
Table 7-19 Pin assignment of sockets for 8-channel digital inputs
Pin Assignment
of socket X1 Assignment
of socket X2 Assignment
of socket X3 Assignment
of socket X4 Front view of
socket
1Sensor supply output 1L+
2Input signal,
channel 4 Input signal,
channel 5 Input signal,
channel 6 Input signal,
channel 7 2
3Chassis ground, power supply 1
2
3
5
4Input signal,
channel 0 Input signal,
channel 1 Input signal,
channel 2 Input signal,
channel 3 4
5 PE
Covering up unused connections
You must seal off any connections which are not required with M12 screw caps, in
order to ensure that the degree of protection (IP 65, IP 66 or IP 67) is achieved.
Technical Specifications
7-38 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Basic circuit diagram
The basic circuit diagram of the expansion module is shown below.
Backplane bus
interface
1L+ 1M
Socket connections
(see Table 7-19)
Supply voltage for
electronic components and
sensors via backplane bus
So. X1 So. X4So. X3
So. X2
Short-circuit
protection
Figure 7-8 Basic circuit diagram for expansion module EM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V
(6ES7 141-1BF31-0XA0)
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions
W H D (mm) 87 110 55
Weight Approx. 250 g
Module-specific data
Number of inputs 8
Cable length
Unshielded Max. 30 m
Voltages, currents, potentials
Maximum number of inputs
driven simultaneously
All installed positions
max. 55 C8
Electrical isolation No
Permissible potential diffe-
rence
Between different
circuits 75 VDC, 60 VAC
Insulation tested with 500 VDC
Power input
From backplane bus
(1L+) Max. 16 mA
Power loss of module Typ. 1.5 W
Status, alarms, diagnostics
Status display Green LED per
channel
Alarms None
Sensor supply outputs
Outputs
Output current*
Short-circuit protection
4
Up to 40 C
max. 0.9A;
Up to 55 C
max. 0.7A
Yes, electronic
Technical Specifications
7-39
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Sensor selection data
Input voltage
Rated value
With signal ”1”
With signal ”0”
24 VDC
13 to 30 V
– 3 to 5 V
Input current
With signal ”1”typ. 7 mA
Input delay
From ”0” to ”1”
From ”1” to ”0”1.2 to 4.8 ms
1.2 to 4.8 ms
Input characteristic To IEC 61131,
Type 1
Connection of two-wire
BEROs
Permissible
closed-circuit current
Possible
Max. 1.5 mA
* Please note the total current per ET 200X.
7.9 EM 141 DI 8 DC 24V DIAG expansion module
(6ES7 141-1BF30-0XB0)
Hardware
The expansion module can be used together with the following basic modules:
BM 141 DI 8DC 24V, 6ES7 141-1BF01-0XB0, from product version 05
6ES7 141-1BF11-0XB0, from product version 01
6ES7 141-1BF12-0XB0, from product version 01
BM 141 DI 8DC 24V ECOFAST,
6ES7 141-1BF00-0AB0, from product version 01
6ES7 141-1BF01-0AB0, from product version 01
BM 141 DI 8DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG,
6ES7 141-1BF40-0AB0, from product version 01
BM 142 DO 4DC 24V/2A, 6ES7 142-1BD11-0XB0, from product version 05
6ES7 142-1BD21-0XB0, from product version 01
6ES7 142-1BD22-0XB0, from product version 01
BM 143-DESINA FO, 6ES7 143-1BF00-0XB0, from product version 01
BM 143-DESINA RS485, 6ES7 143-1BF00-0AB0, from product version 01
BM 147/CPU, 6ES7 147-1AA00-0XB0, from product version 01
Technical Specifications
7-40 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Features
The EM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V DIAG expansion module with the order number
6ES7 141-1BF30-0XB0 has the following features:
8 digital inputs
Rated input voltage of 24 VDC
Suitable for switches and proximity switches (BEROs)
Diagnostic interrupt for short circuit and wire break for each channel
Hardware interrupt for rising and falling pulse edge for each channel
Short type (110 mm)
Parameterizable input delays
Technical Specifications
7-41
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Pinout of the sockets for DI
The following table shows the pinout of the four sockets used to connect the digital
inputs. You can find the wiring of the connector in the ET 200X manual, Section
4.4.4. You can find the layout of the sockets in the ET 200X manual, Appendix C.
Table 7-20 Pinout of socket X1 to X4 for digital inputs
Pin Assignment
of socket X1 Assignment
of socket X2 Assignment
of socket X3 Assignment
of socket X4 Front view of
socket
1Sensor supply output 1L+
2Input signal,
channel 4 Input signal,
channel 5 Input signal,
channel 6 Input signal,
channel 7 1
2
3
5
3Chassis ground, power supply 13
4
5
4Input signal,
channel 0 Input signal,
channel 1 Input signal,
channel 2 Input signal,
channel 3
4
5 PE
Covering up unused connections
You must seal off any connections which are not required with M12 screw caps, in
order to ensure that the degree of protection (IP 65, IP 66 or IP 67) is achieved.
Basic circuit diagram
The basic circuit diagram of the expansion module is show below.
Backplane bus
interface
1L+ 1M
Socket connections
(see Table 7-20)
Supply voltage for
electronic components and
sensors via backplane bus
So. X1 So. X4So. X3
So. X2
Short-circuit
protection Short-circuit
protection Short-circuit
protection Short-circuit
protection
Figure 7-9 Basic circuit diagram for expansion module EM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V DIAG
(6ES7 141-1BF30-0XB0)
Technical Specifications
7-42 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Parameters
The following table summarizes the parameters that you can set for the expansion
module.
Table 7-21 Parameters of the EM 141 DI 8 DC 24V DIAG
Parameters Range Default Area affected
Input delay10.5 ms/ 3 ms/ 15 ms/
20 ms 3 ms Module
Diagnosis: short circuit
to M Yes/no No Channel
Diagnosis: wire break Yes/no No Channel
Diagnostic interrupt Yes/no No Module
Hardware interrupt Yes/no No Module
Hardware interrupt on
rising edge2Yes/no No Channel
Hardware interrupt on
falling edge2Yes/no No Channel
1The input delay applies at ”0” to ”1” and at ”1” to ”0”.
2These parameters can only be set if you enable the hardware interrupt parameter.
Technical Specifications
7-43
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Technical data
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions
W H D (mm) 87 110 55
Weight Approx. 250 g
Module-specific data
Number of inputs 8
Cable length
Unshielded Max. 30 m
Voltages, currents, potentials
Maximum number of in-
puts driven simulta-
neously
All installed positions
max. 55 C
8
Electrical isolation No
Permissible potential diffe-
rence
Between different
circuits 75 VDC, 60 VAC
Insulation tested with 500 VDC
Power input
From backplane bus
(1L+) Max. 30 mA
Power loss of module Typ. 1.5 W
Status, alarms, diagnostics
Status display Green LED per chan-
nel
Alarms Hardware interrupt
Diagnostic interrupt
Hardware interrupt Configurable
Diagnostic interrupt Configurable
Diagnostic functions Configurable
Group error Red LED (SF)
Channel error display Red LED per channel
Reading diagnostic
information Possible
Sensor supply outputs
Outputs
Output current*
Aggregate current
Short-circuit protection
4
Up to 40 C
max. 0.5A;
Up to 55 C
max. 0.4A
Up to 40 C
max. 0.9A;
Up to 55 C
max. 0.7A
Yes, electronic
Sensor selection data
Input voltage
Rated value
With signal ”1”
With signal ”0”
24 VDC
13 to 30 V
– 3 to 5 V
Input current
With signal ”1”Typ. 10 mA
Input delay (parameteriza-
ble)
At ”0” to ”1” and at ”1”
to ”0”Typ. 0.5 ms
Typ. 3 ms
Typ. 15 ms
Typ. 20 ms
Input characteristic To IEC 61131, Type 2
Connection of two-wire
BEROs
Permissible
closed-circuit current
Possible
Max. 1.5 mA **
* Please note the total current per ET 200X.
** The required closed-circuit current for wire break
detection is 0.6 mA < I < 1.5 mA
Technical Specifications
7-44 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
7.10 EM 141 DI 8 DC 24V expansion module
(6ES7 141-1BF41-0XA0)
Features
The EM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V expansion module with the order number
6ES7 141-1BF41-0XA0 has the following features:
8 digital inputs
Rated input voltage of 24 VDC
Suitable for switches and proximity switches (BEROs)
Pinout of the sockets for DI
The following table shows the pinout of the eight sockets used to connect the
digital inputs. The connector wiring is described in Section 4.4.4. You can find the
layout of the sockets in Appendix C.
Table 7-22 Pinout of socket X1 to X8 for digital inputs
Pin Assignment
of socket X1 Assignment
of socket X2 Assignment
of socket X3 Assignment
of socket X4 Front view of
socket
1Sensor supply output 1L+
2not assigned
3Chassis ground, power supply 2
4Input signal,
channel 0 Input signal,
channel 1 Input signal,
channel 2 Input signal,
channel 3
13
4
5
5 PE
Pin Assignment
of socket X5 Assignment
of socket X6 Assignment
of socket X7 Assignment
of socket X8
1Sensor supply output L+
2not assigned
3Chassis ground, power supply
4Input signal,
channel 4 Input signal,
channel 5 Input signal,
channel 6 Input signal,
channel 7
5 PE
Covering up unused connections
You must seal off any connections which are not required with M12 screw caps, in
order to ensure that the degree of protection (IP 65, IP 66 or IP 67) is achieved.
Technical Specifications
7-45
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Basic circuit diagram
The basic circuit diagram of the expansion module is show below.
Backplane bus
interface
Socket connections
(see Table 7-22)
1L+ 1M
Supply voltage for
electronic components and
sensors via backplane bus
So. X1 So. X8So. X3
So. X2
Short-circuit
protection
Figure 7-10 Basic circuit diagram of expansion module EM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V
(6ES7 141-1BF41-0XA0)
Technical Specifications
7-46 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions
W H D (mm) 87 180
Weight Approx. 350 g
Module-specific data
Number of inputs 8
Cable length
Unshielded Max. 30 m
Voltages, currents, potentials
Maximum number of in-
puts driven simulta-
neously
All installed positions
max. 55 C
8
Electrical isolation No
Permissible potential diffe-
rence
Between different
circuits 75 VDC, 60 VAC
Insulation tested with 500 VDC
Power input
From backplane bus
(1L+) Max. 10 mA
Power loss of module Typ. 1.5 W
Status, alarms, diagnostics
Status display Green LED per chan-
nel
Alarms None
Sensor supply outputs
Outputs
Output current*
Short-circuit protection
8
Up to 40 C max. 1A;
Up to 55 C
max. 0.8A
Yes, electronic
Sensor selection data
Input voltage
Rated value
With signal ”1”
With signal ”0”
24 VDC
13 to 30 V
– 3 to 5 V
Input current
With signal ”1”Typ. 7 mA
Input delay
From ”0” to ”1”
From ”1” to ”0”1.2 to 4.8 ms
1.2 to 4.8 ms
Input characteristic To IEC 61131, Type 1
Connection of two-wire
BEROs
Permissible
closed-circuit current
Possible
Max. 1.5 mA
* Please note the total current per ET 200X.
Technical Specifications
7-47
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
7.11 EM 141 DI 8 DC 24V DIAG expansion module
(6ES7 141-1BF40-0XB0)
Hardware
The expansion module can be used together with the following basic modules:
BM 141 DI 8DC 24V, 6ES7 141-1BF01-0XB0, from product version 05
6ES7 141-1BF11-0XB0, from product version 01
6ES7 141-1BF12-0XB0, from product version 01
BM 141 DI 8DC 24V ECOFAST,
6ES7 141-1BF00-0AB0, from product version 01
6ES7 141-1BF01-0AB0, from product version 01
BM 141 DI 8DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG,
6ES7 141-1BF40-0AB0, from product version 01
BM 142 DO 4DC 24V/2A, 6ES7 142-1BD11-0XB0, from product version 05
6ES7 142-1BD21-0XB0, from product version 01
6ES7 142-1BD22-0XB0, from product version 01
BM 143-DESINA FO, 6ES7 143-1BF00-0XB0, from product version 01
BM 143-DESINA RS485, 6ES7 143-1BF00-0AB0, from product version 01
BM 147/CPU, 6ES7 147-1AA00-0XB0, from product version 01
Features
The EM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V DIAG expansion module with the order number
6ES7 141-1BF40-0XB0 has the following features:
8 digital inputs
Rated input voltage of 24 VDC
Suitable for switches and proximity switches (BEROs)
Diagnostic interrupt for short circuit and wire break for each channel
Hardware interrupt for rising and falling pulse edge for each channel
Long type (180 mm)
Parameterizable input delays
Pinout of the sockets for DI
The following table shows the pinout of the eight sockets used to connect the
digital inputs. You can find the wiring of the connector in the ET 200X manual,
Section 4.4.4. You can find the layout of the sockets in the ET 200X manual,
Appendix C.
Technical Specifications
7-48 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Table 7-23 Pinout of sockets X1 to X8 for digital inputs
Pin Assignment
of socket X1 Assignment
of socket X2 Assignment
of socket X3 Assignment
of socket X4 Front view of
socket
1Sensor supply output 1L+
2not assigned
3Chassis ground, power supply 2
4Input signal,
channel 0 Input signal,
channel 1 Input signal,
channel 2 Input signal,
channel 3
13
4
5
5 PE
Pin Assignment
of socket X5 Assignment
of socket X6 Assignment
of socket X7 Assignment
of socket X8
1Sensor supply output 1L+
2not assigned
3Chassis ground, power supply
4Input signal,
channel 4 Input signal,
channel 5 Input signal,
channel 6 Input signal,
channel 7
5 PE
Covering up unused connections
You must seal off any connections which are not required with M12 screw caps, in
order to ensure that the degree of protection (IP 65, IP 66 or IP 67) is achieved.
Basic circuit diagram
The basic circuit diagram of the expansion module is show below.
Backplane bus
interface
Socket connections
(see Table 7-22)
1L+ 1M
Supply voltage for
electronic components and
sensors via backplane bus
So. X1 So. X8So. X3
So. X2
Short-circuit
protection
Short-circuit
protection
Short-circuit
protection
Short-circuit
protection
Figure 7-11 Basic circuit diagram of expansion module EM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V DIAG
(6ES7 141-1BF40-0XB0)
Technical Specifications
7-49
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Parameters
The following table summarizes the parameters that you can set for the expansion
module.
Table 7-24 Parameters of the EM 141 DI 8 DC 24V DIAG
Parameters Range Default Area affected
Input delay10.5 ms/ 3 ms/ 15 ms/
20 ms 3 ms Module
Diagnosis: short circuit
to M Yes/no No Channel
Diagnosis: wire break Yes/no No Channel
Diagnostic interrupt Yes/no No Module
Hardware interrupt Yes/no No Module
Hardware interrupt on
rising edge2Yes/no No Channel
Hardware interrupt on
falling edge2Yes/no No Channel
1The input delay applies at ”0” to ”1” and at ”1” to ”0”.
2These parameters can only be set if you enable the hardware interrupt parameter.
Technical Specifications
7-50 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Technical data
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions
W H D (mm) 87 180 55
Weight Approx. 350 g
Module-specific data
Number of inputs 8
Cable length
Unshielded Max. 30 m
Voltages, currents, potentials
Maximum number of in-
puts driven simulta-
neously
All installed positions
max. 55 C
8
Electrical isolation No
Permissible potential diffe-
rence
Between different
circuits 75 VDC, 60 VAC
Insulation tested with 500 VDC
Power input
From backplane bus
(1L+) Max. 30 mA
Power loss of module Typ. 1.5 W
Status, alarms, diagnostics
Status display Green LED per chan-
nel
Alarms Hardware interrupt
Diagnostic interrupt
Hardware interrupt Configurable
Diagnostic interrupt Configurable
Diagnostic functions Configurable
Group error Red LED (SF)
Channel error display red LED per channel
Reading diagnostic
information Possible
Sensor supply outputs
Outputs
Output current*
Aggregate current
Short-circuit protection
8
Up to 40 C
max. 0.5A;
Up to 55 C
max. 0.4A
Up to 40 C max. 1A;
Up to 55 C max.
0.8A
Yes, electronic
Sensor selection data
Input voltage
Rated value
With signal ”1”
With signal ”0”
24 VDC
13 to 30 V
– 3 to 5 V
Input current
With signal ”1”Typ. 10 mA
Input delay (parameteriza-
ble)
At ”0” to ”1” and at ”1”
to ”0”Typ. 0.5 ms
Typ. 3 ms
Typ. 15 ms
Typ. 20 ms
Input characteristic To IEC 61131, Type 2
Connection of two-wire
BEROs
Permissible
closed-circuit current
Possible
Max. 1.5 mA **
* Please note the total current per ET 200X.
** The required closed-circuit current for wire break
detection is 0.6 mA < I < 1.5 mA
Technical Specifications
7-51
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
7.12 EM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/0.5A expansion module
(6ES7 142-1BD30-0XA0)
Features
The EM 142 DO 4 DC 24V/0.5A expansion module; order number
6ES7 142-1BD30-0XA0 has the following features:
4 digital outputs
Output current 0.5 A per output
Rated load voltage 24 VDC
Suitable for solenoids, DC contactors and indicator lights
Pinout of the sockets for DO
The following table shows the pinout of the four sockets used to connect the digital
outputs. You can find the layout of the sockets in Appendix C. The connector wiring
is described in Section 4.4.3.
Table 7-25 Pinout of the sockets for 4-channel digital outputs
Pin Assignment of
socket X1 Assignment of
socket X2 Assignment of
socket X3 Assignment of
socket X4 Front view
of socket
(Front)
1–
2Output signal,
channel 1* –Output signal,
channel 3* –
2
3Chassis ground, load power supply 1
2
3
5
4Output signal,
channel 0 Output signal,
channel 1* Output signal,
channel 2 Output signal,
channel 3* 4
5 PE
*Note: Channel 1 and channel 3 are only allowed to be used at one socket (X1/X2 or X3/X4).
Technical Specifications
7-52 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Basic circuit diagram
The basic circuit diagram of the expansion module is shown below.
Socket connections
(see Table 7-30)
Backplane bus
interface
2M
2L+ 2M
Load power supply via
backplane bus
Figure 7-12 Basic circuit diagram of expansion module EM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/0.5A
Covering up unused connections
You must seal off any connections which are not required with M12 screw caps, in
order to ensure that the degree of protection (IP 65, IP 66 or IP 67) is achieved.
Technical Specifications
7-53
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions
W H D (mm) 87 110 55
Weight Approx. 250 g
Module-specific data
Number of outputs 4
Cable length
Unshielded Max. 30 m
Voltages, currents, potentials
Aggregate current of out-
puts
All installation positions
To 55 CMax. 2 A
Electrical isolation
Between backplane bus
and all other circuit
components
Between channels
Yes
No
Permissible potential diffe-
rence
Between different
circuits 75 VDC, 60 VAC
Insulation tested with 500 VDC
Power input
From backplane bus
(1L+)
From load voltage 2L+
(without load)
Max. 28.5 mA
Max. 6 mA
Power loss of module Typ. 1.2 W
Status, alarms, diagnostics
Status display Green LED per
channel
Alarms None
Actuator selection data
Output voltage
With signal ”1”
Output current
With signal ”1”
Rated value
Permissible range
With signal ”0” (residual
current)
Min. of 2L+ (–0.8 V)
0.5 A
5 mA to 0.6 A
Max. 0.1 mA
Load resistance range 48 W to 4 kW
Lamp load Max. 5 W
Parallel connection of two
outputs
For redundant control of
load
For performance
improvement
Possible
(outputs in same
group only)
Not possible
Driving a digital input Possible
Switching frequency
Resistive load
Inductive load to
IEC 947-5-1, DC13
Lamp load
Max. 100 Hz
Max. 0.5 Hz
Max. 1 Hz
Limitation (internal) of vol-
tage induced on circuit in-
terruption
Typ. 2L+ (– 47 V)
Short-circuit protection for
output
Response threshold
Yes, electronic
Typ. 1 A
Technical Specifications
7-54 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
7.13 EM 142 DO 4 DC 24V/2A expansion module
(6ES7 142-1BD40-0XA0)
Features
The EM 142 DO 4 DC 24V/2A expansion module; order number
6ES7 142-1BD40-0XA0 has the following features:
4 digital outputs
Output current 2 A per output
Rated load voltage 24 VDC
Suitable for solenoids, DC contactors and indicator lights
Pinout of the sockets for DO
The following table shows the pinout of the four sockets used to connect the digital
outputs. You can find the layout of the sockets in Appendix C The connector wiring
is described in Section 4.4.3.
Table 7-26 Pinout of the sockets for 4-channel digital outputs
Pin Assignment of
socket X1 Assignment of
socket X2 Assignment of
socket X3 Assignment of
socket X4 Front view
of socket
(Front)
1–
2Output signal,
channel 1* –Output signal,
channel 3* –
2
3Chassis ground, load power supply 1
2
3
5
4Output signal,
channel 0 Output signal,
channel 1* Output signal,
channel 2 Output signal,
channel 3* 4
5 PE
*Note: Channel 1 and channel 3 are only allowed to be used at one socket (X1/X2 or X3/X4).
Technical Specifications
7-55
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Basic circuit diagram
The basic circuit diagram of the expansion module is shown below.
Socket connections
(see Table 7-26)
Backplane bus
interface
2M
2L+ 2M
Load power supply via
backplane bus
Figure 7-13 Basic circuit diagram of expansion module EM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A
Covering up unused connections
You must seal off any connections which are not required with M12 screw caps, in
order to ensure that the degree of protection (IP 65, IP 66 or IP 67) is achieved.
Technical Specifications
7-56 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions
W H D (mm) 87 110 55
Weight Approx. 250 g
Module-specific data
Number of outputs 4
Cable length
Unshielded Max. 30 m
Voltages, currents, potentials
Aggregate current of out-
puts
All installation positions
To 20 C
To 55 CMax. 6 A
Max. 4 A
Electrical isolation
Between backplane bus
and all other circuit
components
Between channels
Yes
No
Permissible potential diffe-
rence
Between different
circuits 75 VDC, 60 VAC
Insulation tested with 500 VDC
Power input
From backplane bus
(1L+)
From load voltage 2L+
(without load)
Max. 28.5 mA
Max. 12 mA
Power loss of module Typ. 2.1 W
Status, alarms, diagnostics
Status display Green LED per
channel
Alarms None
Actuator selection data
Output voltage
With signal ”1”
Output current
With signal ”1”
Rated value
Permissible range
With signal ”0” (residual
current)
Min. of 2L+ (–0.8 V)
2 A
5 mA to 2.4 A
Max. 0.5 mA
Load resistance range 12 W to 4 kW
Lamp load Max. 10 W
Parallel connection of two
outputs
For redundant control of
load
For performance
improvement
Possible
(outputs in same
group only)
Not possible
Driving a digital input Possible
Switching frequency
Resistive load
Inductive load to
IEC 947-5-1, DC13
Lamp load
Max. 100 Hz
Max. 0.5 Hz
Max. 1 Hz
Limitation (internal) of vol-
tage induced on circuit in-
terruption
Typ. 2L+ (– 47 V)
Short-circuit protection for
output
Response threshold
Yes, electronic
Typ. 3 A
Technical Specifications
7-57
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
7.14 EM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A expansion module
(6ES7 142-1BD40-0XB0)
Hardware
The expansion module can be used together with the following basic modules:
BM 141 DI 8DC 24V, 6ES7 141-1BF01-0XB0, from product version 05
6ES7 141-1BF11-0XB0, from product version 01
6ES7 141-1BF12-0XB0, from product version 01
BM 141 DI 8DC 24V ECOFAST,
6ES7 141-1BF00-0AB0, from product version 01
6ES7 141-1BF01-0AB0, from product version 01
BM 141 DI 8DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG,
6ES7 141-1BF40-0AB0, from product version 01
BM 142 DO 4DC 24V/2A, 6ES7 142-1BD11-0XB0, from product version 05
6ES7 142-1BD21-0XB0, from product version 01
6ES7 142-1BD22-0XB0, from product version 01
BM 143-DESINA FO, 6ES7 143-1BF00-0XB0, from product version 01
BM 143-DESINA RS485, 6ES7 143-1BF00-0AB0, from product version 01
BM 147/CPU, 6ES7 147-1AA00-0XB0, from product version 01
Features
The EM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A expansion module, order number
6ES7 142-1BD40-0XB0, has the following features:
4 digital outputs
Output current 2 A per output
Rated load voltage 24 VDC
Suitable for solenoids, DC contactors and indicator lights
Parameterizable diagnostic interrupt
Parameterizable diagnostics
Parameterizable substitute value output
SF LED
Technical Specifications
7-58 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Pinout of the sockets for DO
The following table shows the pinout of the four sockets used to connect the digital
outputs. You can find the layout of the sockets in Appendix C. The connector wiring
is described in Section 4.4.4.
Table 7-27 Pinout of the sockets for 4-channel digital outputs
Pin Assignment of
socket X1 Assignment of
socket X2 Assignment of
socket X3 Assignment of
socket X4 Front view
of socket
(Front)
1–
2Output signal,
channel 1* –Output signal,
channel 3* –
2
3Chassis ground, load power supply 1
2
3
5
4Output signal,
channel 0 Output signal,
channel 1* Output signal,
channel 2 Output signal,
channel 3* 4
5
5 PE
*Note: Channel 1 and channel 3 are only allowed to be used at one socket (X1/X2 or X3/X4).
Basic circuit diagram
The basic circuit diagram of the expansion module is shown below.
Socket con-
nections (see
Table 7-27)
Backplane bus
interface
2M
2L+ 2M
Load power supply via
backplane bus
SF
Figure 7-14 Basic circuit diagram of expansion module EM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A
Covering up unused connections
You must seal off any connections which are not required with M12 screw caps, in
order to ensure that the degree of protection (IP 65, IP 66 or IP 67) is achieved.
Technical Specifications
7-59
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Parameters
The following table summarizes the parameters that you can set for the expansion
module.
In Section 5.4 you will find the parameterizable diagnostics and in Section 5.5 you
will find an in-depth description of diagnostic and hardware interrupt handling. You
can find the layout of the parameter assignment frame and the assignment of the
bits including the parameters of the digital outputs in the configuration and
parameter assignment frame for the ET 200X at
http://www.ad.siemens.de/simatic-cs.
Table 7-28 Parameters of the EM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A
Parameters Range Default Area affected
Enable
Diagnostic interrupt Yes/no No Expansion module
Diagnosis
Wire break
Short-circuit to M
Short-circuit to L+
Yes/no
Yes/no
Yes/no
No
No
No
Channel
Behavior upon CPU
STOP Set substitute value/
maintain last value/no
current or voltage
No current or voltage Channel
Substitute value* 0/1 0 Channel
* Substitute values are current or voltage values that are output upon STOP of the master CPU by the
expansion module to the process.
Technical Specifications
7-60 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Effect of the supply voltage and the operating mode
The output values of the module are dependent on the supply voltage for the
electronics/sensors and on the operating status of the PLC (CPU of the DP
master).
Table 7-29 Dependencies of digital output values on the operating status of the PLC (CPU of DP master)
and L + supply voltage
Operating mode
of the PLC (CPU
of the DP master)
Supply voltage L + to
ET 200X Output value of expansion module
Power RUN L + applied PLC value
on L + not applied 0 V
Power STOP L + applied Substitute value/last value (default:0 V)
on L + not applied 0 V
Power
off –L + applied After current operation: substitute value/last value
(default: 0 V)
Upon commissioning the DP slave: 0 V
L + not applied 0 V
Supply voltage on/off
A failure of the supply voltage to the electronics/sensors on the ET 200X is always
displayed by the ”ON” LED on the basic module and also entered in the diagnostic
data area of the basic module.
Technical Specifications
7-61
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions
W H D (mm) 87 110 55
Weight Approx. 250 g
Module-specific data
Number of outputs 4
Cable length
Unshielded Max. 30 m
Voltages, currents, potentials
Aggregate current of out-
puts
All installation positions
To 20 C
To 55 CMax. 6 A
Max. 4 A
Electrical isolation
Between backplane bus
and all other circuit
components
Between channels
Yes
No
Permissible potential diffe-
rence
Between different
circuits 75 VDC, 60 VAC
Insulation tested with 500 VDC
Power input
From backplane bus
(1L+)
From load voltage 2L+
(without load)
Max. 40 mA
Max. 60 mA
Power loss of module Typ. 2.5 W
Status, alarms, diagnostics
Status display Green LED per
channel
Alarms Diagnostic interrupt
Diagnostic functions
Group error Configurable
Red LED (SF)
Actuator selection data
Output voltage
With signal ”1”
Output current
With signal ”1”
Rated value
Permissible range
With signal ”0” (residual
current)
Min. of 2L+ (–0.8 V)
2 A
6 mA to 2.4 A
Max. 0.5 mA
Load resistance range 12 W to 4 kW
Lamp load Max. 10 W
Parallel connection of two
outputs
For redundant control of
load
For performance
improvement
Possible
(outputs in same
group only)
Not possible
Driving a digital input Possible at minimum
current of 6 mA
Switching frequency
Resistive load
Inductive load to
IEC 947-5-1, DC13
Lamp load
Max. 100 Hz
Max. 0.5 Hz
Max. 1 Hz
Limitation (internal) of vol-
tage induced on circuit in-
terruption
Typ. 2L+ (– 53 V)
Short-circuit protection for
output
Response threshold
Yes, electronic
Typ. 3.5 A
Technical Specifications
7-62 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
7.15 EM 142 DO 8 x DC 24V/1.2A expansion module
(6ES7 142-1BF30-0XA0)
Features
The expansion module EM 142 DO 8 x DC 24V/1.2A; order number
6ES7 142-1BF30-0XA0, has the following features:
8 digital outputs
Output current 1.2 A per output
Rated load voltage 24 VDC
Suitable for solenoids, DC contactors and indicator lights
Pinout of the sockets for DO
The following table shows the pinout of the four sockets used to connect the digital
outputs. You can find the layout of the sockets in
Appendix C. The connector wiring is described in Section 4.4.4.
Table 7-30 Pin assignment of sockets for 8-channel digital outputs
Pin Assignment of
socket X1 Assignment of
socket X2 Assignment of
socket X3 Assignment of
socket X4 Front view
of socket
(Front)
1not assigned
2not assigned
3Chassis ground, load power supply 2
4Output signal,
channel 0 Output signal,
channel 1 Output signal,
channel 2 Output signal,
channel 3
13
4
5
5 PE
Pin Assignment of
socket X5 Assignment of
socket X6 Assignment of
socket X7 Assignment of
socket X8
1not assigned
2not assigned
3Chassis ground, load power supply
4Output signal,
channel 4 Output signal,
channel 5 Output signal,
channel 6 Output signal,
channel 7
5 PE
Technical Specifications
7-63
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Basic circuit diagram
The following Figure shows the basic circuit diagram for the expansion module.
Socket connections
(see Table 7-30)
Backplane bus
interface
2M
2L+ 2M
Load power supply via
backplane bus
Figure 7-15 Basic circuit diagram for expansion module EM 142 DO 8 x DC 24V/1.2A
Covering up unused connections
You must seal off any connections which are not required with M12 screw caps, in
order to ensure that the degree of protection (IP 65, IP 66 or IP 67) is achieved.
Technical Specifications
7-64 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions
W H D (mm) 87 180 55
Weight Approx. 350 g
Module-specific data
Number of outputs 8
Cable length
Unshielded Max. 30 m
Voltages, currents, potentials
Aggregate current of out-
puts
All installation positions
to 20 C
to 50 Cmax. 7 A
max. 5 A
Electrical isolation
Between backplane bus
and all other circuit
components
Between channels
Yes
No
Permissible potential diffe-
rence
Between different
circuits 75 VDC, 60 VAC
Insulation tested with 500 VDC
Power input
From backplane bus
(1L+)
From load voltage 2L+
(without load)
Max. 35 mA
Max. 12 mA
Power loss of module Typ. 1.5 W
Status, alarms, diagnostics
Status display Green LED per
channel
Alarms None
Actuator selection data
Output voltage
With signal ”1”
Output current
With signal ”1”
Rated value
Permissible range
With signal ”0” (residual
current)
min. 2L+ (–1.2 V)
1.2 A
5 mA to 13 A
Max. 0.5 mA
Load resistance range 21 W to 4 kW
Lamp load Max. 10 W
Parallel connection of two
outputs
For redundant control of
load
For performance
improvement
Possible
(outputs in same
group only)
Not possible
Driving a digital input Possible
Switching frequency
Resistive load
Inductive load to
IEC 947-5-1, DC13
Lamp load
Max. 100 Hz
Max. 0.5 Hz
Max. 1 Hz
Limitation (internal) of vol-
tage induced on circuit in-
terruption
Typ. 2L+ (– 47 V)
Short-circuit protection for
output
Response threshold
Yes, electronic
Typ. 1.8 A
Technical Specifications
7-65
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
7.16 EM 143-DESINA expansion module
(6ES7 143-1BF30-0XB0)
Features
The EM 143-DESINA expansion module (order number 6ES7 143-1BF30-0XB0)
has the following features:
8 digital inputs or outputs (individually parameterizable as input or output) plus 8
diagnostic inputs or inputs with NC functionality (individually parameterizable).
Rated input voltage of 24 VDC
Digital inputs are suitable for switches and proximity switches (BERO switches)
Digital outputs are suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors and indicator
lights
Pinout of the sockets for DI/DO
The tables below show the pinouts of the 8 sockets for connecting digital inputs
and outputs. The connector wiring is described in Section 4.4.4. The arrangement
of sockets X1 to X8 on the module in Appendix C.
Table 7-31 Pinout of sockets X1, X3, X5 and X7 for digital inputs or outputs
Pin Assignment
of socket X1 Assignment
of socket X3 Assignment
of socket X5 Assignment
of socket X7 Front view of
socket
(Front view)
1Non-switched supply voltage DC 24V-NS
2 Diagnostics
input or input
with NC
functionality
Diagnostics
input or input
with NC
functionality
Diagnostics
input or input
with NC
functionality
Diagnostics
input or input
with NC
functionality 2
3Chassis ground, power supply 1
2
3
5
4* Digital input or
output
(DESINA)
channel 0
Digital input or
output
(DESINA)
channel 2
Digital input or
output
(DESINA)
channel 4
Digital input or
output
(DESINA)
channel 6
4
5not assigned
* If it is parameterized as a digital output, pin 4 is fed by the DC 24V-S switched supply voltage.
Technical Specifications
7-66 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Table 7-32 Pinout of sockets X2, X4, X6 and X8 for digital inputs or outputs
Pin Assignment
of socket X2 Assignment
of socket X4 Assignment
of socket X6 Assignment
of socket X8 Front view of
socket
(Front view)
1Non-switched supply voltage DC 24V-NS
2 Diagnostics
input or input
with NC
functionality
Diagnostics
input or input
with NC
functionality
Diagnostics
input or input
with NC
functionality
Diagnostics
input or input
with NC
functionality 2
3Chassis ground, power supply 1
2
3
5
4* Digital input or
output
(DESINA)
channel 1
Digital input or
output
(DESINA)
channel 3
Digital input or
output
(DESINA)
channel 5
Digital input or
output
(DESINA)
channel 7
4
5
5not assigned
* If it is parameterized as a digital output, pin 4 is fed by the DC 24V-NS non-switched supply voltage.
Covering up unused connections
You must seal off any connections which are not required with M12 screw caps, in
order to ensure that the degree of protection (IP 65, IP 66 or IP 67) is achieved.
Basic circuit diagram
The basic circuit diagram of the expansion module is shown below.
Backplane bus
interface
Supply voltage for electronic
components and sensors via
backplane bus
Parameterizable digital in-
puts and outputs
X1 X3 X5 X7 X2 X4 X6 X8
DC 24V-S
(for digital outputs only)
DC 24 V-NS
Figure 7-16 Basic circuit diagram of expansion module EM 143-DESINA
Technical Specifications
7-67
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Parameters
The following table summarizes the parameters that you can set for the expansion
module.
Table 7-33 Parameters of the EM 143-DESINA for digital inputs and outputs
Parameters Range Default Area affected
Channel type for I/On
(n= 0...7) Digital input/
digital output Digital output
(Channel K0, K2, K4,
K6)
Digital input
(Channel K1, K3, K5,
K7)
Channel
Functional input In
(n=8...15) Diagnostic input/
diagnostic input with
diagnostic frame/
Input with NC function
Diagnostic input Channel
Response to
CPU/master STOP Output No current or
voltage
hold last value/
Apply substitute value/
Output No current or
voltage Channel
Substitute value On
(n=0...7) 0/1 0 Channel
Diagnostic interrupt Yes/no No Module
Technical Specifications
7-68 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions
W H D (mm) 87 180 55
Weight Approx. 350 g
Module-specific data
Number of channels 8 digital inputs and
outputs
8 functional
inputs (diagnostics
inputs or inputs with
NC functionality)
Cable length
Unshielded Max. 30 m
Voltages, currents, potentials
Maximum number of inputs
driven simultaneously
All installed positions
max. 55 C8
Aggregate current of out-
puts
All installation positions
To 20 C
To 50 CMax. 10 A
Max. 6 A
Electrical isolation
Between channels and
backplane bus No
Between channels No
Between load voltages No
Between load voltage
and all other circuitry No
Permissible potential diffe-
rence
Between different
circuits 75 VDC, 60 VAC
Insulation tested with 500 VDC
Power loss of module Typ. 1.5 W
Status, alarms, diagnostics
Status display Yellow LED per
channel
Indicator for functional input Yellow/red LED
per channel
Alarms Diagnostic interrupt
Diagnostic functions Configurable
Reading diagnostic
information Possible
Sensor supply outputs
Outputs
Output current
Short-circuit protection
8
Up to 40 C
max. 1 A;
Up to 55 C
max. 0.8 A
Yes, electronic
Sensor selection data
Input voltage for paramete-
rized DI (pin 4)
Rated value
With signal ”1”
With signal ”0”
24 VDC
13 to 30 V
–30 to 5V
Input voltage for functional
input (pin 2)
Rated value
With signal ”1”
With signal ”0”
24 VDC
13 to 30 V
–30 to 2 V
Input current
With signal ”1”Typ. 5 mA
Input delay
From ”0” to ”1”
From ”1” to ”0”1.2 to 4.8 ms
1.2 to 4.8 ms
Input characteristic To IEC 61131,
Type 2
Connection of two-wire
BEROs
Permissible
closed-circuit current
Possible
Max. 1.5 mA
Technical Specifications
7-69
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Actuator selection data
Output voltage
With signal ”1”
Output current
With signal ”1”
Nominal value
Permissible range
With signal ”0” (residual
current)
Min. NS/S (– 0.8 V)
1.2 A
7 mA to 1.3 A
Max. 0.5 mA
Load resistance range 21 ohms to 4 kohms
Lamp load Max. 10 W
Parallel connection of two
outputs No
Driving a digital input Possible
Switching frequency
Resistive load
Inductive load to
IEC 947-5-1, DC13
Lamp load
Max. 100 Hz
Max. 2 Hz
Max. 1 Hz
Limitation (internal) of vol-
tage induced on circuit in-
terruption
Typ. NS/S (– 47 V)
Output short-circuit protec-
tion
Response threshold
Yes, electronic
Typ. 1.8 A
Technical Specifications
7-70 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
7.17 EM 148-P DI 4 DC 24V/DO 2 P expansion module
(pneumatic module) (6ES7 148-1DA00-0XA0)
Features
The EM 148-P DI 4 x DC 24V/DO 2 x P expansion module, order number
6ES7 148-1DA00-0XA0, has the following features:
4 digital inputs
Rated input voltage of 24 VDC
Suitable for switches and proximity switches (BEROs)
2 digital outputs with 2 integrated 4/2-way valves
Permissible pressure range of 3 to 8 bars
Pinout of the sockets for DI
The following table shows the pinout of the two sockets used to connect the digital
inputs. The connector wiring is described in Section 4.4.4. You can find the layout
of the sockets in Appendix C.
Table 7-34 Pinout of the sockets for 2-channel digital inputs (pneumatic module)
Pin Assignment of socket X1 Assignment of socket X2 Front view of
socket
1Sensor supply output 1L+
2Input signal, channel 1 Input signal, channel 3 2
3Chassis ground, power supply 1
2
3
5
4Input signal, channel 0 Input signal, channel 2 4
5 PE
Covering up unused connections
You must seal off any connections which are not required with M12 screw caps, in
order to ensure that the degree of protection (IP 65) is achieved.
Switch-on sequence
The 4/2-way valve is not of the contention-free type.
Consequently, it is important to switch on the compressed air supply first, and then
switch on the voltage.
Technical Specifications
7-71
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Basic circuit diagram
The basic circuit diagram of the expansion module is shown below.
Backplane bus
interface
Socket connections (see Table 7-34)
1L+ 1M
Supply voltage for
electronic components and
sensors via backplane bus
So. X1 So. X2
2L+ 2M
Load power supply via
backplane bus
1M
1M
Figure 7-17 Basic circuit diagram for EM 148-P DI 4 x DC 24V/DO 2 x P expansion module
Pneumatic connection diagram
The pneumatic connection diagram of a 4/2-way valve is shown below.
42
1 3/5
14
Figure 7-18 Pneumatic connection diagram of a 4/2-way valve
Technical Specifications
7-72 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions
W H D (mm) 87 173 88
Weight Approx. 500 g
Module-specific data
Number of inputs 4 (electrical)
Number of outputs 4 (pneumatic)
Length of cable (inputs)
Unshielded Max. 30 m
Voltages, currents, potentials
Maximum number of inputs
driven simultaneously
All installation positions
To 55 C4
Permissible potential diffe-
rence
Between different
circuits 75 VDC, 60 VAC
Insulation tested with 500 VDC
Power input
From backplane bus
(1L+)
From 2L+ load voltage
(incl. valves)
Max. 40 mA
Max. 130 mA
Power loss of module Typ. 3 W
Status, alarms, diagnostics
Status display Green LED per
channel
Green LED per
valve
Alarms None
Sensor supply outputs
Outputs
Output current*
Short-circuit protection
2
Up to 40 C
max. 0.9A;
Up to 55 C
max. 0.7A
Yes, electronic
Sensor selection data
Input voltage
Rated value
With signal ”1”
With signal ”0”
24 VDC
13 to 30 V
– 3 to 5 V
Input current
With signal ”1”Typ. 7 mA
Input delay
From ”0” to ”1”
From ”1” to ”0”1.2 to 4.8 ms
1.2 to 4.8 ms
Input characteristic To IEC 61131,
Type 2
Connection of two-wire BE-
ROs
Permissible
closed-circuit current
Possible
Max. 1.5 mA
Valve outlets
Medium Compressed air (for
properties refer to
paragraph below)
Pressure range 3 to 8 bars
Rated flow 300 l/min
Valve switching times
On, change
Off
20 ms
20 ms
Current input per valve 50 mA
* Please note the total current per ET 200X.
Compressed air for valve outlets
You should operate the valves with filtered (40 mm), dried and oil-free compressed
air of Class 5 4 3 in accordance with ISO 8573-1.
Operation with filtered, dried and oiled compressed air of Class 5 4 5 is similarly
possible. For this purpose, use an oil that is included on FESTO’s list of proposed
oils:
Technical Specifications
7-73
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Table 7-35 Suitable types of oil for compressed air
Suitable oils Features
FESTO OFSW-32 Special Oil
ARAL Vitam GF 32
Esso Nuto H 32
Mobil DTE 24
BP Energol HLP-HM 32
DIN 51 524, Part 2 hydraulic oil, viscosity
32 mm2/s at 40 C (HLP 32)
Example of retrieving the 2 limits of travel of a pneumatic cylinder
In the table below you will find an excerpt from a STEP 7 user program for
retrieving the two limits of travel of a pneumatic cylinder.
Assumptions
The following assumptions apply to this STEP 7 user program:
In the example the pneumatic module is inserted directly adjacent to the basic
module. Its address is therefore 0.
The pneumatic cylinder is controlled by means of a valve on the pneumatic
module.
The inputs I 0.0 ”cylinder down” and I 0.1 ”cylinder up” are used for the
pneumatic cylinder limits of travel.
The pneumatic cylinder is controlled by means of output O 0.0.
STEP 7 user program
STL Description
U I 0.0
U M 0.0
S O 0.0
U I 0.1
U M 0.1
R O 0.0
When cylinder at limit of travel ”down”
and instruction ”cylinder up” queued
the output is set, i.e. cylinder moves upwards
When cylinder at limit of travel ”up”
and instruction ”cylinder down” queued
the output is reset, i.e. cylinder moves downwards
Technical Specifications
7-74 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
7.18 EM 148-P DO 16 P/CPV10 expansion module
(pneumatic interface module for CPV10)
(6ES7 148-1EH00-0XA0)
Installation next to motor starter (EM 300...)
You can install the expansion module immediately next to a motor starter, product
version 02.
Features
The EM 148-P DO 16 x P/CPV10 expansion module, order number
6ES7 148-1EH00-0XA0, has the following features:
16 digital outputs
Rated load voltage 24 VDC
Suitable for connecting a FESTO CPV10 valve island with up to 16 valves
Basic circuit diagram
The basic circuit diagram of the expansion module is shown below.
Backplane bus
interface
1M
2L+ 2M
Load power supply via
backplane bus
DO1
1M
DO2
DO16
Figure 7-19 Basic circuit diagram of the EM 148-P DO 16 x P/CPV10 expansion module
Technical Specifications
7-75
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Assigning addresses to the pneumatic interface module for the CPV10
The figure below shows the pneumatic interface module with FESTO CPV10 valve
island and addresses.
0.0
0.2
0.4
0.6
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
0.1
0.3
0.5
0.7
1.1
1.3
1.5
1.7
0.0
0.2
0.4
0.6
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
0.1
0.3
0.5
0.7
1.3
1.5
1.7 LEDs
1.1
Figure 7-20 Assigning addresses to the pneumatic interface module
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions
W H D (mm) 147 152 55
Weight Approx. 450 g
Module-specific data
Number of outputs 16
Voltages, currents, potentials
Electrical isolation
Between extension
interface and channels Yes, optocouplers
Between channels No
In groups of 16
Insulation tested with 500 VDC
Power input
From backplane bus
(1L+)
From 2L+ load voltage
(incl. CPV10 valves)
Max. 35 mA
Max. 320 mA
Power loss of module (incl.
valves) Typ. 6 W
Status, alarms, diagnostics
Status display Green LED per digi-
tal output
Alarms None
Valve island for connection meets following
conditions*
Medium Compressed air
filtered (40 mm)
Oiled (oil: VG 32)
Unoiled/vacuum
Pressure range 3 to 8 bars
Rated flow 400 l/min
Valve switching times
On, change
Off
17 ms
25 ms
Current input per valve 20 mA
* Further details on valve islands will be found in the FEST O
documentation on valve islands.
Technical Specifications
7-76 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
7.19 EM 148-P DO 16 P/CPV14 expansion module
(pneumatic interface module for CPV14)
(6ES7 148-1EH10-0XA0)
Installation next to motor starter (EM 300...)
You can install the expansion module immediately next to a motor starter, product
version 02.
Features
The EM 148-P DO 16 x P/CPV14 expansion module, order number
6ES7 148-1EH10-0XA0, has the following features:
16 digital outputs
Rated load voltage 24 VDC
Suitable for connecting a FESTO CPV14 valve island with up to 16 valves
Basic circuit diagram
The basic circuit diagram of the expansion module is shown below.
Backplane bus
interface
1M
2L+ 2M
Load power supply via
backplane bus
DO1
1M
DO2
DO16
Figure 7-21 Basic circuit diagram for EM 148-P DO 16 x P/CPV14 expansion module
Technical Specifications
7-77
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Address assignment for pneumatic interface module for CPV14
The figure below shows the pneumatic interface module with FESTO CPV 14 valve
island and addresses.
0.0
0.2
0.4
0.6
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
0.1
0.3
0.5
0.7
1.1
1.3
1.5
1.7
0.0
0.2
0.4
0.6
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
0.1
0.3
0.5
0.7
1.3
1.5
1.7 LEDs
1.1
Figure 7-22 Assigning addresses to the pneumatic interface module
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions
W H D (mm) 147 152 55
Weight Approx. 450 g
Module-specific data
Number of outputs 16
Voltages, currents, potentials
Electrical isolation
Between extension
interface and channels Yes, optocouplers
Between channels No
In groups of 16
Insulation tested with 500 VDC
Power input
From backplane bus
(1L+)
From 2L+ load voltage
(incl. CPV14 valves)
Max. 45 mA
Max. 520 mA
Power loss of module (incl.
valves) Typ. 9 W
Status, alarms, diagnostics
Status display Green LED per digi-
tal output
Alarms None
Valve island for connection meets following
conditions*
Medium Compressed air
filtered (40 mm)
Oiled (oil: VG 32)
Unoiled/vacuum
Pressure range 3 to 8 bars
Rated flow 800 l/min
Valve switching times
On, change
Off
24 msec
30 msec
Current input per valve 32 mA
* Further details on valve islands will be found in the FEST O
documentation on valve islands.
Technical Specifications
7-78 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
7.20 PM 148 DO 4 DC 24V/2A power module
(6ES7 148-1CA00-0XB0)
Hardware
The power module can be used together with the following basic modules:
BM 141 DI 8DC 24V, 6ES7 141-1BF01-0XB0, from product version 05
6ES7 141-1BF11-0XB0, from product version 01
6ES7 141-1BF12-0XB0, from product version 01
BM 141 DI 8DC 24V ECOFAST,
6ES7 141-1BF00-0AB0, from product version 01
6ES7 141-1BF01-0AB0, from product version 01
BM 141 DI 8DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG,
6ES7 141-1BF40-0AB0, from product version 01
BM 142 DO 4DC 24V/2A, 6ES7 142-1BD11-0XB0, from product version 05
6ES7 142-1BD21-0XB0, from product version 01
6ES7 142-1BD22-0XB0, from product version 01
BM 143-DESINA FO, 6ES7 143-1BF00-0XB0, version 01 or later
BM 143-DESINA RS485, 6ES7 143-1BF00-0AB0, version 01 or later
BM 147/CPU, 6ES7 147-1AA00-0XB0, version 01 or later
Features
The PM 148 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A power module, order number
6ES7 148-1CA00-0XB0, has the following features:
Connection for load voltage supply
4 digital outputs
Output current 2 A per output
Rated load voltage 24 VDC
Suitable for solenoids, DC contactors and indicator lights
Parameterizable diagnostic interrupt
Parameterizable diagnostics
Parameterizable substitute value output
Indicator for system fault (SF LED)
Indicator for load voltage (DC 24V LED)
Technical Specifications
7-79
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Pinout of sockets for DO
The following table shows the pinout of the four sockets used to connect the digital
outputs. You can find the layout of the sockets in Appendix C. The connector
wiring is described in Section 4.4.4.
Table 7-36 Pin assignment of sockets for 4-channel digital outputs
Pin Assignment of
socket X1 Assignment of
socket X2 Assignment of
socket X3 Assignment of
socket X4 Front view
of socket
(Front)
1–
2Output signal,
channel 1* –Output signal,
channel 3* –
2
3Chassis ground, load power supply 1
2
3
5
4Output signal,
channel 0 Output signal,
channel 1* Output signal,
channel 2 Output signal,
channel 3* 4
5 PE
*Note: Channel 1 and channel 3 are only allowed to be used at one socket (X1/X2 or X3/X4).
Basic circuit diagram
The basic circuit diagram of the power module is shown below.
24 VDC
Load voltage
monitor
2L+ 2M
Backplane bus
interface
2M
SF
Connector
Figure 7-23 Basic circuit diagram of power module PM 148 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A
(6ES7 148-1CA00-0XB0)
Covering up unused connections
You must seal off any connections which are not required with M12 screw caps, in
order to ensure that the degree of protection (IP 65, IP 66 or IP 67) is achieved.
Technical Specifications
7-80 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Parameters
The following table summarizes the parameters that you can set for the power
module.
In Section 5.4 you will find the parameterizable diagnostics and in Section 5.5 you
will find an in-depth description of diagnostic and hardware interrupt handling. You
can find the layout of the parameter assignment frame and the assignment of the
bits including the parameters of the digital outputs in the configuration and
parameter assignment frame for the ET 200X at
http://www.ad.siemens.de/simatic-cs.
Table 7-37 Parameters of the PM 148 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A
Parameters Range Default Area affected
Enable
Diagnostic interrupt Yes/no No Expansion module
Diagnosis
Wire break
Short-circuit to M
Short-circuit to L+
Yes/no
Yes/no
Yes/no
No
No
No
Channel
Behavior upon CPU
STOP Set substitute value/
maintain last value/no
current or voltage
No current or voltage Channel
Substitute value* 0/1 0 Channel
* Substitute values are current or voltage values that are output upon STOP of the master CPU by the
expansion module to the process.
Technical Specifications
7-81
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Effect of the supply voltage and the operating mode
The output values of the module are dependent on the supply voltage for the
electronics/sensors and on the operating status of the PLC (CPU of the DP
master).
Table 7-38 Dependencies of digital output values on the operating status of the PLC (CPU of DP master)
and L + supply voltage
Operating mode
of the PLC (CPU
of the DP master)
Supply voltage L + to
ET 200X Output value of power module
Power RUN L + applied PLC value
on L + not applied 0 V
Power STOP L + applied Substitute value/last value (default:0 V)
on L + not applied 0 V
Power
off –L + applied After current operation: substitute value/last value
(default: 0 V)
Upon commissioning the DP slave: 0 V
L + not applied 0 V
Supply voltage On/Off
A failure of the supply voltage to the electronics/sensors on the ET 200X is always
displayed by the ”ON” LED on the basic module and also entered in the diagnostic
data area of the basic module.
Technical Specifications
7-82 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions
W H D (mm) 87 165 67
Weight Approx. 250 g
Module-specific data
Number of outputs 4
Cable length
Unshielded Max. 30 m
Voltages, currents, potentials
Rated load voltage 2L + 24 VDC
Max. perm. power input
from load Up to 40 C 10 A
Up to 55 C 8 A
Aggregate current of out-
puts
All installation positions
Up to 20 C
Up to 55 CMax. 6 A
Max. 4 A
Electrical isolation
Between backplane bus
and all other circuit
components
Between channels
Between load power
supply and all other
circuit components
Yes
No
Yes
Permissible potential diffe-
rence
Between different
circuits 75 VDC, 60 VAC
Insulation tested with 500 VDC
Power input
From backplane bus
(1L+)
From load voltage 2L+
(without load)
Max. 40 mA
Max. 60 mA
Power loss of module Typ. 2.5 W
Status, alarms, diagnostics
Status display Green LED per
channel
Alarms Diagnostic interrupt
Diagnostic functions
Group error
Load voltage monitor
Configurable
Red LED (SF)
Green LED
(DC 24V)
Actuator selection data
Output voltage
With signal ”1”
Output current
With signal ”1”
Rated value
Permissible range
With signal ”0” (residual
current)
Min. of 2L+ (–0.8 V)
2 A
6 mA to 2.4 A
Max. 0.5 mA
Load resistance range 12 W to 4 kW
Lamp load Max. 10 W
Parallel connection of two
outputs
For redundant control of
load
For performance
improvement
Possible
(outputs in same
group only)
Not possible
Driving a digital input Possible at minimum
current of 6 mA
Switching frequency
Resistive load
Inductive load to
IEC 947-5-1, DC13
Lamp load
Max. 100 Hz
Max. 0.5 Hz
Max. 1 Hz
Limitation (internal) of vol-
tage induced on circuit in-
terruption
Typ. 2L+ (– 53 V)
Short-circuit protection for
output
Response threshold
Yes, electronic
Typ. 3.5 A
Technical Specifications
7-83
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
7.21 Expansion modules with analog inputs and outputs
Hardware
The expansion module can be used together with the following basic modules:
BM 141 DI 8DC 24V, 6ES7 141-1BF01-0XB0, from product version 05
6ES7 141-1BF11-0XB0, from product version 01
6ES7 141-1BF12-0XB0, from product version 01
BM 141 DI 8DC 24V ECOFAST,
6ES7 141-1BF00-0AB0, from product version 01
6ES7 141-1BF01-0AB0, from product version 01
BM 141 DI 8DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG,
6ES7 141-1BF40-0AB0, from product version 01
BM 142 DO 4DC 24V/2A, 6ES7 142-1BD11-0XB0, from product version 05
6ES7 142-1BD21-0XB0, from product version 01
6ES7 142-1BD22-0XB0, from product version 01
BM 143-DESINA FO, 6ES7 143-1BF00-0XB0, version 01 or later
BM 143-DESINA RS485, 6ES7 143-1BF00-0AB0, from product version 01
BM 147/CPU, 6ES7 147-1AA00-0XB0, from product version 01
EM with analog inputs
By means of expansion modules with analog inputs, continuously changing
signals, such as those that occur when measuring temperature or pressure, can be
recorded, evaluated and converted to digital values for further processing.
Features of the analog inputs
The expansion modules with analog inputs have the following features:
Different measuring ranges:
–10 V
–20 mA, 4 to 20 mA (four-wire measuring transducer, parameterizable)
–4 to 20-wire measuring transducer)
–Pt100 resistance thermometer (two-, three- or four-conductor connection
possible)
SIMATIC S7 and SIMATIC S5 data format (parameterizable)
Resolution of 12 bits plus sign
2 channels (same measuring range and data format for both channels of an
expansion module)
24 VDC supply voltage for expansion module and sensor via backplane bus
Analog inputs not isolated from the internal electronic components
Integration time 16.7 ms/20 ms (parameterizable)
Technical Specifications
7-84 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
EM with analog outputs
The expansion modules with analog outputs allow digital values inputted by means
of a controller to be converted in an expansion module to corresponding analog
signals (current or voltage) that control actuators (setpoint input for speed
controllers, temperature controllers, etc.).
Features of the analog outputs
The expansion modules with analog outputs have the following features:
Different measuring ranges:
–10 V
–20 mA, 4 to 20 mA (parameterizable)
SIMATIC S7 and SIMATIC S5 data format (parameterizable)
Resolution of 11 bits plus sign
2 channels (same measuring range and data format for both channels of an
expansion module)
24 VDC supply voltage
Analog outputs not isolated from the internal electronic components
Measuring ranges in SIMATIC S7 and S5 format
The following table compares the measuring ranges (rated ranges) in SIMATIC S7
and SIMATIC S5 format:
Table 7-39 Representation of measuring ranges for analog inputs
Measuring range Representation of the
rated ranges in
SIMATIC S7 format
Representation of the
rated ranges in
SIMATIC S5 format
±10 V
±20 mA –27648 to +27648 –2048 to +2048
4 to 20 mA 0 to +27648 512 to +2560
PT100 Standard 0.1 oC/digit 0.5 oC/digit
–100 to +850 oC–200 to +1700
–200 to +850 oC–2000 to +8500
Table 7-40 Representation of measuring ranges for analog outputs
Output range Representation of the
rated ranges in
SIMATIC S7 format
Representation of the
rated ranges in
SIMATIC S5 format
±10 V
±20 mA –27648 to +27648 –1024 to +1024
4 to 20 mA 0 to +27648 0 to +1024
Technical Specifications
7-85
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
7.21.1 Parameters of the analog inputs and outputs
Parameter assignment
You set the parameters of the analog inputs/outputs using either the STEP 7 or
COM PROFIBUS parameter assignment software.
Parameters
The tables below give an overview of the of the parameters that you can set for the
analog inputs and analog outputs.
You can find the layout of the parameter assignment frame and the assignment of
the bits including the parameters of the analog inputs and outputs in the
configuration and parameter assignment frame of the ET 200X at
http://www.ad.siemens.de/simatic-cs. In Section 5.4 you will find the
parameterizable diagnostics and in Section 5.5 you will find an in-depth description
of diagnostic and hardware interrupt handling.
Table 7-41 Parameters of analog inputs
Expansion modules with Parameters Range Default Area affected
All Format SIMATIC S7
format/
SIMATIC S5
format
SIMATIC S7
format Expansion Module
All Enable
Diagnostic
interrupt
Hardware
interrupt
upon limit
value
violation
Yes/no
Yes/no
No
No
Expansion module
All Diagnosis
Group
diagnosis Yes/no No Channel
EM 144 AI 2 I
(6ES7 144-1GB31-0XB0 and
6ES7 144-1GB41-0XB0)
EM 144 AI 2 RTD
(6ES7 144-1JB31-0XB0)
Diagnosis
With wire
break
check
Yes/no No Channel
EM 144 AI 2 I
(6ES7 144-1GB31-0XB0) Measuring
range 20 mA/4 to
20 mA 4 to 20 mA Channel
EM 145 AO 2 I
(6ES7 145-1GB31-0XB0) Measuring
range 20 mA/4 to
20 mA 4 to 20 mA Channel
All Reset time116.7 ms/20 ms 20 ms Channel (module
channels must be
identically set)
Technical Specifications
7-86 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Table 7-41 Parameters of analog inputs, Fortsetzung
Expansion modules with Area affectedDefaultRangeParameters
All Trigger for
hardware
interrupt
Upper limit
value
Lower limit
value
From 32511 to
–32512
From –32512
to 32511
–
–
Channel
1For optimum interference suppression of the analog modules as a function of the system frequency
(at 50 Hz, 20 msec reset time; at 60 Hz, 16.7 msec reset time)
Table 7-42 Parameters of analog outputs
Expansion
modules with
AOs
Parameters Range Default Area affected
All Format SIMATIC S7
format/
SIMATIC S5
format
SIMATIC S7
format Expansion module
All Enable
Diagnostic
interrupt Yes/no No Expansion module
All Diagnosis
Group
diagnosis Yes/no No Channel
All Behavior upon
CPU STOP Set substitute
value/ maintain last
value/no current or
voltage
No current or
voltage Channel
All Substitute value* 0/1 0 Channel
* Substitute values are current or voltage values that are output upon STOP of the master CPU by the
module with analog outputs to the process.
Technical Specifications
7-87
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
7.21.2 Analog value representation for measuring ranges with
SIMATIC S7
Analog value representation
The digitized analog value for input and output values in the same rated range is
the same.
The analog values are represented in the form of a twos complement.
The following table shows the analog value representation of the expansion
modules with analog inputs and outputs:
Table 7-43 Analog value representation (SIMATIC S7 format)
Resolution Analog value
Bit number 15 14 13 12 11 109876543210
Significance of the bits +/
–214 213 212 211 210 29282726252423222120
Sign
The sign (+/–) of the analog value is always in bit number 15:
”0”
”1”
Measured-value resolution
In the table below you will find the representation of the binary analog values and
the associated decimal and hexadecimal representation of the units of the analog
values.
The analog inputs have a resolution of 12 bits + plus/minus sign, whereas the
analog outputs have a resolution of 11 bits + plus/minus sign. Each analog value is
entered in the accumulator with left justification. The bits marked ”x” are set to ”0”.
Note: This resolution does not apply to temperature values. The converted
temperature values are the result of a conversion in the expansion module (see
Table 7-47).
Table 7-44 Measured-value resolution of the analog values (SIMATIC S7 format)
Units Analog value
Resolution in
bits (plus +/–)Decimal Hexadeci-
mal High byte Low byte
11 16 10H+/– 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 x x x x
12 8 8H+/– 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 x x x
Technical Specifications
7-88 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
7.21.3 Analog value representation for the measuring ranges of the
analog inputs and outputs (SIMATIC S7 Format)
The tables in this chapter contain the digitized analog values for the measuring
ranges of the expansion modules with analog inputs and outputs.
The binary representation of the analog values is always the same, so these tables
only compare the measuring ranges and the units.
Technical Specifications
7-89
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Input ranges 10 V 20 mA
The following table contains the representation of the digitized measured value for
the:
For the voltage measuring range 10 V and
For the current measuring range 20 mA.
Table 7-45 SIMATIC S7 format: representation of the digitized measured value +/–10 V ;
+/–20 mA (expansion modules with analog inputs)
Measuring
Measuring
Units
range 10 V range 20 mA Decimal Hexadecimal Range
> 11.7589 > 23.515 32767 7FFFHOverflow
11.7589 23.515 32511 7EFFH
: : : : Overrange
10.0004 20.0007 27649 6C01H
10.00 20.000 27648 6C00H
7.50 14.998 20736 5100H
: : : : Rated range
– 7.50 – 14.998 –20736 AF00H
– 10.00 – 20.000 –27648 9400H
– 10.0004 – 20.0007 –27649 93FFH
: : : : Underrange
– 11.759 – 23.516 –32512 8100H
<– 11.759 <– 23.516 –32768 8000HUnderflow
Technical Specifications
7-90 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Input range 4 to 20 mA
The following table contains the representation of the digitized measured value for
the:
Current measuring range 4 to 20 mA
Table 7-46 SIMATIC S7 format: representation of the digitized measured value 4 to 20 mA
(expansion module with analog inputs)
Measuring range Units
from 4
to 20 mA Decimal Hexadecimal Range
>22.810 32767 7FFFHOverflow
22.810 32511 7EFFH
: : : Overrange
20.0005 27649 6C01H
20.000 27648 6C00H
16.000 20736 5100H
: : : Rated range
4.000 0 0H
3.9995 –1 FFFFH
: : : Underrange
1.1852 –4864 ED00H
1.1852 –32768 8000HUnderflow
Relationship between ”Wire break” and measuring range
If the ”wire break” parameter is deactivated in the configuration software and the
measuring range 1.1 mA, then ”8000H” is output and bit 6 ”measuring range
underflow” is set in byte 21 of the station diagnosis.
If the ”wire break” parameter is activated and the measuring range 3.6 mA, then
”8000H” is output and bit 4 ”wire break” is set in byte 21 of the station diagnosis.
Technical Specifications
7-91
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Standard temperature range, Pt 100
In the following table you will find the representation of the digitized measured
value for the standard temperature range of the Pt 100 sensor. The characteristic
linearization applies to the following temperature ranges: – 200 C to + 850 C (in
increments of 0.1 C).
Table 7-47 SIMATIC S7 format: representation of the digitized measured value for the
standard temperature range, Pt 100 (expansion module with analog inputs)
Measured va-
lue in CDecimal Hexadeci-
mal Range
> 1000.0 32767 7FFFHOverflow
1000.0
:
850.1
10000
:
8501
2710H
:
2135H
Overrange
850.0
:
–200.0
8500
:
–2000
2134H
:
F830H
Rated range
–200.1
:
–243.0
–2001
:
–2430
F82FH
:
F682H
Underrange
<– 243.0 –32768 8000HUnderflow
Technical Specifications
7-92 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Tables for output ranges
As of Table 7-48 you will find the analog output ranges of the expansion modules
with analog outputs.
Output ranges 10 V 20 mA
The following table contains the representation of the output ranges for the:
For the voltage output range 10 V and
For the current output range 20 mA.
Table 7-48 SIMATIC S7 format: representation of the analog output range +/–10 V ;
+/–20 mA
Output range
Output range
Units
10 V 20 mA Decimal Hexadecimal Range
0 0 >32511 >7EFFHOverflow
11.7589 23.515 32511 7EFFH
: : : : Overrange
10.0004 20.0007 27649 6C01H
10.00 20.000 27648 6C00H
7.50 14.998 20736 5100H
: : : : Rated range
– 7.50 – 14.998 –20736 AF00H
– 10.00 – 20.000 –27648 9400H
– 10.0004 –20.0007 –27649 93FFH
: : : : Underrange
– 11.7589 – 23.515 –32512 8100H
0 0 <–32512 <8100HUnderflow
Technical Specifications
7-93
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Output range 4 to 20 mA
The following table contains the representation of the current output range 4 to
20 mA.
Table 7-49 SIMATIC S7 format: representation of the analog current output range 4 to
20 mA
Output range Units Range
4 to 20 mA Decimal Hexadecimal
0 >32511 >7EFFHOverflow
22.8142 32511 7EFFH
: : : Overrange
20.0005 27649 6C01H
20.000 27648 6C00H
: : : Rated range
4.000 0 0H
3.9995 –1 FFFFH
: : : Underrange
0– 6912 E500H
0 <–6913 <E4FFHUnderflow
Technical Specifications
7-94 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
7.21.4 Analog value representation for measuring ranges with
SIMATIC S5
Analog value representation
The analog inputs have a resolution of 12 bits + plus/minus sign, whereas the
analog outputs have a resolution of 11 bits + plus/minus sign. Each analog value is
entered in the accumulator with left justification.
The analog values are represented in the form of a twos complement.
Analog inputs
The following table shows the analog value representation of the expansion
modules with analog inputs:
Table 7-50 Analog value representation of the analog inputs (SIMATIC S5 format)
Resolution Analog value
Bit number 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Significance of the bits +/
–211 210 29282726252423222120x F Ü
Sign
The sign (+/–) of the analog value is always in bit number 15:
”0”
”1”
Irrelevant bits
Irrelevant bits are marked ”x”.
Diagnostic bits
Bit numbers 0 and 1 are reserved for diagnostic functions, whereas bit number 2
does not have a function.
E = error bit (0 = no wire break; 1 = wire break)
O = overflow bit
Technical Specifications
7-95
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Analog outputs
The following table shows the analog value representation of the expansion
modules with analog outputs:
Table 7-51 Analog value representation of the analog outputs (SIMATIC S5 format)
Resolution Analog value
Bit number 15 14 13 12 11 109876543210
Significance of the bits +/
–210 29282726252423222120xxxx
7.21.5 Analog value representation for the measuring ranges of the
analog inputs and outputs (SIMATIC S5 format)
The tables in this chapter contain the digitized analog values for the measuring
ranges of the expansion modules with analog inputs and outputs.
Format calculation
The SIMATIC S5 format is calculated in the analog module from the SIMATIC S7
format. The overrange in the two formats is therefore the same size
(approx. 17.6 %).
Technical Specifications
7-96 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Input ranges 10 V
The following table contains the representation of the digitized measured value for
the:
For the voltage measuring range 10 V
Table 7-52 SIMATIC S5 format: representation of the digitized measured value +/–10 V (expansion
module with analog inputs)
Measuring Units Data word Range
range
10 V (dec.) 212 211 210 29282726252423222120x F Ü
11.7578 2409 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 Overflow
11.7589 2408 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Overrange
10.005 2049 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
10.00 2048 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5 1024 0 0 1 0 0 0 0000000000
0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 000000000 0 Rated
–5–1024 1 1 1 0 0 0 0000000000range
–10.00 –2048 1 1 0 0 0 0 0000000000
–10.005 –2049 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 Under-
–11.7578 –2408 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 range
–11.7578 –2409 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 Underflow
Technical Specifications
7-97
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Input range 20 mA
The following table contains the representation of the digitized measured value for
the:
For the current measuring range 20 mA.
Table 7-53 SIMATIC S5 format: representation of the digitized measured value +/–20 mA (expansion
module with analog inputs)
Measuring Units Data word Range
range
20 mA (dec.) 212 211 210 29282726252423222120x F Ü
23.5156 2409 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 Overflow
23.5156 2408 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Overrange
20.0097 2049 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
20.000 2048 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0.0097 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000001000
0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 000000000 0 Rated
–0.0097 –1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1111111000range
–20.000 –2048 1 1 0 0 0 0 0000000000
–20.0097 –2049 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 Under-
–23.5156 –2408 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 range
–23.5156 –2409 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 Underflow
Technical Specifications
7-98 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Input range 4 to 20 mA
The following table contains the representation of the digitized measured value for
the:
Current measuring range 4 to 20 mA
Table 7-54 SIMATIC S5 format: representation of the digitized measured value 4 to 20 mA (expansion
module with analog inputs)
Measuring Units Data word Range
range
4 to 20 mA (dec.) 212 211 210 29282726252423222120x F Ü
>22.8125 2921 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 Overflow
22.8125 2920 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Overrange
20.0078 2561 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
20.000 2560 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4.0078 513 0 0 0 1 0 0 000000100 0 Rated
range
4.000 512 0 0 0 1 0 0 0000000000
3.9922 511 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 Under-
1.1852 151 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 range
<1.1797 4095 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 Underflow
Relationship between ”Wire break” and measuring range
The 3.6 mA measuring range according to Table 7-54 can be used only if the
”wire break” parameter has been deactivated in the software.
When ”wire break” has been activated and the measuring range is 3.6 mA, then
”4095” is output and the error and overflow bits are set.
Technical Specifications
7-99
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Standard temperature range, Pt 100
In the following table you will find the representation of the digitized measured
value for the standard temperature range of the Pt 100 sensor. The characteristic
linearization applies to the following temperature ranges: – 200 C to + 850 C (in
increments of 0.5 C).
Table 7-55 SIMATIC S5 format: representation of the digitized measured value for the standard
temperature range, Pt 100 (expansion module with analog inputs)
Measured Units Data word Range
value
in C(dec.) 212 211 210 29282726252423222120x F Ü
1000.0 2001 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 Overflow
1000.0 2000 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Over-
851.0 1702 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 range*
850.0 1700 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
100 200 0 0 0 0 0 1 1001000000
0.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 000000000 0 Rated
–20 – 40 11 1 1 1 1 1011000000range
–100.0 – 200 11 1 1 1 0 0111000000
–101.0 – 202 1 1 1 1 1 0 0110110000Under-
–243.0 – 486 1 1 1 1 0 0 0011010000range
–243.0 – 487 1 1 1 1 0 0 0011001001Under-
flow*
* In the overrange and underrange, the gradient of the characteristic curve at the point where the linearized rated range is
left is retained.
Technical Specifications
7-100 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Tables for output ranges
As of Table 7-56 you will find the analog output ranges of the expansion modules
with analog outputs.
Output range 10 V
The following table contains the representation of the voltage output range 10 V.
Table 7-56 SIMATIC S5 format: representation of the analog voltage output range +/–10 V
Output Units Data word Range
range
10 V (dec.) 211 210 29282726252423222120xxxx
01205 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 x x x x Overflow
11.7578 1204 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 x x x x Overrange
10.0098 1025 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 x x x x
10.0000 1024 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x
0.0098 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 000001xxxx
0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 000000xx x x Rated
–0.0098 –1 1 1 1 1 1 1 111111xxxxrange
–10.0000 –1024 1 1 0 0 0 0 000000xxxx
–10.0098 –1025 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 x x x x Under-
–11.7578 –1204 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 x x x x range
01205 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 x x x x Underflow
Technical Specifications
7-101
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Output range 20 mA
The following table contains the representation of the current output range
20 mA.
Table 7-57 SIMATIC S5 format: representation of the analog current output range +/–20 mA
Output Units Data word Range
range
20 mA (dec.) 211 210 29282726252423222120xxxx
01205 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 x x x x Overflow
23.5156 1204 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 x x x x Overrange
20.0195 1025 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 x x x x
20.000 1024 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x
0.0195 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 000001xxxx
0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 000000xx x x Rated
range
–0.0195 –1 1 1 1 1 1 1 111111xxxx
–20.000 –1024 1 1 0 0 0 0 000000xxxx
–20.0195 –1025 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 x x x x
–23.5156 –1204 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 x x x x Under-
range
0–1205 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 x x x x Underflow
Technical Specifications
7-102 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Output range 4 to 20 mA
The following table contains the representation of the current output range
4 to 20 mA.
Table 7-58 SIMATIC S5 format: representation of the analog current output range 4 to 20 mA
Output Units Data word Range
range 4 to
20 mA (dec.) 211 210 29282726252423222120xxxx
01205 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 x x x x Overflow
22.8125 1204 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 x x x x Overrange
20.0156 1025 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 x x x x
20.000 1024 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x
4.0156 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 000001xx x x Rated
range
4.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 000000xxxx
3.9844 –1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 x x x x Underrange
0–256 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x
0–257 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 x x x x Underflow
0–1205 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 x x x x
Technical Specifications
7-103
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
7.21.6 Behavior of the analog inputs and outputs during operation and
in the event of faults
This chapter deals with the following topics:
The dependency of the analog input and output values on the supply voltage of
the expansion module and the operating modes of the PLC
The behavior of the analog expansion modules as a function of the position of
the analog values in the relevant value range
The effect of errors on the analog inputs/outputs
Effect of the supply voltage and the operating mode
The input and output values of the analog modules are dependent on the supply
voltage for electronic components/sensors and on the operating mode of the PLC
(CPU of the DP master).
Table 7-59 How the analog input/output values depend on the operating mode of the PLC (CPU of the DP
master) and the supply voltage L +
Operating mode
of the PLC (CPU
of the DP master)
Supply vol-
tage L + to
ET 200X
Input value of the expansion
module with analog inputs
and (evaluation possible in
the CPU of the DP master)
Output value of the expan-
sion module with analog out-
puts
Power RUN L + applied Process value PLC value
on 7FFFH until the first conversion
after the module is switched on
or after the module is
parameterized
Until the first conversion ...
after the module is
switched on, a signal of
0 mA or 0 V is output.
after the module is
parameterized, the
previous value is output.
L + not applied 0 mA/0 V 0 mA/0 V
Power
on STOP L + applied 0 mA/0 V Substitute value/last value
(default: 0 mA/0 V)
L + not applied 0 mA/0 V 0 mA/0 V
Power –L + applied –0 mA/0 V
off L + not applied –0 mA/0 V
Technical Specifications
7-104 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Supply voltage On/Off
A failure of the supply voltage to the electronics/sensors on the ET 200X is always
displayed by the ”ON” LED on the basic module and also entered in the diagnostic
data area of the basic module.
!Caution
When the supply voltage for electronic components/sensors on the ET 200X is
switched on/off, incorrect interim values may be obtained temporarily at the analog
outputs.
Effect of the value range for the analog input
The behavior of the expansion modules with analog inputs depends on where the
input values are in the value range. The following table indicates this:
Table 7-60 Behavior of the analog modules as a function of the position of the analog output value
Measured va-
lue in Input value in
SIMATIC
S7 format
Input value in
SIMATIC
S5 format
SF LED Diagnostic
data area of
the module
Interrupt
in the rated
range Measured
value Measured
value –––
in the over-
range/under-
range
Measured
value Measured
value –––
in the overflow 7FFFHEnd of the
overrange +1
plus overflow
bit
On* Entry per-
formed* Diagnostic in-
terrupt**
in the under-
flow 8000HEnd of the un-
derrange –1
plus overflow
bit
On* Entry per-
formed* Diagnostic in-
terrupt**
Outside the up-
per or lower
limit value
Measured
value Measured
value – – Hardware inter-
rupt**
Before parame-
terization or in
the event of in-
correct para-
meterization
7FFFH7FFFHOn* – –
* When the ”group diagnosis” parameter has been enabled in the configuration software
** When the diagnostic or hardware interrupt has been enabled in the configuration software
Technical Specifications
7-105
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
EM 144 AI 2 x RTD, response in the event of a wire break
If a wire break occurs on one of the EM 144 AI 2 x RTD expansion module’s
channels, the measured values on the expansion module’s other channel may be
corrupted. When this happens in S5 format, the overflow bit is set and the value
06E6H is loaded; in S7 format the value 7FFFH is loaded.
Effect of the value range for the analog output
The behavior of the expansion modules with analog outputs depends on where the
output values are in the value range. The following table indicates this:
Table 7-61 Behavior of the analog modules depending on the position of the analog output value in the
value range
Output value in Output value in SIMATIC S
5/S7 format SF LED Diagnostic
data area of
the module
Interrupt
Rated range Value from DP master – – –
Overrange/underrange Value from DP master – – –
Overflow 0 signal – – –
Underflow 0 signal – – –
Before parameterization
or in the event of incor-
rect parameterization
0 signal On* – –
Technical Specifications
7-106 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
7.21.7 Connecting measuring sensors to the analog inputs
You can connect different measuring sensors to the analog inputs depending on
the type of measurement involved:
Voltage sensors
Current sensors as:
–Two-wire measuring transducers
–Four-wire measuring transducers
Resistance thermometers
Abbreviations used
The following abbreviations are used in the figures in this section:
IC+: Constant-current line (positive)
IC–: Constant-current line (negative)
M+: Measuring line (positive)
M–: Measuring line (negative)
1M: Frame connection for sensor
1L+: Supply voltage connection for DC 24 V sensor
Connecting voltage sensors
The figure below shows how voltage sensors are connected to an expansion
module with analog inputs.
M+
M–
Socket X1 Socket X2
* Made available by the ET 200X for the connected sensor
L+ 1M Connection of socket X2:
see socket X1
Voltage
sensor +
–
1M*
1L+*
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Figure 7-24 Connection of voltage sensors to analog inputs (EM with order number
6ES7 144-1FB31-0XB0)
Technical Specifications
7-107
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Connecting current sensors as two- and four-wire measuring transducers
The supply voltage is fed to the two-wire measuring transducer and is inherently
short circuit-proof. The two-wire measuring transducer then converts the fed
measured value into a current. Four-wire measuring transducers have a separate
supply voltage connection.
The two-wire measuring transducers must be insulated measuring sensors.
The figure below shows how current sensors are connected as two-wire measuring
transducers to an EM 144 AI 2 I expansion module (4 to 20 mA).
M+
Two-wire
measuring
transducer
P+
–
Sensor,
e.g. pressure gauge
M–
Socket X1 Socket X2
* Made available by the ET 200X for the connected sensor
Connection of socket X2:
see socket X1
1M
1L+*
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Figure 7-25 Connection of current sensors (two-wire measuring transducers) to analog inputs (EM with
order number 6ES7 144-1GB41-0XB0)
Technical Specifications
7-108 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Four-wire measuring transducer at the EM 144 AI 2 I (20 mA)
The figure below shows how current sensors are connected as four-wire
measuring transducers to an EM 144 AI 2 I expansion module (20 mA).
* Made available by the ET 200X for the connected sensor;
1L+ of module must be used since a possible broken wire signal is possible
only with the sensor supply made available by the module.
M+
M–
Socket X1 Socket X2
Sensor,
e.g. pressure gauge
L+ 1M Connection of socket X2:
see socket X1
Four-wire
measuring
transducer
P+
–
1M*
1L+*
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Figure 7-26 Connection of current sensors (four-wire measuring transducers) to analog inputs (EM with
order number 6ES7 144-1GB31-0XB0)
Four-wire measuring transducer to EM 144 AI 2 I (4 to 20 mA)
The figure below shows how current sensors are connected as four-wire
measuring transducers to an EM 144 AI 2 I expansion module (4 to 20 mA ).
Note: There is no L+ available at pin 1 on the expansion module. You therefore
have to feed the supply voltage for the current sensor from an external source.
M+
M–
Socket X1 Socket X2
Sensor,
e.g. pressure gauge
L+ 1M Connection of socket X2:
see socket X1
Four-wire
measuring
transducer
P+
–
1M
1L+
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Figure 7-27 Connection of current sensors (four-wire measuring transducers) to analog inputs (EM with
order number 6ES7 144-1GB41-0XB0)
Technical Specifications
7-109
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Connecting Pt 100 resistance thermometers
The resistance thermometers are measured in a four-conductor connection.
Constant current is fed to the resistance thermometers via connections IC+ and
IC– . The voltage generated at the resistance thermometer is measured via
connections M+ and M–. This ensures highly accurate measurement results with
the four-conductor connection. The figure below shows how resistance
thermometers are connected to an EM 144 AI 2 RTD expansion module.
1L+
Socket X1 Socket X2
1M*
* Made available by the ET 200X for the connected sensor
M+
M–
IC+
IC–
IC
Connection of socket X2:
see socket X1
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Figure 7-28 Connection of resistance thermometers to EM 144 AI 2 x RTD (EM with order number
6ES7 144-1JB31-0XB0)
In the case of a two- or three-wire connection, you have to create appropriate
bridges in the connector to form connections between M+ and IC+ and M– and
IC– on the expansion module. However, you must reckon with a lost of accuracy in
the measurement results.
7.21.8 Connecting loads to the analog outputs
When you use expansion modules with analog outputs, you can supply
loads/actuators with current or voltage.
Abbreviations used
The following abbreviations are used in the figures in this section:
QI: Analog output current
QV: Analog output voltage
1M: Frame connection/reference potential of the analog circuit
RL: Load/actuator
Connecting loads to a voltage output
You have to connect loads to a current output at QV and the reference point of the
analog circuit 1M (see Figure 7-29).
Technical Specifications
7-110 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Four-conductor connection
If you connect a load with a 4-core cable to a voltage output, use only 2 of the
cable’s cores and connect them to pins 1 and 3.
Connecting loads to a current output
You have to connect loads to a current output at QI and the reference point of the
analog circuit 1M.
The figure below shows how loads are connected to a voltage or current output of
an expansion module with analog outputs.
RL
QV or QI
Socket X1 Socket X2
1M
Connection of socket X2:
see socket X1
* Made available by the ET 200X
1M*
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Figure 7-29 Connection of loads to a voltage or current output (analog output; EM with order number
6ES7 145-1FB31-0XB0; 6ES7 145-1GB31-0XB0)
Technical Specifications
7-111
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
7.21.9 EM 144 AI 2 x U expansion module
(6ES7 144-1FB31-0XB0)
Features
The EM 144 AI 2 U expansion module with the order number
6ES7 144-1FB31-0XB0 has the following features:
2 inputs for voltage measurement (2 channels with the same measuring range
and data format)
Input range 10 V
Resolution of 12 bits plus sign
24 VDC supply voltage
Non-isolated
Parameterizable diagnostic interrupt
Parameterizable hardware interrupt
Parameterizable diagnostics
SF LED
Pinout of the sockets for AI
The following table shows the pinout of the two sockets used to connect the analog
inputs. You can find the layout of the sockets in Appendix C.
Table 7-62 Pinout of the sockets for 2-channel analog inputs (voltage)
Pin Assignment of socket X1 Assignment of socket X2 Front view of
socket
(Front view)
1Sensor supply output 1L+
2Input signal ”+”, channel 0 Input signal ”+”, channel 1 2
3Chassis ground, power supply 13
4Input signal ”–”, channel 0 Input signal ”–”, channel 1 4
Technical Specifications
7-112 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Basic circuit diagram
The basic circuit diagram of the expansion module is shown below.
Backplane bus
interface
Socket connections (see Table 7-62)
ADC
So. X1
1L+
1M
Supply voltage for electronic compo-
nents and sensors via backplane bus
So. X2
1
2
3
4
2
4
24
V5 V
3
1
SF
Figure 7-30 Basic circuit diagram of expansion module EM 144 AI 2 x U
Covering up unused connections
You must seal off any connections which are not required with M12 screw caps, in
order to ensure that the degree of protection (IP 65, IP 66 or IP 67) is achieved.
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions
W H D (mm) 87 110 55
Weight Approx. 250 g
Module-specific data
Number of inputs 2
Cable length
Shielded Max. 30 m
Voltages, currents, potentials
Electrical isolation No
Permissible potential diffe-
rence
Between input (frame
connection) and MANA
(UCM)
Between MANA and
centralized grounding
point (UISO)
Power input
From supply voltage L+
Power loss of the module
2.0 VDC; ACSS
0 VAC; DC
Max. 40 mA
Typ. 0.9 W
Technical Specifications
7-113
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Analog value formation
Measurement principle Integrative
Integration and cycle time/
resolution per channel:
Integration time
parameterizable
Integration time in ms
Cycle time in ms
(all channels)
Interference voltage
suppression for
interference frequency
f1 in Hz
Resolution (including
overrange)
Rated value in units:
–SIMATIC S7 format:
–SIMATIC S5 format:
Yes
16.7 20
134 160
60 50
12 bits plus sign
6912
4096
Interference suppression, error limits
Interference voltage sup-
pression
Common-mode
interference
Series-mode
interference
(peak interference
value < rated value of
input range)
> 60 dB
> 40 dB
Operational limit (entire
temperature range with re-
ference to input range)
1.2 %
Basic error (operational limit
at 25 C with reference to
input range)
1.0 %
Temperature error (with re-
ference to input range) 0.01 %/K
Crosstalk between inputs > 45 dB
Linearity error (with refe-
rence to input range) 0.05 %
Repeat accuracy
(steady state at 25 C with
reference to input range)
0.05 %
Status, alarms, diagnostics
Alarms Diagnostic
interrupt
Hardware
interrupt
Diagnostic functions
Group error Configurable
Red LED (SF)
Sensor supply outputs
Outputs
Output current*
Short circuit protection
2
Up to 40 C
max. 0.9A;
Up to 55 C
max. 0.7A
Yes, electronic
Sensor selection data
Input range (rated value)/in-
put resistance 10 V/100 kW
Permissible input voltage
(destruction limit) 30 V
Sensor connection
For voltage
measurement Possible
* Please note the total current per ET 200X.
Technical Specifications
7-114 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
7.21.10 EM 144 AI 2 x I expansion module (+/–20 mA)
(6ES7 144-1GB31-0XB0)
Features
The EM 144 AI 2 I expansion module with the order number
6ES7 144-1FB31-0XB0 has the following features:
2 inputs for current measurement (2 channels with the same measuring range
and data format)
Parameterizable input range, 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA
Connection of sensors as four-wire measuring transducers
Resolution of 12 bits plus sign
24 VDC supply voltage
Non-isolated
Parameterizable diagnostic interrupt
Parameterizable hardware interrupt
Parameterizable diagnostics
SF LED
Pinout of the sockets for AI
The following table shows the pinout of the two sockets used to connect the analog
inputs. You can find the layout of the sockets in Appendix C.
Table 7-63 Pinout of the sockets for 2-channel analog inputs (EM 144 AI 2 x I)
Pin Assignment of socket X1 Assignment of socket X2 Front view of
socket
(Front view)
1Sensor supply output 1L+
2Input signal ”+”, channel 0 Input signal ”+”, channel 1 2
3Chassis ground, power supply 13
4Input signal ”–”, channel 0 Input signal ”–”, channel 1 4
Technical Specifications
7-115
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Basic circuit diagram
The basic circuit diagram of the expansion module is shown below.
Socket connections (see Table 7-63)
ADC
So. X1
1L+
1M
Supply voltage for electronic compo-
nents and sensors via backplane bus
Backplane bus
interface
So. X2
1
2
3
4
2
4
24
V5 V
3
1
SF
Figure 7-31 Basic circuit diagram of expansion module EM 144 AI 2 x I
Covering up unused connections
You must seal off any connections which are not required with M12 screw caps, in
order to ensure that the degree of protection (IP 65, IP 66 or IP 67) is achieved.
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions
W H D (mm) 87 110 55
Weight Approx. 250 g
Module-specific data
Number of inputs 2
Cable length
Shielded Max. 30 m
Voltages, currents, potentials
Electrical isolation No
Permissible potential diffe-
rence
Between input (frame
connection) and MANA
(UCM)
Between MANA and
centralized grounding
point (UISO)
2.0 VDC; ACSS
0 VAC; DC
Power input
From supply voltage L+
Power loss of the module
Max. 40 mA
Typ. 0.9 W
Technical Specifications
7-116 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Analog value formation
Measurement principle Integrative
Integration and cycle time/
resolution per channel:
Integration time
parameterizable
Integration time in ms
Cycle time in ms
(all channels)
Interference voltage
suppression for
interference frequency
f1 in Hz
Resolution (including
overrange)
Rated value in units:
–SIMATIC S7 format:
–SIMATIC S5 format:
Yes
16.7 20
134 160
60 50
12 bits plus sign
6912
4096
Interference suppression, error limits
Interference voltage sup-
pression
Common-mode
interference
Series-mode
interference
(peak interference
value < rated value of
input range)
> 60 dB
> 40 dB
Operational limit (entire
temperature range with re-
ference to input range)
1.2 %
Basic error (operational limit
at 25 C with reference to
input range)
1.0 %
Temperature error (with re-
ference to input range) 0.01 %/K
Crosstalk between inputs > 45 dB
Linearity error (with refe-
rence to input range) 0.05 %
Repeat accuracy
(steady state at 25 C with
reference to input range)
0.05 %
Status, alarms, diagnostics
Alarms Diagnostic
interrupt
Hardware
interrupt
Diagnostic functions
Group error Configurable
Red LED (SF)
Sensor supply outputs
Outputs
Output current*
Short circuit protection
2
Up to 40 C
max. 0.9A;
Up to 55 C
max. 0.7A
Yes, electronic
Sensor selection data
Input range (rated
range)/input resistance
parameterizable
20 mA/25 W
4 to 20 mA
Permissible input voltage
(destruction limit) 40 mA
Sensor connection
For current
measurement:-wire
measuring transducer** Not possible
Possible
* Please note the total current per ET 200X.
** 1L+ of module must be used since a possible broken wire
signal is possible only with the sensor supply made
available by the module.
Technical Specifications
7-117
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
7.21.11 EM 144 AI 2 x I expansion module (4 to 20 mA)
(6ES7 144-1GB41-0XB0)
Features
The EM 144 AI 2 I expansion module with the order number
6ES7 144-1GB41-0XB0 has the following features:
2 inputs for current measurement (2 channels with the same measuring range
and data format)
Input range 4 to 20 mA
Connection of sensors as two- or four-wire measuring transducers
Resolution of 12 bits plus sign
24 VDC supply voltage
Non-isolated
Parameterizable diagnostic interrupt
Parameterizable hardware interrupt
Parameterizable diagnostics
SF LED
Pinout of the sockets for AI
The following table shows the pinout of the two sockets used to connect the analog
inputs. You can find the layout of the sockets in Appendix C.
Table 7-64 Pinout of the sockets for 2-channel analog inputs (EM 144 AI 2 x I, 4 to 20 mA)
Pin Assignment of socket X1 Assignment of socket X2 Front view of
socket
(Front view)
1Sensor supply output 1L+*;
Input signal ”+”, channel 0 Sensor supply output 1L+*;
Input signal ”+”, channel 1 2
2Input signal ”–”, channel 0 Input signal ”–”, channel 1 1
2
3
3Chassis ground, power supply 13
4
4–
* L+ is not available at pin 1 for connecting four-wire measuring transducers. You therefore have to feed
the sensor supply voltage from an external source (see also Section 7.21.7).
Technical Specifications
7-118 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Basic circuit diagram
The basic circuit diagram of the expansion module is shown below.
Socket connections (see Table 7-64)
ADC
So. X1
1L+
1M
Supply voltage for electronic compo-
nents and sensors via backplane bus
Backplane bus
interface
So. X2
1
2
3
4
2
4
24
V5 V
3
1
SF
Figure 7-32 Basic circuit diagram of Expansion module EM 144 AI 2 x I (4 to 20 mA)
Covering up unused connections
You must seal off any connections which are not required with M12 screw caps, in
order to ensure that the degree of protection (IP 65, IP 66 or IP 67) is achieved.
Technical Specifications
7-119
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions
W H D (mm) 87 110 55
Weight Approx. 250 g
Module-specific data
Number of inputs 2
Cable length
Shielded Max. 30 m
Voltages, currents, potentials
Electrical isolation No
Permissible potential diffe-
rence
Between input (frame
connection) and MANA
(UCM)
Between MANA and
centralized grounding
point (UISO)
2.0 VDC; ACSS
0 VAC; DC
Power input
From supply voltage L+
Power loss of the module
Max. 80 mA
Typ. 1W
Analog value formation
Measurement principle Integrative
Integration and cycle time/
resolution per channel:
Integration time
parameterizable
Integration time in ms
Cycle time in ms
(all channels)
Interference voltage
suppression for
interference frequency
f1 in Hz
Resolution (including
overrange)
Rated value in units:
–SIMATIC S7 format:
–SIMATIC S5 format:
Yes
16.7 20
134 160
60 50
12 bits plus sign
6912
4096
Interference suppression, error limits
Interference voltage sup-
pression
Common-mode
interference
Series-mode
interference
(peak interference
value < rated value of
input range)
> 60 dB
> 40 dB
Operational limit (entire
temperature range with re-
ference to input range)
1.2 %
Basic error (operational limit
at 25 C with reference to
input range)
1.0 %
Temperature error (with re-
ference to input range) 0.01 %/K
Crosstalk between inputs > 45 dB
Linearity error (with refe-
rence to input range) 0.05 %
Repeat accuracy
(steady state at 25 C with
reference to input range)
0.05 %
Status, alarms, diagnostics
Alarms Diagnostic
interrupt
Hardware
interrupt
Diagnostic functions
Group error Configurable
Red LED (SF)
Sensor selection data
Input range (rated value)/in-
put resistance 4 to 20 mA/25 W
Permissible input voltage
(destruction limit)
Short circuit protection
Short-circuit current
40 mA
Yes
Approx. 65 mA
Sensor load Max. 750 W
Sensor connection
For current
measurement:
As 2-wire measuring
transducer
As 4-wire measuring
transducer
Possible
Possible
Technical Specifications
7-120 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
7.21.12 EM 144 AI 2 RTD expansion module
(6ES7 144-1JB31-0XB0)
Features
The EM 144 AI 2 RTD expansion module with the order number
6ES7 144-1JB31-0XB0 has the following features:
2 inputs for Pt 100 resistance thermometer (2 channels with the same
measuring range and data format)
Input range for Pt 100
Resolution of 12 bits plus sign
24 VDC supply voltage
Non-isolated
Parameterizable diagnostic interrupt
Parameterizable hardware interrupt
Parameterizable diagnostics
SF LED
Pinout of the sockets for AI
The following table shows the pinout of the two sockets used to connect the analog
inputs. You can find the layout of the sockets in Appendix C.
Table 7-65 Pinout of the sockets for 2-channel analog inputs (Pt 100)
Pin Assignment of socket X1 Assignment of socket X2 Front view of
socket
(Front view)
1Sensor supply output current (approx. 1 mA)
2Input signal ”+”, channel 0 Input signal ”+”, channel 1 2
3Chassis ground, power supply 13
4Input signal ”–”, channel 0 Input signal ”–”, channel 1 4
Technical Specifications
7-121
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Basic circuit diagram
The basic circuit diagram of the expansion module is shown below.
Socket connections (see Table 7-65)
ADC
So. X1
1L+
1M
Supply voltage for electronic components
and sensors via backplane bus
Backplane bus
interface
So. X2
1
2
3
4
2
4
24 V 5 V
3
1
SF
Figure 7-33 Basic circuit diagram of expansion module EM 144 AI 2 x RTD
Covering up unused connections
You must seal off any connections which are not required with M12 screw caps, in
order to ensure that the degree of protection (IP 65, IP 66 or IP 67) is achieved.
Technical Specifications
7-122 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions
W H D (mm) 87 110 55
Weight Approx. 250 g
Module-specific data
Number of inputs 2
Cable length
Shielded Max. 30 m
Voltages, currents, potentials
Electrical isolation No
Permissible potential diffe-
rence
Between input (frame
connection) and MANA
(UCM)
Between MANA and
centralized grounding
point (UISO)
2.0 VDC; ACSS
0 VAC; DC
Power input
From supply voltage L+
Power loss of the module
Max. 40 mA
Typ. 0.9 W
Analog value formation
Measurement principle Integrative
Integration and cycle time/
resolution per channel:
Integration time
parameterizable
Integration time in ms
Cycle time in ms
(all channels)
Interference voltage
suppression for
interference frequency
f1 in Hz
Resolution (including
overrange)
Rated value in units:
–SIMATIC S7 format:
–SIMATIC S5 format:
Yes
16.7 20
134 160
60 50
12 bits plus sign
6912
4096
Interference suppression, error limits
Interference voltage sup-
pression
Common-mode
interference
Series-mode
interference
(peak interference
value < rated value of
input range)
> 60 dB
> 40 dB
Operational limit (entire
temperature range with re-
ference to input range)
1.2 %
Basic error (operational limit
at 25 C with reference to
input range)
1.0 %
Temperature error (with re-
ference to input range) 0.01 %/K
Crosstalk between inputs > 45 dB
Linearity error (with refe-
rence to input range) 0.05 %
Repeat accuracy
(steady state at 25 C with
reference to input range)
0.05 %
Status, alarms, diagnostics
Alarms Diagnostic
interrupt
Hardware
interrupt
Diagnostic functions
Group error Configurable
Red LED (SF)
Sensor selection data
Input range (rated value)/in-
put resistance Pt 100/10 MW
Characteristic curve lineari-
zation Yes
Permissible input voltage
(destruction limit) 30 V
Measurement current IC+ Max. 1.5 mA
Sensor connection
Two-conductor
connection
Three-conductor
connection
Four-conductor
connection
Possible
Possible
Possible
Technical Specifications
7-123
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
7.21.13 EM 145 AO 2 U expansion module
(6ES7 145-1FB31-0XB0)
Features
The EM 145 AO 2 U expansion module with the order number
6ES7 145-1FB31-0XB0 has the following features:
2 outputs for voltage output (2 channels with the same measuring range and
data format)
Output range 10 V
Resolution of 11 bits plus sign
24 VDC supply voltage
Non-isolated
Parameterizable diagnostic interrupt
Parameterizable diagnostics
Parameterizable substitute value output
SF LED
Pinout of sockets for AO
The following table shows the pinout of the two sockets used to connect the analog
outputs. You can find the layout of the sockets in Appendix C.
Table 7-66 Pinout of the sockets for 2-channel analog outputs (voltage)
Pin Assignment of socket X1 Assignment of socket X2 Front view of
socket
(Front view)
1Output signal QV, channel 0 Output signal QV, channel 1
2– – 2
3Chassis ground, power supply 13
4– – 4
Technical Specifications
7-124 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Basic circuit diagram
The basic circuit diagram of the expansion module is shown below.
Socket connections (see Table 7-66)
DAC
So. X1
Backplane bus
interface
So. X2
1L+
1M
3
1
2
3
4
Supply voltage for electronic components
and sensors via backplane bus
DAC
24 V 5 V
+
–
1
2
4
+
–
SF
Figure 7-34 Basic circuit diagram of expansion module EM 145 AO 2 x U
Covering up unused connections
You must seal off any connections which are not required with M12 screw caps, in
order to ensure that the degree of protection (IP 65, IP 66 or IP 67) is achieved.
Technical Specifications
7-125
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions
W H D (mm) 87 110 55
Weight Approx. 250 g
Module-specific data
Number of outputs 2
Cable length
Shielded Max. 30 m
Voltages, currents, potentials
Electrical isolation No
Permissible potential diffe-
rence
Between coil (frame
connection) and
centralized grounding
point (UISO)
0 VAC; DC
Power input
From supply voltage L+
Power loss of the module
Max. 75 mA
Typ. 1.5 W
Analog value formation
Resolution (including over-
range) 11 bits plus sign
Rated value in units:
–SIMATIC S7 format:
–SIMATIC S5 format: 1728
1024
Cycle time (all channels) 1 ms
Settling time
For resistive load
For capacitive load 0.6 ms
6.0 ms
Replacement values can be
applied No
Interference suppression, error limits
Operational limit (entire
temperature range with re-
ference to output range)
1 %
Basic error (operational limit
at 25 C with reference to
output range)
0.9 %
Temperature error (with re-
ference to output range) 0.01 %/K
Crosstalk between outputs > 45 dB
Linearity error (with refe-
rence to output range) 0.08 %
Repeat accuracy
(steady state at 25 C with
reference to output range)
0.05 %
Output ripple (with refe-
rence to output range,
bandwidth 0 to 50 kHz)
0.05 %
Status, alarms, diagnostics
Alarms Diagnostic interrupt
Diagnostic functions
Group error Configurable
Red LED (SF)
Actuator selection data
Output range (rated value) –10 to 10 V
Load resistance
With capacitive load
Short circuit protection
Short-circuit current
Min. 1.0 kW
Max. 0.1 mF
Yes
Max. 30 mA
Permissible input voltage
for voltage output (destruc-
tion limit)
15 V
Actuator connection
Two-conductor
connection
Four-conductor
connection
Possible
Possible
Technical Specifications
7-126 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
7.21.14 EM 145 AO 2I expansion module
(6ES7 145-1GB31-0XB0)
Features
The EM 145 AO 2 I expansion module with the order number
6ES7 145-1GB31-0XB0 has the following features:
2 outputs for current measurement (2 channels with the same measuring range
and data format)
Parameterizable output range, 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA
Resolution of 11 bits plus sign
24 VDC supply voltage
Non-isolated
Parameterizable diagnostic interrupt
Parameterizable diagnostics
Parameterizable substitute value output
SF LED
Pinout of sockets for AO
The following table shows the pinout of the two sockets used to connect the analog
outputs. You can find the layout of the sockets in Appendix C.
Table 7-67 Pinout of the sockets for 2-channel analog outputs (current)
Pin Assignment of socket X1 Assignment of socket X2 Front view of
socket
(Front view)
1Output signal QI, channel 0 Output signal QI, channel 1
2–2
3Chassis ground, power supply 13
4–4
Technical Specifications
7-127
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Basic circuit diagram
The basic circuit diagram of the expansion module is shown below.
Socket connections (see Table 7-67)
DAC
So. X1
Backplane bus
interface
So. X2
1L+
1M
3
1
2
3
4
Supply voltage for electronic components
and sensors via backplane bus
DAC
24 V 5 V
+
–
1
2
4
+
–
SF
Figure 7-35 Basic circuit diagram of expansion module EM 145 AO 2 x I
Covering up unused connections
You must seal off any connections which are not required with M12 screw caps, in
order to ensure that the degree of protection (IP 65, IP 66 or IP 67) is achieved.
Technical Specifications
7-128 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions
W H D (mm) 87 110 55
Weight Approx. 250 g
Module-specific data
Number of outputs 2
Cable length
Shielded Max. 30 m
Voltages, currents, potentials
Electrical isolation No
Permissible potential diffe-
rence
Between coil (frame
connection) and
centralized grounding
point (UISO)
0 VAC; DC
Power input
From supply voltage L+
Power loss of the module
Max. 110 mA
Typ. 2.3W
Analog value formation
Resolution (including over-
range) 11 bits plus sign
Rated value in units:
–SIMATIC S7 format:
–SIMATIC S5 format: 1728
1024
Cycle time (all channels) 1 ms
Settling time
For resistive load
For capacitive load 0.6 ms
6.0 ms
Replacement values can be
applied No
Interference suppression, error limits
Operational limit (entire
temperature range with re-
ference to output range)
1 %
Basic error (operational limit
at 25 C with reference to
output range)
0.9 %
Temperature error (with re-
ference to output range) 0.01 %/K
Crosstalk between outputs > 45 dB
Linearity error (with refe-
rence to output range) 0.08 %
Repeat accuracy
(steady state at 25 C with
reference to output range)
0.05 %
Output ripple (with refe-
rence to output range,
bandwidth 0 to 50 kHz)
0.05 %
Status, alarms, diagnostics
Alarms Diagnostic interrupt
Diagnostic functions
Group error Configurable
Red LED (SF)
Actuator selection data
Output range (rated va-
lues), parameterizable –20 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
Load resistance
Inductive load Max. 500 W
Max. 0.1 mH
Current output
No-load voltage Max. 15 V
Permissible input current for
current output (destruction
limit)
40 mA
Actuator connection
Two-conductor
connection Possible
Technical Specifications
7-129
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
7.22 SITOP power power supply 24V/10A
(6EP1 334-2CA00)
Properties
The SITOP power 24V/10A power supply, order number 6EP1 334-2CA00, has the
following features:
Primary switched-mode power supply
Rated input voltage 120/230 VAC
Rated output voltage 24 VDC, floating, short-circuit-proof and stable at no load
Rated output current up to 10 A
Output voltage optionally as supply voltage for electronics/sensors and/or load
voltage of ET 200X
Parameterizable behavior in the event of an error: restart or shutdown following
short circuit on the output
LEDs for operating mode
Basic circuit diagram
The figure below shows the basic circuit diagram of the SITOP power power
supply.
8/10 A
STORE/RESTART
UA
Temp >
Primary
section Secondary
section
Transformer,
elec. isolated
24
VDC
L+
1L+
2L+
M
Bus
segmen-
tation
Display
24 VDC
1L+
2L+
Control
+
–
230 VAC L1
N
Link 120VAC
PE
Figure 7-36 Basic circuit diagram for SITOP power supply
Technical Specifications
7-130 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions
W H D (mm) 146.5 x 265 x 134
Weight Approx. 1.7 kg
Voltages, currents, potentials
Input voltage
Rated value UEN
Permissible range
Frequency
Mains
buffering
(at UE= 93/187 V; IAN)
120/230 VAC
93 V to 132 VAC
187 V to 264 VAC
47 Hz to 63 Hz
Min. 20 ms
Rated input current IEN
(at 120 V/230 V) 4.3 A/2.6 A
Current at make
(at UE = 230 V; 25 C) <55 A; 2.5 A2s
Recommended circuit-
breaker in the supply lead 16 A,
Characteristic C
Power consumption 270W
Efficiency at full load Approx. 89%
Device protection Internal
line-side fuse
T 6.3 A/250 V
Output voltage
Rated value UAN
Overall tolerance, static 24 VDC
3%
Residual ripple Max. 15 mVss
Setting range 22.8 V to 25.2 V
Output current
Rated value IAN
To 40 C
To 55 C
10 A
Max. 10A
Max. 8A
Overcurrent limitation Typ. 1.1 to 1.3 x IAN
Output short-circuit
protection Yes
Outputs stable at no load Yes
Electrical isolation
Primary/secondary Yes (SELV as per
EN 60950)
Status, alarms, diagnostics
Status display Green LEDs for
24 V at output
terminals
Supply voltage
available at bus
for electronics/
sensors
Load voltage
available at bus
Red LED for shut-
down on account of
excess temperature
A-1
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Order Numbers
Should you require additional ET 200X components or PROFIBUS accessories for
use with the ET 200X, you will find all the order numbers here.
Basic modules
Table A-1 Basic modules – order numbers
Designation Order number
BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V basic module 6ES7 141-1BF12-0XB0
BM 141 DI 8DC 24V ECOFAST
basic module with large designation labels 6ES7 141-1BF01-0AB0
BM 141 DI 8DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG basic
module 6ES7 141-1BF40-0AB0
BM 142 DO 4 DC 24V/2A basic module 6ES7 142-1BD22-0XB0
BM 143-DESINA FO
basic module with large designation labels 6ES7 143-1BF00-0XB0
BM 143-DESINA RS485
basic module with large designation labels 6ES7 143-1BF00-0AB0
A
Order Numbers
A-2 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Expansion modules
Table A-2 Expansion modules – order numbers
Description Order number
EM 141 DI 4DC 24V expansion module 6ES7 141-1BD31-0XA0
EM 141 DI 8 DC 24V expansion module 6ES7 141-1BF31-0XA0
EM 141 DI 8DC 24V DIAG expansion module 6ES7 141-1BF30-0XB0
EM 141 DI 8DC 24V
expansion module with large designation labels 6ES7 141-1BF41-0XA0
EM 141 DI 8DC 24V DIAG expansion module 6ES7 141-1BF40-0XB0
EM 142 DO 4DC 24V/0.5A expansion module 6ES7 142-1BD30-0XA0
EM 142 DO 4 DC 24V/2A expansion module 6ES7 142-1BD40-0XA0
EM 142 DO 4 DC 24V/2A expansion module 6ES7 142-1BD40-0XB0
EM 142 DO 8DC 24V/1.2A
expansion module with large designation labels 6ES7 142-1BF30-0XA0
EM 143-DESINA
expansion module with large designation labels 6ES7 143-1BF30-0XB0
EM 144 AI 2U expansion module 6ES7 144-1FB31-0XB0
EM 144 AI 2I expansion module 6ES7 144-1GB31-0XB0
EM 144 AI 2I expansion module 6ES7 144-1GB41-0XB0
EM 144 AI 2RTD expansion module 6ES7 144-1JB31-0XB0
EM 145 AO 2U expansion module 6ES7 145-1FB31-0XB0
EM 145 AO 2I expansion module 6ES7 145-1GB31-0XB0
EM 148-P DI 4DC 24V/
DO 2 x P expansion module 6ES7 148-1DA00-0XA0
EM 148-P DO 16P/CPV10 expansion module 6ES7 148-1EH01-0XA0
EM 148-P DO 16P/CPV14 expansion module 6ES7 148-1EH11-0XA0
PM 148 DO 4DC 24V/2A power module 6ES7 148-1CA00-0XB0
SITOP power 24V/10A power supply unit 6EP1 334-2CA00
CP 142-2 communication processor 6GK7 142-2AH00-0XA0
Order Numbers
A-3
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Accessories for ET 200X
Table A-3 Accessories for ET200X – order numbers
Description Order number
Connector assembly for PROFIBUS-DP, supply
voltage for electronic components/sensors and load
voltage
(protective shell with 6-pin connector,
2 M16 cable glands and 2 lock nuts)
6ES7 194-1AA01-0XA0
Cover plate
(for sealing off unused connectors for PROFIBUS-DP
and supply/load voltage; 10 units)
6ES7 194-1JB00-0XA0
M12 coupler plug, 5-pin
(for connecting actuators and sensors) On request
M12 angular coupler plug, 5-pin
(for connecting actuators and sensors; cannot be
used in conjunction with an M12 Y connector)
On request
M12 Y connector, 5-pin (for dual connection of
actuators/sensors to digital inputs/outputs) 6ES7 194-1KA01-0XA0
AS interface, M12 screw cap
(for sealing off unused inputs and outputs of the
ET 200X; 10 units)
3RX9 802-0AA00
Silencer for pneumatic module 6ES7 194-1EA00-0XA0
DIN rail, narrow, length 400 mm
for ET 200X electronic submodule 6ES7 194-1GA00-0XA0
DIN rail, narrow, length 640 mm
for ET 200X electronic submodule 6ES7 194-1GA10-0XA0
DIN rail, narrow, length 2000 mm
for ET 200X electronic submodule 6ES7 194-1GA20-0XA0
DIN rail, wide, length 520 mm
for ET 200X electronic module and motor
starter/frequency converter
6ES7 194-1GB00-0XA0
DIN rail, wide, length 1000 mm
for ET 200X electronic submodule and motor
starter/frequency converter
6ES7 194-1GB10-0XA0
Screws with washer assemblies
(100 screws M5 x 20, crossed recessed head with
washer) for fitting ET 200X modules onto DIN rail
6ES7 194-1KC00-0XA0
Order Numbers
A-4 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Accessories for ET 200X-DESINA / ET 200X-ECOFAST
Table A-4 Accessories for ET 200X-DESINA / ET 200X-ECOFAST – order
numbers
Description Order number
Configuration connector 6ES7 194-1KB00-0XA0
ECOFAST hybrid cables (2 copper conductors and
22 copper wires) complete with ECOFAST
connectors: 1.5 m
3.0 m
5.0 m
10.0 m
15.0 m
20.0 m
25.0 m
30.0 m
35.0 m
40.0 m
45.0 m
50.0 m
6XV1 830-7BH15
6XV1 830-7BH30
6XV1 830-7BH50
6XV1 830-7BN10
6XV1 830-7BN15
6XV1 830-7BN20
6XV1 830-7BN25
6XV1 830-7BN30
6XV1 830-7BN35
6XV1 830-7BN40
6XV1 830-7BN45
6XV1 830-7BN50
Unprepared ECOFAST hybrid cable (2 copper
conductors and 22 copper wires) in various
lengths: 20.0 m
50.0 m
100.0 m
6XV1 830-7AN20
6XV1 830-7AN50
6XV1 830-7AT10
ECOFAST hybrid cable, in meters (2 copper
conductors and 22 copper wires) 6XV1 830-7AH10
ECOFAST hybrid cable, fiber-optic cable (2
fiber-optic cables and 22 copper wires) complete
with ECOFAST connectors in various lengths:
1.5 m
3.0 m
5.0 m
10.0 m
15.0 m
6XV1 830-6DH15
6XV1 830-6DH30
6XV1 830-6DH50
6XV1 830-6DN10
6XV1 830-6DN15
Unprepared ECOFAST hybrid cable, fiber-optic cable
(2 fiber-optic cables and 22 copper wires) in
various lengths: 20.0 m
50.0 m
100.0 m
6XV1 830-6CN20
6XV1 830-6CN50
6XV1 830-6CT10
ECOFAST hybrid cable, fiber-optic cable, in metres
(2 fiber-optic cables and 22 copper wires) 6XV1 830-6CH10
Cover plate (to seal off unused DESINA/ECOFAST
connection sockets); 10 units 6ES7 194-1JB10-0XA0
Order Numbers
A-5
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Table A-4 Accessories for ET 200X-DESINA / ET 200X-ECOFAST – order
numbers, continued
Description Order number
DESINA/ECOFAST terminating resistor for
PROFIBUS-DP with copper conductors: 1 unit
5 units 6GK1 905-0DA10
6GK1 905-0DA00
For preparing the cables:
PROFIBUS ECOFAST Hybrid Plug 180 (ECOFAST
Cu, 5 units) With pin insert
With socket insert
PROFIBUS ECOFAST Cyberoptic Hybrid Plug 180
(ECOFAST fiber-optic cable, 5 units)
DESINA-compatible With pin insert
With socket insert
6GK1 905-0CA00
6GK1 905-0CB00
6GK1 905-0BA00
6GK1 905-0BB00
For the connection between controller and power supply we recommend Harting
accessories:
Description Order number
For the link between the controller and power supply:
Media Converter PROFIBUS MCP12P 20 40 004 3647
Address for ordering:
HARTING Vertrieb für Steckverbinder und
Systemtechnik GmbH & Co. KG
Postfach 2451
D-32381 Minden
Tel. + 49 5 71 88 96 - 0
Fax + 49 5 71 88 96 - 2 82
E-mail: de.sales@HARTING.com
Internet: http://www.HARTING.com
Order Numbers
A-6 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Connectors for AIs/AOs
To connect actuators/sensors to the analog inputs/outputs of the corresponding
expansion modules, use 4- or 5-pin M12 coupler plugs. We recommend the
following connectors from Binder.
Table A-5 Connectors manufactured by Binder – order numbers
Description Order number
Connector 4-pin Outgoing cable unit PG 7
Connector 4-pin Outgoing cable unit PG 9
Connector 5-pin Outgoing cable unit PG 7
Connector 5-pin Outgoing cable unit PG 9
99-1429-814-04
99-1429-812-04
99-1437-814-05
99-1437-812-05
Address for ordering:
Franz Binder GmbH + Co.-74172 Neckarsulm
Order Numbers
A-7
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Spare parts for ET 200X
Table A-6 Spare parts for ET 200X – order numbers
Description Order number
Labels for ET 200X (10 8 mm)
(20 strips of 40 labels) 6ES7 194-1BA00-
0XA0
Labels for ET 200X, ET 200X-DESINA and
ET 200X-ECOFAST (20 9 mm)
(19 strips of 20 labels)
3RT 1900-1SB50
Plugs for pneumatic module 6ES7 194-1JA00-0XA0
Connector plate (for BM 141, BM 142) 6ES7 194-1FC00-0XA0
Cables for the ET 200X
Table A-7 lists all the cables for the ET 200 distributed I/O system which you may
require in conjunction with the ET 200X.
Table A-7 Network components for the ET 200 distributed I/O system
Network components Order number
Cables:
2-core, shielded cable (bus cable)
2-core, shielded cable (bus cable)
halogen free
2-core, shielded cable (bus cable)
with PUR sheath
6XV1 830-0AH10
6XV1 830-0CH10
6XV1 830-0DH10
2-core, shielded cable (bus cable) with PE sheath 6XV1 830-0BH10
2-core, shielded cable (bus cable) for festooning 6XV1 830-3CH10
Drum cable 6XV1 830-3BH10
Direct-buried cable 6XV1 830-3AH10
Cable, 5-core, uncut (for bus and sensor supply;
with PVC sheath) 6ES7 194-1LY00-0AA0
Cable, 5-core, uncut; oil-resistant, drum-capable,
conditionally welding-resistant (for bus and sensor
supply; with PUR sheath)
6ES7 194-1LY10-0AA0
Order Numbers
A-8 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
MOBY modules
The following expansion module can be used with the ET 200X.
Table A-8 MOBY modules
Network components Order number
ASM 473 interface module for MOBY 6GT2 002-0HA10
Manuals for STEP 7 and SIMATIC S7
You require one of the manuals listed below to program and commission the ET
200X with STEP 7.
Table A-9 Manuals for STEP 7 and SIMATIC S7
Manual Contents
S7-300 Programmable Controller
Hardware and Installation etc.
Description of the PROFIBUS-DP master
interface of CPU 315-2 DP
Installing a PROFIBUS-DP network
RS 485 repeater
S7-400/M7-400 Programmable
Controllers
Hardware and Installation
etc.
Description of the PROFIBUS-DP master
interface in S7-400 and M7-400
Installing a PROFIBUS-DP network
RS 485 repeater
System software for S7-300/400
Program design
Programming Manual
etc.
Description of addressing and diagnostics on
SIMATIC S7
System software for S7-300/400
System and standard functions
Reference Manual
Description of the SFCs in STEP 7
Order Numbers
A-9
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Manual for the ET 200 in SIMATIC S5
You require the manual listed below to program and commission the ET 200X with
COM PROFIBUS.
Table A-10 Manual for ET 200 in SIMATIC S5
Manual Order number Contents
ET 200
distributed I/O
system
6ES5 998-3ES.2 Description of master interface IM 308-C for
S5-115U/H, S5-135U and S5-155U/H
Description of the S5-95U with the PROFIBUS-DP
master interface
Description of the procedure for installing a DP
system and an FMS system with the CP 5412 (A2)
as master
Handling COM PROFIBUS
Handling FB IM308C/FB 230
Technical guide to PROFIBUS-DP with SIMATIC S7 and STEP 7
Table A-11 Technical Guide to PROFIBUS-DP and SIMATIC S7
Technical guide Order number Contents
Decentralization with
PROFIBUS-DP
– Architecture and Fundamentals,
Configuration and Use with
SIMATIC S7 –
Josef Weigmann, Gerhard Kilian
Publicis MCD Verlag, 2nd Edition,
2000
In bookshops:
ISBN 3-89578-123-1
From your Siemens
agent:
A19100-L531-B772
Instruction manual for a
simple introduction to
PROFIBUS-DP and
implementation of
automation tasks with
PROFIBUS-DP and
SIMATIC S7.
Use of PROFIBUS-DP is
illustrated for the
SIMATIC-related examples.
Order Numbers
A-10 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
B-1
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Device Master Files
Device master file
A device master file contains all the slave-specific features. The structure of the
DDB file is specified in IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1.
You can download the device master files from the Internet. You will find all device
master files under ”Downloads” on the SIMATIC Customer Supports website at
http://www.ad.siemens.de/csi/gsd.
B
Device Master Files
B-2 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Other features
Table B-1 Other features of the modules of the ET 200X
Basic/expansion module Order number Manufac-
turer iden-
tification
Consis-
tency Ad-
dress
scope
(bytes)
Ad-
dress
range
BM 141 DI 8DC 24V 6ES7 141-1BF12-0XB0 803DHByte 1 Digital
BM 141 DI 8DC 24V
ECOFAST 6ES7 141-1BF01-0AB0 80D2HByte 1 Digital
BM 141 DI 8DC 24V
ECOFAST DIAG 6ES7 141-1BF40-0AB0 80D3HByte 1 Digital
BM 142 DO 4DC 24V/2A 6ES7 142-1BD22-0XB0 803CHByte 1 Digital
BM 143-DESINA FO 6ES7 143-1BF00-0XB0 809AHByte 2* Digital
BM 143-DESINA RS485 6ES7 143-1BF00-0AB0 809AHByte 2* Digital
EM 141 DI 4DC 24V 6ES7 141-1BD31-0XA0 –Byte 1 Digital
EM 141 DI 8DC 24V 6ES7 141-1BF31-0XA0 –Byte 1 Digital
EM 141 DI 8DC 24V DIAG 6ES7 141-1BF30-0XB0 –Byte 1 Digital
EM 141 DI 8DC 24V 6ES7 141-1BF41-0XA0 –Byte 1 Digital
EM 141 DI 8DC 24V DIAG 6ES7 141-1BF40-0XB0 –Byte 1 Digital
EM 142 DO 4DC 24V/0.5A 6ES7 142-1BD30-0XA0 –Byte 1 Digital
EM 142 DO 4DC 24V/2A 6ES7 142-1BD40-0XA0 –Byte 1 Digital
EM 142 DO 4DC 24V/2A 6ES7 142-1BD40-0XB0 –Byte 1 Digital
EM 142 DO 8DC 24V/1.2A 6ES7 142-1BF30-0XA0 –Byte 1 Digital
EM 143-DESINA 6ES7 143-1BF30-0XB0 –Byte 2* Digital
EM 144 AI 2U6ES7 144-1FB31-0XB0 –Word 4 Analog
EM 144 AI 2I (20 mA) 6ES7 144-1GB31-0XB0 –Word 4 Analog
EM 144 AI 2I (4 to 20 mA) 6ES7 144-1GB41-0XB0 –Word 4 Analog
EM 144 AI 2RTD 6ES7 144-1JB31-0XB0 –Word 4 Analog
EM 145 AO 2U6ES7 145-1FB31-0XB0 –Word 4 Analog
EM 145 AO 2I6ES7 145-1GB31-0XB0 –Word 4 Analog
EM 148-P DI 4DC 24V/DO
2P expansion module 6ES7 148-1DA00-0XA0 –Byte 1* Digital
EM 148-P DO 16P/CPV10
expansion module 6ES7 148-1EH01-0XA0 –Byte 2 Digital
EM 148-P DO 16P/CPV14
expansion module 6ES7 148-1EH11-0XA0 –Byte 2 Digital
* for inputs and outputs
C-1
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Dimesioned Drawings and Pinouts
You will find dimensioned drawings of the most important components of the
ET 200X below. You will also find essential pinout information for the ET 200X.
Contents of Chapter
Section Subject Page
C.1 Dimensioned drawings – basic modules C-2
C.2 Dimensioned drawings – expansion modules C-4
C.3 Dimensioned drawing – pneumatic module
EM 148-P DI 4 × DC 24 V/DO 2 × P C-5
C.4 Dimensioned drawing – pneumatic interface module
EM 148-P DO 16 × P/CPV10
and ...14
C-6
C.5 Dimensioned drawing – power module C-7
C.6 Dimensioned drawing – SIT OP power supply unit C-8
C.7 Dimensioned drawings – DIN rails C-9
C.8 Pinout of the ET 200X C-12
C.9 Pinout of the 8-channel expansion modules C-14
C.10 Pinout of the ET 200X-DESINA C-15
C.11 Pinout of the ET 200X-ECOFAST C-16
C.12 Pinout of analog inputs/outputs C-17
C
Dimesioned Drawings and Pinouts
C-2 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
C.1 Dimensioned drawings – basic modules
BM 141, BM 142 and BM 147/CPU basic modules
Figure C-1 below is a dimensioned drawing of a BM 141, BM 142, BM 147/CPU
basic module with bus connectors. You must add the length of the M16 cable
glands and the bending radius of your particular cable to the overall width and
depth specified.
110
90
107
126.8
53.5 28.25
134
120
Figure C-1 Dimensioned drawing of BM 141, BM 142, BM 147/CPU basic module
Dimesioned Drawings and Pinouts
C-3
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
DESINA and ECOFAST basic modules
The following figure C-2 shows you the dimensioned drawing of the basic modules
BM 141-ECOFAST and BM 143-DESINA with DESINA connectors.
You have to add the bending radius of the DESINA hybrid cable to the specified
overall height. You might have to add the length of the coupler plugs and the
bending radius of your particular cable to the specified overall depth.
174.9
168.4
148
162
107.9
83.8
53.5 28.25
178
110
Figure C-2 Dimensioned drawing of the BM 141-ECOFAST, BM 143-DESINA basic
modules
Dimesioned Drawings and Pinouts
C-4 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
C.2 Dimensioned drawings – expansion modules
The following figure C-3 shows you the dimensioned drawing of the expansion
modules EM 141, EM 142, EM 144, and EM 145. You must add the length of the
coupler plugs/Y busbar connection pieces and the bending radius of your particular
cable to the overall depth specified.
60
110
53
86.5
53.5 28.25
Figure C-3 Dimensioned drawing of EM 141, EM 142, EM 144, EM 145 expansion
modules
Figure C-4 below is a dimensioned drawing of EM 141 (high design),
EM 142 DO 8 x DC 24V/1.2A and EM 143-DESINA expansion modules.
You must add the length of the coupler plugs and the bending radius of your
particular cable to the specified overall depth.
Dimesioned Drawings and Pinouts
C-5
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
53.5 28.25
86.5
60
178
53
Figure C-4 Dimensioned drawing of EM 141 (high design),
EM 142 DO 8 x DC 24V/1.2A and EM 143-DESINA expansion modules
C.3 Dimensioned drawing – pneumatic module
EM 148-P DI 4 y DC 24 V/DO 2 y P
The dimensioned drawing of the pneumatic module is shown below. You have to
add the length and bending radius of the tubing to the specified overall height.
173
60 87
53.5 28.25
88
Figure C-5 Dimensioned drawing of the pneumatic module
Dimesioned Drawings and Pinouts
C-6 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
C.4 Dimensioned drawing – pneumatic interface module EM 148-P
DO 16 y P/CPV10 and ...14
The dimensioned drawing of the pneumatic interface module is shown below. You
must add the depth of the FESTO valve island, and the length and bending radius
of the tubing to the specified overall depth.
53.5
120
147
152
55
48.25
109.5
132
Figure C-6 Dimensioned drawing of the pneumatic interface module
Dimesioned Drawings and Pinouts
C-7
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
C.5 Dimensioned drawing – power module
The diagram below is a dimensioned drawing of a power module. You must add
the length of the coupler plugs/Y connectors and the bending radius of your
particular cables to the specified overall depth. You must add the bending radius of
your particular cable to the specified overall height if the load voltage is looped
through.
60
165
67
87
53.5 28.25
193
95
Figure C-7 Dimensioned drawing – power module
Dimesioned Drawings and Pinouts
C-8 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
C.6 Dimensioned drawing – SITOP power supply unit
The figure below shows the dimensioned drawing of the SITOP power power
supply. You must add the bending radius of your particular cable to the specified
overall height.
53.5
53.5 28.25
119.5
146.5
265
283
103.5
126.5
133.5
8.8197
160.5
Figure C-8 Dimensioned drawing of SITOP power
Dimesioned Drawings and Pinouts
C-9
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
C.7 Dimensioned drawings – DIN rails
6ES7 194-1GA00-0XA0
6ES7 194-1GA10-0XA0
6ES7 194-1GA20-0XA0
(without mounting holes)
Max. 200
Figure C-9 Dimensioned drawings of the Narrow DIN rails
Dimesioned Drawings and Pinouts
C-10 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Note
You must cut the narrow DIN rail (with a length of 2000) to suit your requirements
and drill the mounting holes for M8 screws.
To ensure that all the ET 200X modules have the specified vibration resistance,
the mounting holes should be spaced at even intervals of a maximum 200 mm
after initial spacing of 12 mm.
Dimesioned Drawings and Pinouts
C-11
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
6ES7 194-1GB00-0XA0
6ES7 194-1GB10-0XA0
Figure C-10 Dimensioned drawings of the wide DIN rails
Dimesioned Drawings and Pinouts
C-12 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
C.8 Pinout of the ET 200X
Figure C-11 below shows the pinout of the ET 200X on a BM 141, BM 142,
BM 147/CPU basic module. The arrangement of sockets X1 to X4 is the same on
all basic and expansion modules (BM 141, BM 142, EM 141, EM 142, EM 144,
EM 145) with digital inputs and outputs.
1
2
3
45
654
32
1
X1 X2
X3 X4
654
654
32
1
32
1
X01
X02
X03
Basic module
Socket
X01 and X10
(supply voltage
for electronic com-
ponents/sensors,
PROFIBUS-DP)
Pinout
1 B signal
2PE
3 PE/–*
4 A signal
5L+
6M
X03
(load voltage) 1PE
2L+
3M
4PE
5L+
6M
* BM 141/142: PE
BM 147/CPU: not assigned
Figure C-11 Pinout of the ET 200X (BM 141, BM 142, BM 147/CPU)
Socket Pinout of
8-channel DI Pinout of
4-channel DI Pinout of
4-channel DO Pinout of
pneumatic module
(4-channel DI)
X1 1 Sensor supply
output L+
2 Input signal,
channel 4
3 Grounding
supply voltage
4 Input signal,
channel 0
5PE
1 Sensor supply
output L+
2 Input signal,
channel 1
3 Grounding
supply voltage
4 Input signal,
channel 0
5PE
1–
2 Output signal,
channel 1
3 Grounding
Load current power
supply
4 Output signal,
channel 0
5PE
1 Sensor supply
output L+
2 Input signal,
channel 1
3 Grounding
supply voltage
4 Input signal,
channel 0
5PE
X2 1 Sensor supply
output L+
2 Input signal,
channel 5
3 Grounding
supply voltage
4 Input signal,
channel 1
5PE
1 Sensor supply
output L+
2–
3 Grounding
supply voltage
4 Input signal,
channel 1
5PE
1–
2–
3 Grounding
Load current power
supply
4 Output signal,
channel 1
5PE
1 Sensor supply
output L+
2 Input signal,
channel 3
3 Grounding
supply voltage
4 Input signal,
channel 2
5PE
Dimesioned Drawings and Pinouts
C-13
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Socket Pinout of
pneumatic module
(4-channel DI)
Pinout of
4-channel DO
Pinout of
4-channel DI
Pinout of
8-channel DI
X3 1 Sensor supply
output L+
2 Input signal,
channel 6
3 Grounding
supply voltage
4 Input signal,
channel 2
5PE
1 Sensor supply
output L+
2 Input signal,
channel 3
3 Grounding
supply voltage
4 Input signal,
channel 2
5PE
1–
2 Output signal,
channel 3
3 Grounding
Load current power
supply
4 Output signal,
channel 2
5PE
–
X4 1 Sensor supply
output L+
2 Input signal,
channel 7
3 Grounding
supply voltage
4 Input signal,
channel 3
5PE
1 Sensor supply
output L+
2–
3 Grounding
supply voltage
4 Input signal,
channel 3
5PE
1–
2–
3 Grounding
Load current power
supply
4 Output signal,
channel 3
5PE
–
Dimesioned Drawings and Pinouts
C-14 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
C.9 Pinout of the 8-channel expansion modules
Figure C-12 below shows the pinout of the 8-channel DI/DO expansion modules of
the ET 200X on an expansion module (high design). The arrangement of sockets
X1 to X8 is the same on all expansion modules with digital inputs and outputs.
X1
X3
X5
X7
X2
X4
X6
X8
123
5
Figure C-12 Pinout of the 8-channel DI/DO expansion module
Socket Pinout
8-channel DI Pinout
8-channel DO
X1 to X8 1 Sensor supply output L+
2 not assigned
3 Grounding supply voltage
4 Input signal channel n
5PE
1 not assigned
2 not assigned
3 Grounding load current power supply
4 Output signal channel n
5PE
Dimesioned Drawings and Pinouts
C-15
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
C.10 Pinout of the ET 200X-DESINA
Figure C-13 shows you the pinout of the ET 200X-DESINA using the example of
the BM 143-DESINA FO basic module.
The BM 143-DESINA RS485 basic module has the same pinout on the
PROFIBUS-DP connection (pins 5 and 6) but has copper conductors instead of
fiber-optic cables. The arrangement of sockets X1 to X8 is identical for all DESINA
basic and expansion modules with digital inputs and outputs.
X01 X02
X1
X3
X5
X7
X2
X4
X6
X8
1
2
3
4
5
View of DESINA
connections
(fiber-optic cables)
Supply
Looping through
5
2
1
6
3
4
5
2
1
6
3
4
Socket
X01
Supply
(Supply voltage
for electronics/
sensors, actuators
PROFIBUS-DP)
Pinout
1 L+ (NS*)
2 M (NS*)
3 M (S**)
4 L+ (S**)
5 Signal A (RD***)
6 Signal B (TD***)
X02
Loop through 1 L+ (NS*)
2 M (NS*)
3 M (S**)
4 L+ (S**)
5 Signal A (RD***)
6 Signal B (TD***)
* Non-switched supply voltage
** Switched load voltage
*** on the basis of the DESINA specification
Figure C-13 Pinout of the ET 200X-DESINA
Socket Pinout of the 8-channel DI/DO
X1
X3
X5
X7
1 Sensor supply output L+ (NS)
2 Diagnostic input or input with NC function.
3 Grounding supply voltage
4 Digital input or output (DESINA) channels 0, 2, 4 and 6
5 not assigned
X2
X4
X6
X8
1 Sensor supply output L+ (NS)
2 Diagnostic input or input with NC function.
3 Grounding supply voltage
4 Digital input or output (DESINA) channels 1, 3, 5 and 7
5 not assigned
Dimesioned Drawings and Pinouts
C-16 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
C.11 Pinout of the ET 200X-ECOFAST
Figure C-14 shows the pinout of the BM 141-ECOFAST 8DI basic module.
X01 X02
X1
X3
X5
X7
X2
X4
X6
X8
1
2
3
4
5
View of the ECO-
FAST connections
(RS 485)
Supply
Looping through
5
2
1
6
3
4
5
2
1
6
3
4
Socket
X01
Supply
(Supply voltage
for electronics/
sensors, actuators
PROFIBUS-DP)
Pinout
1 L+ (NS*)
2 M (NS*)
3 M (S**)
4 L+ (S**)
5 Signal A
6 Signal B
X02
Loop through 1 L+ (NS*)
2 M (NS*)
3 M (S**)
4 L+ (S**)
5 Signal A
6 Signal B
* Non-switched supply voltage
** Switched load voltage
Figure C-14 Pinout of the BM 141-ECOFAST 8DI basic module
Socket Pinout of the BM 141-ECOFAST 8DI
X1
X3
X5
X7
1 Sensor supply output L+ (NS)
2 not assigned
3 Grounding supply voltage
4 Digital input channels 0, 2, 4 and 6
5 not assigned
X2
X4
X6
X8
1 Sensor supply output L+ (NS)
2 not assigned
3 Grounding supply voltage
4 Digital input channels 1, 3, 5 and 7
5 not assigned
Dimesioned Drawings and Pinouts
C-17
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
C.12 Pinout of analog inputs/outputs
Figure C-15 below shows the pinout of the inputs/outputs of the ET 200X on an
expansion module. The arrangement of the sockets is identical for all expansion
modules with analog inputs and outputs.
1
2
3
X1 X2
Expansion module with analog inputs/outputs
4
Figure C-15 Pinout of expansion module with analog inputs/outputs
Socket Pinout of 2-channel AI Pinout of 2-channel AO
Voltage/current Current Voltage Current
10 V
20 mA
Pt 100
4 to 20 mA 10 V 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
X1 1L+
2 Channel 0 (+)
3 Ground power
supply
4 Channel 0 (–)
1 L+; channel 0 (+)
2 Channel 0 (–)
3 Ground power
supply
4–
1 Qv channel 0
2–
3 Ground power
supply
4–
1 QI channel 0
2–
3 Ground power
supply
4–
X2 1L+
2 Channel 1 (+)
3 Ground power
supply
4 Channel 1 (–)
1 L+; channel 1 (+)
2 Channel 1 (–)
3 Ground power
supply
4–
1 Qv channel 1
2–
3 Ground power
supply
4–
1 QI channel 1
2–
3 Ground power
supply
4–
Dimesioned Drawings and Pinouts
C-18 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Glossary-1
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Glossary
Aggregate current
Aggregate of the currents of all output channels of a digital output module.
Automation system
An automation system is a programmable logic controller consisting of at least
one CPU, various input and output modules and operator interfaces.
Bus
Common transmission channel to which all stations are connected; a bus has
two defined ends.
In the case of the ET 200, the bus is a two-wire or fiber-optic cable.
Bus connector
The physical link between bus node and bus cable. There is a special bus
connector for ET 200X (= connector for PROFIBUS-DP) with a degree of
protection rating of IP 65.
Chassis ground
Chassis ground refers to all the interconnected inactive parts of a piece of
equipment that, even in the event of a fault, cannot carry voltage that is
dangerous to the touch.
Configure
Configuring means planning individual components in a distributed I/O system.
Device master file
A device master file contains all the DP-slave-specific features. The format of the
DDB file is specified inIEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1.
Glossary
Glossary-2 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
DESINA
Distributed and Standardized INstAllation technique for machine tools
DESINA is an all-inclusive general concept for standardization of
installation-relevant components in terms of function and connection technology.
End-to-end usage of DESINA-compliant components can produce significant
savings in the costs of system planning, implementation and operation.
Diagnostic interrupt
Diagnostics-compatible modules use diagnostic interrupts to notify the central
CPU of system errors.
In SIMATIC S7/M7: When an err or is detected or disappears (e.g. wire br eak),
ET 200X tr igger s a diagnostic interrupt , pr ov ided the inter r upt is enabled. The CPU
of the DP master interrupts the processing of the user program and lower priority
classes and processes the diagnostic interr upt block (OB 82).
In SIMATIC S5: The diagnostic interrupt appears in the station diagnosis. Using
cyclical querying of the diagnostic bits in the station diagnosis you can detect
errors such as a wire break.
Diagnostics
Diagnostics means the detection, localization, classification, reporting and
evaluation of faults, malfunctions and messages.
Diagnostics incorporates monitoring functions which run automatically while the
system is in operation. This enhances system availability by reducing setup
times and outages.
Direct starter
A direct starter is a Motor starter which switches a motor on or off directly. It
consists of a power circuit-breaker and a contactor.
Distributed I/O devices
These are input/output units that are not located in the base unit; instead, they
are distributed at some distance from the CPU. The following are examples of
such units:
ET 200M, ET 200B, ET 200C, ET 200U, ET 200X, ET 200L
DP/AS-I Link
S5-95U with PROFIBUS-DP slave interface
Other DP slaves from either Siemens or other vendors
The distributed I/O devices are connected to the DP master via PROFIBUS-DP.
Glossary
Glossary-3
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
DP address
→ PROFIBUS address
DP master
A master that complies with IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1 is described as a
DP master.
DP slave
A slave that is operat ed on PROFI B US with the PRO F IB US-DP prot ocol and
that complies with IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1 standar d is called a DP slave.
DP standard
The DP standard is the bus protocol of the ET 200 distributed I/O system based
on IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1.
DPV0
Cyclic data transfer between the DP master and DP slaves.
DPV1
Extension of DPV0 with an acyclic data transfer between the DP master and DP
slaves.
Equipotential bonding
Electrical connection (equipotential bonding conductor) that brings the parts of
electrical equipment and other conductive parts to the same or approximately the
same potential in order to prevent troublesome or dangerous voltages arising
between these parts.
Error handling
→ Diagnostics
External power supply
Power supply for the ET 200X distributed I/O device and the process peripherals
connected to it.
Glossary
Glossary-4 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
FREEZE
This is a control command of the DP master to a group of DP slaves.
When a DP slave receives the FREEZE control command, it freezes the current
status of the inputs and transfers them cyclically to the DP master.
After each subsequent FREEZE control command, the DP slave freezes the
status of the inputs again.
The input dat a is not transf err ed from the DP slave to the DP mast er again
cyclic ally until the DP master sends the UNFRE E ZE control command.
Frequency converter
On the ET 200X the frequency converter is used for infinitely variable adjustment
of the speed and adaptation of the power of asynchronous motors up to 1.5 kW
rated power. Temperature monitoring device and motor brake are integrated.
The converter is parameterized appropriately for the connected motor. Operation
of the frequency converter is controlled by the software.
Ground
The conductive mass of earth, the electrical potential of which can be set to zero
at any point. In the vicinity of grounding electrodes the potential may not be zero.
The term ”reference ground” is often used here.
Grounding
Grounding means to connect a conductive component with the grounding
electrode via a ground system.
Isolated
In the case of isolated input/output modules, the reference potentials of the
control and load circuit are galvanically isolated – by means of optical isolators or
relay contacts, for example. Input/output circuits can be grouped.
Master
When they are in possession of the token, masters can send data to and request
data from other nodes (= active node). The CPU 315-2 DP and the IM 308-C are
examples of DP masters.
Motor starter
Motor starter is the overall term for Direct and Reversing Starters. Motor
starters determine the start-up and direction of rotation of a motor (= load).
Glossary
Glossary-5
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Node
A device that can send, receive or amplify data via the bus, such as a DP
master, DP slave, RS 485 repeater or active star coupler.
Node address
→ PROFIBUS address
Non-isolated
In the case of non-isolated input/output modules, the reference potentials of the
control and load circuit are electrically connected.
Parameterize
Parameterizing means sending slave parameters from the DP master to the DP
slave.
PROFIBUS
PROcess FIeld BUS – German process and field bus standard that is defined in
IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1. It defines the functional, electrical and
mechanical properties of a bit-serial field bus system.
PROFIBUS is available with the protocols DP (the German abbreviation for
distributed I/O), FMS (= field bus message specification), PA (= process
automation), or TF (= technology functions).
PROFIBUS address
Each bus node must receive a PROFIBUS address to uniquely identify it on the
PROFIBUS bus system.
The PC/programming device has the PROFIBUS address ”0”.
PROFIBUS addresses 1 to 125 are permissible for the ET 200X distributed I/O
device.
Reference potential
Potential from which the voltages of the circuits involved can be observed and/or
measured.
Reversing starter
A reversing starter is a motor starter which determines a motor’s direction of
rotation. It consists of a power circuit-breaker and two contactors.
Glossary
Glossary-6 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Segment
The bus line between two terminating resistors forms a segment. A segment
contains 0 to 32 nodes. Segments can be interconnected by means of RS 485
repeaters.
Slave
A slav e can only exchange data wit h a master when requested by it to do so. By
slaves we mean, for example, all DP slaves , such as ET 200B , ET 200X , ET 200M
etc.
Station number
→ PROFIBUS address
SYNC
This is a control command of the DP master to a group of DP slaves.
By means of the SYNC control command the DP master causes the DP slave to
freeze the current statuses of the outputs. In the subsequent frames, the DP
slave stores the output data, but the statuses of the outputs remain unchanged.
After each new SYNC control command, the DP slave set s the outputs that it has
stor ed as output data. The outputs are not cyclic ally updated again until the DP
mast er sends the UNSYNC cont r ol com mand.
Terminating resistor
The terminating resistor is a resistor for adjusting the power on the bus cable;
terminating resistors must be used on the cable and segment ends.
The terminating resistors in the ET 200X are switched on and off in the basic
module.
The ET 200X-DESINA connects to the bus by means of a fiber-optic waveguide,
so no terminating resistors are required.
Transmission rate
The transmission rate of a data transfer is measured in bits transmitted per
second (transmission rate = bit rate).
In the case of the ET 200X, transmission rates of 9.6 kbps to 12 Mbps are
possible.
Index-1
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Index
Zahlen
24 VDC LED, 5-14
24 VDC supply, 4-3
24 VDC-LED, 5-19
A
Aggregate current, Glossary-1
Alarms, configuration for ET 200X-DESINA,
5-44
Analog module, pin assignment, C-17
Analog value
measured-value resolution (S5 format),
7-94
measured-value resolution (S7 format),
7-87
sign, 7-87, 7-94
Analog value representation
measuring range, 7-84
SIMATIC S5 format, 7-95
SIMATIC S7 format, 7-88
Automation system, Glossary-1
B
Bared length, 4-17
example, 4-17
Basic module, 1-5
pin assignment, C-12
Basic module BM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V, pinout,
digital inputs, 7-3
Basic module BM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V
ECOFAST, pinout, digital inputs, 7-8
Basic module BM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V
ECOFAST DIAG, pinout, digital inputs, 7-12
Basic module BM 143-DESINA FO
basic circuit diagram, 7-23
parameter, 7-24
technical specifications, 7-26
Basic module BM 143-DESINA RS485
basic circuit diagram, 7-29
parameter, 7-30
pinout, digital inputs/outputs, 7-28
technical specifications, 7-32
Baud rate, settings, 6-4
BF LED, 5-13
BM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V, pinout, digital inputs,
7-3
BM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V basic module
basic circuit diagram, 7-4
technical specifications, 7-6
BM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V basic module ,
parameters, 7-5
BM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V ECOFAST, pinout,
digital inputs, 7-8
BM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V ECOFAST basic
module
basic circuit diagram, 7-9
technical specifications, 7-11
BM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V ECOFAST basic
module , parameters, 7-10
BM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG,
pinout, digital inputs, 7-12
BM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG basic
module
basic circuit diagram, 7-14
technical specifications, 7-16
BM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG basic
module , parameters, 7-15
BM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A, pin assignment,
digital outputs, 7-18
BM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A basic module
basic circuit diagram, 7-19
parameters, 7-20
pin assignment, digital outputs, 7-18
technical specifications, 7-20
BM 143-DESINA expansion module,
parameters, 7-67
BM 143-DESINA FO, pinout, digital
inputs/outputs, 7-22
BM 143-DESINA FO basic module, pinout,
digital inputs/outputs, 7-22
BM 143-DESINA RS485, pinout, digital
inputs/outputs, 7-28
Bus, Glossary-1
Bus connector, Glossary-1
Bus fault, display, 5-13
Bus parameters, setting, 6-4
C
Cable types, suitable, 4-12
Cables, outside diameter, 4-17
Index
Index-2 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
CE, certification, 6-2
Certification, CE, 6-2
Changes since previous version, manual, iii
Channel-specific diagnosis, 5-39
Chassis ground, Glossary-1
Climatic environmental conditions, 6-6
Commissioning, 5-1
ET 200X, 5-7
Communication processor, CP 142-2, 1-16
Components, 1-5
Compressed air, 3-13
feeding, 3-11
oil types, 7-73
properties, 7-72
Configuration, electrical, 4-6
Configuration connector, 3-16, 3-18
Configuration error, 5-23
Configuration of ET 200X-DESINA, 5-3
Configuration options, 2-3
connection of ET 200X, 2-3
ET 200X with power modules, 2-17
ET 200X with SITOP power, 2-11
Configure, Glossary-1
Connecting
loads to analog outputs, 7-109
sensors to analog inputs, 7-106
to protective ground, 4-30, 4-32
Connection, of tubing, 3-12
Connector
DESINA, 4-34
removing, 4-16
unplugging, 4-33
Connectors
design, 4-14
installing, 4-15
pinout, 4-18, 4-19
plugging in, 4-33
wiring, 4-15
Contents of the manual, iv
Core cross-section, 4-17
cable, 4-12
Cores
bared length, 4-17
number of, 4-17
Coupler plug M12, unplugging, 4-33
CPV10, 1-12
CPV14, 1-12
CSA certification, 6-3
Current consumption, raising limit, 2-16
D
DC 24V-NS LED, 5-15
DC 24V-S LED, 5-16
Definition
grounded supply, 4-4
of electromagnetic compatibility, 6-4
of station status, 5-34
Degree of protection, 1-3, 4-20, 6-9, 6-9
Delivery package, iv
DESINA
connector, 4-34
hybrid cable, 4-12
Device master file, 5-9, B-1, Glossary-1
Devices, connectable on PROFIBUS-DP, 1-2
Diagnosis
channel-specific, 5-39
DP slave, 5-27
extended, 5-27
ID-specific, 5-37
interrupt section for ET 200X-DESINA, 5-43
module status, 5-38
reading out, 5-29
Diagnostic interrupt, 5-22, Glossary-2
triggering, 5-25
Diagnostics, Glossary-2
parameterizable, 5-20
using LEDs, 5-13
with STEP 5 or STEP 7, 5-27
DIL switch
for setting the PROFIBUS address, 3-17
PROFIBUS address, 3-16
Dimensioned drawing
basic module, C-2
basic module BM 141-ECOFAST, C-3
basic module BM 143-DESINA FO, C-3
basic module BM 143-DESINA RS485, C-3
DIN rail wide, 3-5, C-11
DIN rails narrow, 3-4, C-9
EM 143-DESINA expansion module, C-4
expansion module, C-4
installation on firm base, 3-15
pneumatic interface module, C-6
pneumatic module, C-5
power module, C-7
SITOP power, C-8
DIN rail, 3-2
DIN rails narrow, dimensioned drawings, 3-4,
C-9
DIN rails wide, dimensioned drawings, 3-5,
C-11
DIP switch, connecting a terminating resistor,
3-20
Direct starter, Glossary-2
Disassembly, pneumatics components, 3-15
Display, status, 5-17
Distributed I/O device, 1-2, Glossary-2
Double wiring, actuators/sensors, 4-27
Index
Index-3
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
DP address, Glossary-3
DP master, 1-2, 1-6, 1-9, Glossary-3
DP slave, 1-2, Glossary-3
DP standard, Glossary-3
E
Electrical configuration, 4-6
Electrical phenomena, protection against, 4-3
Electromagnetic compatibility, 6-4
ELECTRONIC/SENSOR 1L+-LED, 5-19
EM 141 DI 4 x DC 24V, pinout, digital inputs,
7-34
EM 141 DI 4 x DC 24V expansion module
basic circuit diagram, 7-35
technical specifications, 7-36
EM 141 DI 8 x DC 24 V DIAG expansion
module, parameters, 7-42, 7-49
EM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V
pin assignment, digital inputs, 7-37
pinout, digital inputs, 7-37, 7-44
EM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V (6ES7
141-1BF40-0XA0) expansion module ,
technical specifications, 7-46
EM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V DIAG, pinout, digital
inputs, 7-40, 7-47
EM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V DIAG expansion
module (6ES7 141-1BF40-0XB0), basic
circuit diagram, 7-41, 7-48
EM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V expansion module
(6ES7 141-1BF30-0XA0)
basic circuit diagram, 7-38
technical specifications, 7-38
EM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V expansion module
(6ES7 141-1BF40-0XA0)
basic circuit diagram, 7-45
technical specifications, 7-50
EM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V expansion module
(6ES7 141-1BF40-0XB0), technical
specifications, 7-43
EM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/0.5A, pinout, digital
outputs, 7-51
EM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/0.5A expansion
module
basic circuit diagram, 7-52
technical specifications, 7-53
EM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A
pin assignment, digital outputs, 7-57
pinout, digital outputs, 7-54
EM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A expansion module
basic circuit diagram, 7-55, 7-58
pin assignment, digital outputs, 7-57
technical specifications, 7-56, 7-61
EM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A expansion module
, parameters, 7-59
EM 142 DO 8 x DC 24V/1.2A, pin assignment,
digital outputs, 7-62
EM 142 DO 8 x DC 24V/1.2A expansion
module
basic circuit diagram, 7-63
pin assignment, digital outputs, 7-62
technical specifications, 7-64
EM 143-DESINA, pinout, digital inputs/outputs,
7-65
EM 143-DESINA expansion module
basic circuit diagram, 7-66
pinout, digital inputs/outputs, 7-65
technical specifications, 7-68
EM 144 AI 2 x I (+/-20mA), pinout, analog
inputs, 7-114
EM 144 AI 2 x I (+/-20mA) expansion module
basic circuit diagram, 7-115
pinout, analog inputs, 7-114
technical specifications, 7-115
EM 144 AI 2 x I (4 to 20mA), pinout, analog
inputs, 7-117
EM 144 AI 2 x I (4 to 20mA) expansion
module, basic circuit diagram, 7-118
EM 144 AI 2 x I expansion module (4 to 20mA)
pinout, analog inputs, 7-117
technical specifications, 7-119
EM 144 AI 2 x RTD, pinout, analog inputs,
7-120
EM 144 AI 2 x RTD expansion module
basic circuit diagram, 7-121
pinout, analog inputs, 7-120
technical specifications, 7-122
EM 144 AI 2 x U, pinout, analog inputs, 7-111
EM 144 AI 2 x U expansion module
basic circuit diagram, 7-112
pinout, analog inputs, 7-111
technical specifications, 7-112
EM 145 AO 2 x I, pinout, analog outputs, 7-126
EM 145 AO 2 x I expansion module
basic circuit diagram, 7-127
pinout, analog outputs, 7-126
technical specifications, 7-128
EM 145 AO 2 x U, pinout, analog inputs, 7-123
EM 145 AO 2 x U expansion module
basic circuit diagram, 7-124
pinout, analog inputs, 7-123
technical specifications, 7-125
EM 148-P DI 4 x DC 24V/DO 2 x P, pin
assignment, digital inputs, 7-70
EM 148-P DI 4 x DC 24V/DO 2 x P expansion
module
basic circuit diagram, 7-71
pin assignment, digital inputs, 7-70
pneumatic connection diagram, 7-71
technical specifications, 7-72
Index
Index-4 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
EM 148-P DO 16 x P/CPV10, features, 7-74
EM 148-P DO 16 x P/CPV10 expansion
module
basic circuit diagram, 7-74
technical specifications, 7-75
EM 148-P DO 16 x P/CPV14, features, 7-76
EM 148-P DO 16 x P/CPV14 expansion
module
basic circuit diagram, 7-76
features, 7-76
technical specifications, 7-77
EMC, 4-31, 4-32, 6-4
EMERGENCY STOP devices, 4-2
Emission of radio interference, 6-5
Equipotential bonding, Glossary-3
Error handling, Glossary-3
ET 200X
commissioning, 5-7
features, 1-6
installing, 3-6
installing on DIN rail, 3-6
range of modules, 1-5
wired, 4-36
wiring, 4-11
Expansion module, 1-5
number per ET 200X, 2-13, 2-16
Expansion module EM 141 DI 4 x DC 24V,
pinout, digital inputs, 7-34
Expansion module EM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V,
pinout, digital inputs, 7-44
Expansion module EM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V
(6ES7 141-1BF30-0XA0), pinout, digital
inputs, 7-37
Expansion module EM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V
(6ES7 141-1BF40-0XA0), pinout, digital
inputs, 7-44
Expansion module EM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V
(6ES7 141-1BF40-0XB0), pinout, digital
inputs, 7-41, 7-48
Expansion module EM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V
DIAG, pinout, digital inputs, 7-40, 7-47
Expansion module EM 142 DO 4 x DC
24V/0.5A, pinout, digital outputs, 7-51
Expansion module EM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A,
pinout, digital outputs, 7-54
Expansion module EM 148-P DO 16 x
P/CPV10, features, 7-74
Extended diagnosis, 5-27
External power supply, Glossary-3
F
FB 192 ”IM308C”, 5-31
FB 230, 5-29
Features
of ET 200X, 1-6
of ET 200X-DESINA, 1-8
Four-wire measuring transducer, 7-106
connection, 7-108
FREEZE, Glossary-4
Frequency converter, Glossary-4
number per ET 200X, 2-13
Frequency converters, 1-6
G
General technical specifications, 6-1
Ground, Glossary-4
Grounded supply, 4-4
Grounding, 4-1
analog modules, 4-32
Guide, through the manual, iv
H
Hardware interrupt, triggering, 5-26
I
I/O device, distributed, 1-2
ID-specific diagnosis, 5-37
Identification code for Australia, 6-2
IEC 61131, 6-2
Important information, iii
Install, pneumatic-interface module, 3-14
Installation, 3-1
sequence, 3-1
SITOP power, 3-7
valve island, 3-13
Installation position, of the ET 200X, 3-2
Installing
ET 200X, 3-6
pneumatic components, 3-11
Insulation testing, 6-9
Integrating the DDB file in the configuration
software, 5-9
Interrupts, 5-24, 5-43
from station diagnosis, 5-53
Index
Index-5
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
IP 65, 6-9
IP 66, 6-9
IP 67, 6-9
Isolated, Glossary-4
Isolation, between..., 4-6
L
LED
24 VDC, 5-14, 5-19
BF, 5-13
DC 24V-NS, 5-15
DC 24V-S, 5-16
display, 1-6
ELECTRONIC/SENSOR 1L+, 5-19
LOAD 2L+, 5-19
ON, 5-13
RUN, 5-15
SF, 5-13, 5-15
status, 5-17
status indication, 5-13
TEMP >, 5-19
LED red/yellow for pin 2, 5-16, 5-18
LED; yellow for pin 4, 5-16, 5-18
LEDs, indicators, 1-8
Limits of travel of pneumatic cylinders,
retrieving, 7-73
LOAD 2L+-LED, 5-19
Load supply voltage, feeding, 2-8
Load voltage, feeding, 2-10
Loads, connecting to analog outputs, 7-109
Lower limit violation, 5-23
M
M12 coupler plugs, 4-22
plugging in, 4-33
M16 cable gland, 4-14
Manual
changes since previous version, iii
purpose of, iii
Manual pack, 1-17
Manuals, other, v
Manufacturer ID, structure, 5-36
Master PROFIBUS address, structure, 5-36
Masters, Glossary-4
Maximum configuration, 2-13, 2-16
Measured-value resolution
analog value (S5 format), 7-94
analog value (S7 format), 7-87
Measuring sensor, connecting to analog inputs,
7-106
Mechanical environmental conditions, 6-6
Module status, 5-38
Motor starter, Glossary-4
number per ET 200X, 2-13
Motor starters, 1-6
N
NEMA, 6-10
Network, PROFIBUS-DP, 1-3
Node, Glossary-5
Node address, Glossary-5
Non-isolated, Glossary-5
Non-return valve, 3-12
Number
expansion module per ET 200X, 2-13
expansion modules per ET 200X, 2-16
O
OB 40, 5-26
OB 82, 5-22, 5-25
Oils, for compressed air, 7-73
ON LED, 5-13
Operating mode of the DP master, effect on
analog value, 7-103
Order numbers, A-1
Overall configuration in TN-S system, 4-5
P
Parameter
BM 143-DESINA FO, 7-24
BM 143-DESINA RS485, 7-30
Parameter assignment error, 5-23
Parameterizable diagnostic messages, 5-20
Parameterize, Glossary-5
Parameters
analog inputs and outputs, 7-85
BM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V basic module, 7-5
BM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V ECOFAST basic
module, 7-10
BM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG
basic module, 7-15
BM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A basic module,
7-20
BM 143-DESINA, 7-67
EM 141 DI 8 x DC 24 V DIAG expansion
module, 7-42, 7-49
EM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A, 7-59
PM 148 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A, 7-80
Pin assignment
analog module , C-17
basic module, C-12
DESINA connector, C-14
Index
Index-6 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Pinout
BM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V ECOFAST, C-16
BM 141-DI 8 x DC 24V ECOFAST, 4-21
BM 143-DESINA FO, 4-21
connector for load power supply, 4-19
connector for PROFIBUS-DP, 4-18
connectors for supply voltage/sensors, 4-18
DESINA connector, 4-21, C-15
Plugging in, connectors, 4-33
PM 148 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A, pin assignment,
digital outputs, 7-79
PM 148 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A expansion module
parameters, 7-80
pin assignment, digital outputs, 7-79
PM 148 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A expansion module
, properties, 7-78
PM 148 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A power module
basic circuit diagram, 7-79
technical specifications, 7-82
Pneumatic components, 1-6
Pneumatic connection diagram, EM 148-P DI 4
x DC 24V/DO 2 x P, 7-71
Pneumatic cylinders, limit of travel retrieval,
7-73
Pneumatic interface module, 1-12
address assignment, 1-13, 7-75, 7-77
number per ET 200X, 2-13
Pneumatic module, 1-11
diameter of tubing, 3-11
silencer connection, 3-11
Pollution severity, 6-9
Power connector, unplugging, 4-33
Power connectors, plugging in, 4-33
Power input
restriction due to, 2-16
restrictions imposed by, 2-13
Power module, 1-14, 7-78
Product overview , 1-1
PROFIBUS, Glossary-5
PROFIBUS address, 1-6, Glossary-5
location of the DIL switches, 3-16
modifying, 3-19
setting, 3-16, 3-18
PROFIBUS standard, 6-2
PROFIBUS-DP, 1-2
network, 1-3
PROFIBUS-DP, specifications, B-1
Protection, external, 4-10
Protection against external electrical
phenomena, 4-3
Protective ground
connecting to basic module, 4-30
connecting to expansion modules with
AI/AO , 4-32
Protective measures, 4-4
Pulse-shaped interference, 6-4
R
Range of modules, ET 200X, 1-5
Rated flow, of air, 1-12
Rated voltage, 6-10
Reference potential, Glossary-5
Regulations for operation, 4-2
Required basic knowledge, iii
Reset time, 7-85
Resistance thermometer, connecting, 7-109
Restrictions on maximum configuration, 2-13
Restrictions on the maximum system
configuration, 2-16
Reversing starter, Glossary-5
Rules
connector wiring, 4-17
general, 4-2
RUN LED, 5-15
S
S7 diagnostics, 5-28
Safety class, 6-9
Safety regulations, 4-2
Scope of validity, iii
of the manual, iii
Segment, Glossary-6
Settings, SITOP power, 4-39
SF LED, 5-13, 5-15
SFC 13 ”DP NRM_DG”, 5-29
SFC 59 ”RD_REC”, 5-29
Shipping conditions, 6-6
Short-circuit to L+, 5-23
Short-circuit to M, 5-23
Sign, analog value, 7-87, 7-94
Silencer, 3-12
connecting to pneumatic module, 3-11
SIMATIC S5 format, analog value
representation, 7-95
SIMATIC S7 format, analog value
representation, 7-88
Sine-shaped interference, 6-5
SITOP power, 1-15
basic circuit diagram, 7-129
properties, 7-129
settings, 4-39
technical specifications, 7-130
wiring, 4-37
Slave, Glossary-6
Slave diagnosis, 5-27
Slave-diagnosis, structure extended diagnosis,
5-32
Index
Index-7
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
Slot rule, pneumatic-interface module, 1-12
Slot rules, pneumatic interface module, 2-13
Sockets
arrangement on analog module, C-17
arrangement on basic and expansion
modules, C-12
pin assignment, C-12, C-17
unused, 4-35
Start-up, plant, 4-2
Startup
ET 200X, 5-11
ET 200X-DESINA, 5-12
Station number, Glossary-6
Station status
definition, 5-34
structure, 5-34
Status display, 5-17
Status indication, LED, 5-13
Storage conditions, 6-6
Supply, 4-4
Supply voltage
effect on analog value, 7-103
effect on digital value, 7-60, 7-81
failure, 7-60, 7-81, 7-104
feeding, 2-3
SYNC, Glossary-6
System fault, display, 5-13, 5-15
T
T-plug connection, 3-13
Technical specifications, 7-1
5-core cable, 4-13
climatic environmental conditions, 6-6
electromagnetic compatibility, 6-4
general, 6-1
mechanical environmental conditions, 6-6
PROFIBUS-DP, B-1
transport and storage conditions, 6-6
TEMP >-LED , 5-19
Terminating resistor, Glossary-6
connecting, 3-20
Test voltage, 6-9
TN-S system, 4-5
Transmission rate, Glossary-6
permissible, 1-8
permitted, 1-6
Tubing
connecting to pneumatic module, 3-12
diameter, 3-11
Two-wire measuring transducer, 7-106
connecting, 7-107
U
UL recognition, 6-2
Unplugging, of connector, 4-33
Usage
of ET 200X, 1-3
of pneumatic module, 1-11
V
Valve
4/2-way, 1-11, 7-71
service connection, 3-11
Valve island, 1-12
installing, 3-13
Voltage sensor, 7-106
connecting, 7-106
W
Waste air, 3-12
Wire break, 5-23, 7-90, 7-98
constraints, 5-20
Wire end ferrules, 4-17
Wiring, 4-1
ET 200X, 4-11
of SITOP power, 4-37
procedure, 4-11
Wiring rules, connectors, 4-17
Working connection, valve, 3-11
Y
Y connectors, 4-27
plugging in, 4-33
Y-connector, unplugging, 4-33
Index
Index-8 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device
EWA 4NEB 780601602-06
